TNest EN PDF

Software manual
Nest
TruTops version 3
Software manual
Nest
TruTops version 3
Edition
2012-04-13
Order Information
Please specify when ordering this document:

Software manual
Nest
Edition 2012-04-13
Document number S778EN
Address for orders
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG

Technische Redaktion
Johann-Maus-Strae 2
D-71254 Ditzingen
Fon: +49 7156 303 - 0
Fax: +49 7156 303 - 930540
Internet: http://www.trumpf.com
E-Mail: docu.tw@de.trumpf.com
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG
Table of contents
Chapter 1
S778EN
2012-04-13
Basics
Starting and exiting TruToPs
1-7
1.1
Starting TruTops
1-7
1.2
Exiting TruTops
1-7
Online help, software version, tips and

tricks from the Internet
1-8
2.1
To call up the online help
1-8
2.2
Obtaining tips and tricks directly from the

Internet
1-8
2.3
Showing software version
1-8
Applications in TruTops
1-9
3.1
Applications, closing and reopening individually
1-9
3.2
Applications, opening several times ("copy")
1-10
3.3
Application, closing permanently ("deleting")
1-10
3.4
Application, renaming
1-10
3.5
Switching language for all applications
1-11
3.6
Closing open files
1-11
User-defined settings
1-12
4.1
Copying and transferring user-defined settings
1-12
Menus, function browsers and toolbars
1-14
5.1
Displaying and hiding the function browser
1-16
5.2
Displaying and hiding button texts in the

function browser
1-17
5.3
Displaying and hiding quick navigation bar
1-17
5.4
Displaying and hiding toolbars
1-17
5.5
Moving or downsizing toolbars
1-18
5.6
Modifying existing toolbars, creating own toolbars
1-18
5.7
Renaming a toolbar
1-19
5.8
Deleting a toolbar
1-19
Table of contents
0-1
5.9
Resetting toolbars to their original status
1-19
5.10
Modifying the size of the symbols
1-19
5.11
Displaying overlapping contours
1-20
5.12
Reactivating disabled optional message

boxes
1-20
TruTops with PDM (Product Data Management)
1-21
6.1
What is PDM?
1-21
6.2
TruTops with PDM, TruTops without PDM

a comparison
1-22
PDM functions, calling up via prompt/

scripts (pdmCLI.exe)
1-23
7.1
Calling up help for pdmCLI.exe
1-23
7.2
Examples of PDM functions which can be

performed with pdmCLI.exe
1-24
TruTops file browser
1-27
8.1
Opening TruTops file browser
1-28
8.2
Creating a new folder
1-29
8.3
Deleting folders
1-29
8.4
Renaming files or folders
1-29
8.5
Deleting and restoring files, emptying the

recycle bin (PDM)
1-30
8.6
Searching for files
1-31
8.7
Adding other details to the list field of the

files
1-32
8.8
Opening files with the Geo Viewer
1-33
8.9
Sending files through e-mail
1-33
8.10
Zipping files
1-34
8.11
Sending files from PDM to "My Documents"

in the file system
1-34
Creating and restoring file versions (PDM)
1-35
9.1
Displaying and hiding the version window
1-35
9.2
Creating a file version
1-35
9.3
Restoring a file version
1-36
9.4
Deleting a file version
1-37
9.5
Tips & Tricks
1-37
Archiving the copies of a file
0-2
Table of contents
2012-04-13
1-37
S778EN
S778EN
2012-04-13
10
File Properties
1-39
10.1
Viewing file properties
1-39
10.2
Selecting the unprocessed material ID and

raw material from the drawing data
1-39
11
Files and folders, importing/exporting

(PDM)
1-41
11.1
Files, importing/exporting via Windows

Explorer (PDM)
1-41
11.2
Importing files and single folders using the

file browser (PDM)
1-41
11.3
Folders, importing several folders in a single

job step (PDM)
1-42
11.4
Files, exporting via the TruTops file browser

(PDM)
1-43
11.5
Importing/exporting files using the prompt/

script (PDM)
1-44
12
Dependencies Between Files
1-45
12.1
Checking dependencies between files (PDM)
1-45
12.2
Deleting, exporting dependent files, displaying properties
1-46
13
Updated status of the files
1-48
13.1
Checking the updated status of the files automatically when loading and saving in TruTops (PDM)
1-48
14
Characteristics: a property of elements

and contours
1-49
14.1
Switching "Characteristic fixed" on or off TruTops behavior
1-49
14.2
Notches: Advanced options through the

"Characteristic" property
1-51
15
Screen display
1-52
15.1
Adapting window size
1-52
15.2
Increasing or reducing the work surface
1-52
15.3
Modifying color scheme
1-52
15.4
Moving masks and messages on the interface
1-53
15.5
Configuring and activating viewing options
1-53
Table of contents
0-3
16
Display of drawings
1-54
16.1
Restructuring display of drawings
1-54
16.2
Displaying drawing completely
1-54
16.3
Displaying sheet completely
1-54
16.4
Displaying detail view
1-54
16.5
Moving screen section
1-55
16.6
Zooming drawing
1-55
16.7
Getting last view
1-56
16.8
Memorizing and recalling view
1-56
16.9
Displaying and hiding outline points
1-56
17
Selection preview, selecting components
1-58
17.1
Working with selection preview
1-58
Activating selection preview
1-59
17.2
0-4
Table of contents
Selecting components
1-59
Multiple selection
1-59
Fixed multiple selection
1-60
Switching between multiple selection and

fixed multiple selection
1-60
Switching back to individual selection
1-60
Marking all components
1-60
18
Operating TruTops with the mouse
1-62
18.1
Automatically placing the mouse pointer in

masks
1-62
19
Operating TruTops using keyboard
1-63
19.1
Using Windows keyboard commands and

shortcuts
1-63
19.2
Entering numerical values and coordinates
1-63
19.3
Entering texts in input fields
1-63
19.4
Using key functions of TruTops
1-64
19.5
Using "Copy" "Paste"
1-65
19.6
Using keyboard buffer of the command line

(repeating entries)
1-65
20
Calculator
1-66
20.1
Deactivating calculator permanently
1-66
20.2
Entering numerical values in input fields
1-67
20.3
Entering X and Y coordinates of points
1-67
2012-04-13
S778EN
21
Searching with the help of place holders

(wildcards)
1-68
22
Message and confirmation masks
1-69
22.1
Reactivating hidden message and confirmation masks
1-69
23
Print
1-70
23.1
Printing screen content
1-70
23.2
Configuring line thickness when printing

screen contents
1-70
23.3
Printing Geos as HPGL
1-70
23.4
Printing labels (optional)
1-71
24
Using auxiliary tools
1-72
24.1
Drawing auxiliary lines
1-72
24.2
S778EN
2012-04-13
Drawing auxiliary line through 2 points
1-72
Drawing an auxiliary line parallel to the

existing auxiliary line
1-72
Drawing horizontal or vertical auxiliary

lines
1-72
Drawing an auxiliary line as a tangent at

the arc element and point
1-73
Drawing an auxiliary line at right angles to

an element
1-73
Drawing an auxiliary line using a point

and angle of inclination
1-74
Drawing an auxiliary line through point

and angle to the base line
1-74
Drawing an auxiliary line through tangent

at 2 arc elements
1-75
Dividing an element with an auxiliary line
1-75
Drawing auxiliary circle
1-76
Drawing an auxiliary circle through three

points
1-76
Drawing auxiliary circle through center

and radius
1-76
Drawing auxiliary circle through diameter
1-76

and diameter
1-77
Drawing concentric auxiliary circles
1-77
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to two

elements
1-78
Table of contents
0-5
24.3
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to an

element and two points
1-78
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to three

elements
1-79

element
1-79
Auxiliary geometry
1-79
Auxiliary geometry, deleting

24.4
24.5
Measuring
1-80
Measuring the distance between 2 points
1-80
Measuring coordinates of a point
1-80
Measuring horizontal or vertical distance

between 2 points
1-80
Measuring coordinates, radius and diameter of a circle
1-80
Measuring angle
1-81
Measuring length
1-81
Zero point of the coordinate system

Displacing zero point
Chapter 2
Table of contents
1-81
1-81
25
Help in the case of problems
1-82
25.1
Diagnostics for program crash
1-82
Setting basic data
The database as a knowledge-base
2-5
1.1
Backup of data
2-6
1.2
To import data into the database
2-6
1.3
To modify the database
2-6
1.4
To send a database via email
2-7
TRUMPF function
2-8
Data management
2-9
3.1
To open the data management
2-9
Machine data
2-10
4.1
Updating machine version
2-10
To set up automatic updates
0-6
1-80
2012-04-13
2-10
S778EN
To update manually
4.2
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-11
To configure the basic data of the machine
2-12
To modify the basic data
2-12
Dimensions
2-12
Limit values
2-13
Workpiece support
2-13
Limit stops
2-16
4.3
2-17
4.4
Laser data, configuring
2-18
4.5
To allocate and configure the automation

components
2-19
4.6
To define and configure the unloading area

for palletizing
2-20
4.7
To configure the options
2-31
4.8
To select the machine options
2-32
4.9
Select the repositioning devices
2-33
4.10
To set up the removal and sorting of small

parts
2-33
4.11
Adjusting the automation components
2-34
4.12
Adjust stop pin data
2-35
4.13
Clamps
2-36
To configure clamps
2-36
Adjust clamp data
2-36
4.14
To set up the production package edition
2-37
4.15
To copy or delete a machine
2-38
Copying machine
2-38
Deleting machine
2-39
Tool data
2-40
5.1
To define tool system data
2-40
5.2
To set the tool lubrication
2-41
SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT
2-43
6.1
Defining suction cup data
2-43
6.2
To configure SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT
2-45
6.3
SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT with grippers: to

define moving table
2-49
6.4
To change U parameters
2-51
6.5
To modify data for lifts with a Y offset
2-54
6.6

for palletizing
2-56
Table of contents
0-7
0-8
Table of contents
GripMaster/Grip
2-68
7.1
To configure GripMaster/Grip
2-68
SortMaster
2-70
Material data
2-71
9.1
To add material data
2-73
9.2
To define the margins of a sheet of unprocessed material
2-76
9.3
To modify material data
2-76
9.4
To delete material data
2-77
10
Technology tables
2-78
10.1
Naming technology tables
2-79
TRUMPF laser-independent standard

tables
2-79
TRUMPF laser-dependent standard tables
2-81
10.2
To filter technology tables
2-82
10.3
To change the header data for a technology

table
2-83
10.4
Copy technology table
2-84
10.5
To delete a technology table
2-85
10.6
To display and print a technology table
2-85
10.7
Technology table parameters
2-86
Modify parameter
2-86
Description of the parameters
2-87
Allocating rules
2-93
11
Laser rules
2-94
11.1
Name of the rules
2-94
11.2
Search for rules via technology table
2-95
11.3
Copy rules
2-96
11.4
Delete Rules
2-97
11.5
Display and print rules
2-98
11.6
Parameters for the rules
2-98
Modify parameter
2-98
2-99
12
The rules for machines and systems
2-107
12.1
To change the value of a variable
2-107
12.2
To create a variable
2-108
2012-04-13
S778EN
S778EN
2012-04-13
12.3
To copy a variable
2-109
12.4
To display the details for a variable
2-109
12.5
To delete a variable
2-110
12.6
To assign the values to colors and line types
2-111
12.7
Description of variables in the machine rules
2-112
12.8
Description of the variables in the system

rules
2-126
13
Removal rules
2-148
13.1
To change priority
2-148
13.2
Change data
2-148
13.3
Create Rules
2-148
13.4
To reset a set of rules
2-149
14
User's own NC texts (any cycles)
2-150
14.1
Creating a free cycle
2-150
14.2
To copy any cycle
2-151
14.3
To change any cycle
2-152
14.4
To delete any cycle for the active machine
2-152
14.5
To print any cycle
2-152
14.6
To use formulas to calculate the time
2-153
15
NC post-processing programs, external

programs
2-154
15.1
To enter programs
2-154
15.2
To execute programs
2-156
15.3
Creating a collection call up for several NC

post-processing programs
2-156
15.4
To modify programs
2-159
15.5
To delete programs
2-159
16
User-defined programs
2-160
16.1
To enter programs
2-160
16.2
To change programs
2-160
16.3
To run programs
2-160
Table of contents
0-9
Chapter 3
Nesting parts
"Nest" application
3-4
1.1
Activating parts monitoring
3-5
1.2
Enable snapping
3-6
Nesting jobs
3-7
2.1
Compiling a new nesting job
3-8
2.2
2.3
Creating nesting job
3-11
Defining nesting parameters
3-12
Starting automatic nesting process
3-23
Saving the nesting job
3-23
Modifying sheet name
3-24
Adding parts to the nesting job
3-24
Deleting parts in the nesting job
3-27
Modifying parts in the nesting job
3-27
Displaying identical parts in colors
3-27
Re-nesting parts or sheets automatically
3-28
Modifying the sheet view
3-28
Modifying the sheet layout

Loading an existing sheet layout
3-29
Manually layout parts
3-29
Moving and rotating parts
3-30
Aligning, centering and distributing parts
3-32
Mirroring a part or part group on a vertical

axis
3-34
Changing the reference point
3-34
Modifying the number of parts
3-34
Modifying the distance between parts
3-36
Editing part grids
3-36
Copying or cutting parts from one sheet to

another
3-37
Placing parts at exact distance for common cuts (TwinLine
3-39
Deleting parts
3-40
Deleting sheets
3-41
Sheet format, modifying
3-41
Importing and exporting nesting jobs

Exporting nesting jobs
0-10
Table of contents
3-28
2012-04-13
3-41
3-41
S778EN
Importing nesting jobs
3-42
Structure of a job file ('*.DAT') in detail
3-43
Creating sheets and laying out with parts
3-47
3.1
Creating new sheet
3-47
3.2
Creating a nesting job from a single sheet
3-50
3.3
Automatically laying out individual sheets
3-50
2012-04-13
3-50
Automatically laying out parts
3-51
Sectional sheet layout (multi-copy processing)
3-51
Laying out sheet with the number of parts

(multi-copy machining
3-53
Remainder sheets
3-55
4.1
Defining remainder sheets with any geometry
3-55
4.2
Managing remainder sheets
3-55
4.3
Taking off remainder sheets
3-56
MiniNest
3-57
5.1
Creating a MiniNest
3-57
5.2
Exporting a MiniNest
3-57
5.3
Modifying MiniNests
3-58
5.4
S778EN
Defining parameters for automatic sheet

layout
Moving MiniNests
3-58
Rotating MiniNests
3-60
Automatically rejecting modifications to

MiniNests
3-62
Distancing single parts of mini nests for common separating cuts (TwinLine
3-62
... by moving
3-62
... by rotating
3-63
Displaying the sheet
3-64
6.1
Showing parts of a sheet in color
3-64
6.2
Displaying sheets with machine environment
3-64
6.3
Displaying sheet with automation components
3-65
Information about sheet layout and nesting jobs
3-66
7.1
Displaying and hiding geometries of single

parts
3-66
Table of contents
0-11
Chapter 4
7.2
Displaying the scrap of a sheet or the total

sheet waste
3-66
7.3

parts
3-67
7.4
Displaying single part information
3-68
Nesting parts in tiles (optional)
3-69
8.1
Defining parameters
3-69
Order interface (Option)
Order interface
4-3
User interfaces
4-4
2.1
Production orders mask
4-4
2.2
Order interface mask
4-4
Toolbars
4-5
Symbols
4-5
Operating the order interface
4-7
3.1
Importing an order in the order interface
4-7
3.2
Using an existing production order
4-7
3.3
Using new production order
4-8
3.4
Confirming the completion of a production

order
4-9
3.5
Settings
4-9
3.6
3.7
3.8
Modify basic settings
4-9
Language change
4-9
Changing the measuring system
4-10
Resetting view to standard size
4-10
Dialogs
4-10
Input fields
4-11
Buttons
4-11
Overviews in the order interface

Sorting overviews
4-11
Outputting overviews
4-12
Data records, number of
4-13
Filter functions
4-14
Filter for production orders
0-12
Table of contents
4-11
2012-04-13
4-14
S778EN
3.9
2012-04-13
Initial filter for PPC orders
4-15
Help in the order interface
4-16
4-16
Tool tips
4-16
PPC orders
4-17
4.1
Overview
4-17
4.2
Working with PPC orders
4-17
Displaying PPC orders
4-17
Creating a PPC order
4-18
Processing PPC orders
4-18
Cancel PPC orders
4-19
Enter PPC orders
4-19
Remove PPS orders
4-19
Order data
4-20
4.4
S778EN
4-15
Documentation
4.3
Chapter 5
Filter for PPC orders
Importing PPC orders manually
4-21
Creating an import scheme
4-21
Importing data
4-23
Job management
4-23
Displaying related jobs
4-24
Delete job
4-24
Index
Table of contents
0-13
0-14
Table of contents
2012-04-13
S778EN
Chapter 1
Basics
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-7
1.1
Starting TruTops
1-7
1.2
Exiting TruTops
1-7
Online help, software version, tips and

tricks from the Internet
1-8
2.1
1-8
2.2
Obtaining tips and tricks directly from the

Internet
1-8
2.3
1-8
1-9
3.1
Applications, closing and reopening individually
1-9
3.2
Applications, opening several times ("copy")
1-10
3.3
Application, closing permanently ("deleting")
1-10
3.4
1-10
3.5
Switching language for all applications
1-11
Basics
1-1
1-2
Basics
3.6
Closing open files
1-11
1-12
4.1
Copying and transferring user-defined settings
1-12
1-14
5.1
Displaying and hiding the function browser
1-16
5.2
Displaying and hiding button texts in the

function browser
1-17
5.3
Displaying and hiding quick navigation bar
1-17
5.4
1-17
5.5
1-18
5.6
Modifying existing toolbars, creating own toolbars
1-18
5.7
Renaming a toolbar
1-19
5.8
Deleting a toolbar
1-19
5.9
Resetting toolbars to their original status
1-19
5.10
Modifying the size of the symbols
1-19
5.11
Displaying overlapping contours
1-20
5.12
Reactivating disabled optional message

boxes
1-20
1-21
6.1
What is PDM?
1-21
6.2
TruTops with PDM, TruTops without PDM

a comparison
1-22

1-23
7.1
1-23
7.2
Examples of PDM functions which can be

performed with pdmCLI.exe
1-24
1-27
8.1
1-28
8.2
1-29
8.3
Deleting folders
1-29
8.4
1-29
8.5
Deleting and restoring files, emptying the

recycle bin (PDM)
1-30
8.6
Searching for files
1-31
2012-04-13
S778EN
8.7
Adding other details to the list field of the

files
1-32
8.8
1-33
8.9
1-33
8.10
Zipping files
1-34
8.11
Sending files from PDM to "My Documents"

in the file system
1-34
1-35
9.1
Displaying and hiding the version window
1-35
9.2
1-35
9.3
1-36
9.4
1-37
9.5
Tips & Tricks
1-37
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-37
10
File Properties
1-39
10.1
Viewing file properties
1-39
10.2
Selecting the unprocessed material ID and

raw material from the drawing data
1-39
11

(PDM)
1-41
11.1
Files, importing/exporting via Windows

Explorer (PDM)
1-41
11.2
Importing files and single folders using the

file browser (PDM)
1-41
11.3
Folders, importing several folders in a single

job step (PDM)
1-42
11.4
Files, exporting via the TruTops file browser

(PDM)
1-43
11.5
Importing/exporting files using the prompt/

script (PDM)
1-44
12
1-45
12.1
Checking dependencies between files (PDM)
1-45
12.2
Deleting, exporting dependent files, displaying properties
1-46
13
1-48
13.1
Checking the updated status of the files automatically when loading and saving in TruTops (PDM)
1-48
Basics
1-3
14
Characteristics: a property of elements

and contours
1-49
14.1
Switching "Characteristic fixed" on or off TruTops behavior
1-49
14.2

1-51
15
Screen display
1-52
15.1
Adapting window size
1-52
15.2
Increasing or reducing the work surface
1-52
15.3
Modifying color scheme
1-52
15.4
Moving masks and messages on the interface
1-53
15.5
Configuring and activating viewing options
1-53
16
Display of drawings
1-54
16.1
Restructuring display of drawings
1-54
16.2
Displaying drawing completely
1-54
16.3
Displaying sheet completely
1-54
16.4
Displaying detail view
1-54
16.5
Moving screen section
1-55
16.6
Zooming drawing
1-55
16.7
Getting last view
1-56
16.8
Memorizing and recalling view
1-56
16.9
Displaying and hiding outline points
1-56
17
1-58
17.1
Working with selection preview
1-58
1-59
17.2
1-4
Basics
1-59
Multiple selection
1-59
1-60

1-60
1-60
1-60
18
1-62
18.1

masks
1-62
2012-04-13
S778EN
S778EN
2012-04-13
19
1-63
19.1
Using Windows keyboard commands and

shortcuts
1-63
19.2
Entering numerical values and coordinates
1-63
19.3
Entering texts in input fields
1-63
19.4
Using key functions of TruTops
1-64
19.5
Using "Copy" "Paste"
1-65
19.6
Using keyboard buffer of the command line

(repeating entries)
1-65
20
Calculator
1-66
20.1
Deactivating calculator permanently
1-66
20.2
Entering numerical values in input fields
1-67
20.3
Entering X and Y coordinates of points
1-67
21
Searching with the help of place holders

(wildcards)
1-68
22
1-69
22.1
Reactivating hidden message and confirmation masks
1-69
23
Print
1-70
23.1
Printing screen content
1-70
23.2
Configuring line thickness when printing

screen contents
1-70
23.3
Printing Geos as HPGL
1-70
23.4
Printing labels (optional)
1-71
24
1-72
24.1
1-72
1-72

1-72

lines
1-72

1-73

an element
1-73
Drawing an auxiliary line using a point

and angle of inclination
1-74
Basics
1-5
24.2
24.3
Drawing an auxiliary line through point

and angle to the base line
1-74

at 2 arc elements
1-75
1-75
1-76

points
1-76

and radius
1-76
1-76

and diameter
1-77
1-77

elements
1-78

1-78

elements
1-79

element
1-79
Auxiliary geometry
1-79

24.4
24.5
Measuring
1-80
1-80
1-80

between 2 points
1-80
Measuring coordinates, radius and diameter of a circle
1-80
Measuring angle
1-81
Measuring length
1-81

1-6
Basics
1-80
1-81
1-81
25
1-82
25.1
Diagnostics for program crash
1-82
2012-04-13
S778EN
1.
1.1
Starting TruTops
Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >TruTops.
1.2
Exiting TruTops
Select Exit TruTops
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-7
Displaying the software

manual
Displaying the Read me file
2.
Online help, software version, tips

and tricks from the Internet
2.1
1. Select >Help >Help or press the <F1> key.

The software manual of the relevant application (CAD, Nest,
Laser, Punch...) opens (.pdf-file with bookmarks).
2. Select >Help >Readme.
2.2
Obtaining tips and tricks directly from

the Internet
TruTops offers the option of accessing the Internet and thus the
TRUMPF homepage directly. The homepage among other things
has tips and tricks for programming and useful information about
the product.
Select >Help >TruTops on the Internet.
Internet Explorer with the CAD/CAM info service is started.
2.3
Displaying all software
versions
Displaying the software

version of individual
applications
1. Select the ? symbol on the blue bar.

The "Version information" mask appears.
2. Select OK to close.
3. Select >Help >Info....
The "Version" mask is displayed.
4. Select "Version" tab.
1-8
Online help, software version, tips and tricks from

the Internet
2012-04-13
S778EN
3.
After the installation of TruTops, every application is separately

available as a separate "tab".
Every application can be opened several times, closed and reopened individually, closed permanently ("delete"), renamed or
moved individually.
All individual modifications (including modifications to the interface, such as background color, adapted toolbars ...) are saved
user-specifically and are loaded automatically when TruTops is
opened.
Applications currently available in TruTops:
TruTops CAD: drawing parts or loading them from other CAD

systems, setting basic data (e.g. material).
TruTops Tube CAD: drawing parts for tube processing or
loading parts from other CAD systems, setting basic data
(e. g. material).
Nest: nesting parts, setting basic data (e.g. material).
TruTops Laser: defining laser processing, setting basic data
for the laser processing (e.g. slat layout, Cateye ...).
TruTops Punch: defining punching or multi-purpose processing, setting basis data for the punching or multi-purpose processing (e.g. clamp data, repositioning cylinders ...).
TruTops Tube: defining tube processing, setting basic data
for the tube processing (e.g. clamping technique, measuring
programs ...).
TruTops Bend: defining bend processing, setting basic data
for the bending program.
3.1
Applications, closing and reopening

individually
Note
If an application has been closed, the individual user settings of
the application are retained.
Closing an application
1. Right click on the tab of the application that is to be closed.

The context menu is displayed.
Reopen application?
2. Select >Close.
3. Right click on the tab of any open application.
4. Click >Open.
5. Select the application to be opened.
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-9
3.2
Applications, opening several times

("copy")
1. Right click on the tab of any application.

2. Select >New.
All available applications are displayed in another submenu.
3. Mark the application that is to be opened (i.e. copied) once
more.
The copied application is opened. The name is extended by
an additive.
3.3
Application, closing permanently

("deleting")
Notes
If an application is closed permanently, it is no longer

opened automatically when TruTops is started. The individual
user settings are lost.
The application can be reopened using the context menu
(right click on the tab of any open application, select >New).
1. Right click on the tab of the application that is to be closed

permanently.
2. Select >Delete.
3.4
1. Right click on the tab of the desired application.

2. Select >Rename.
3. Enter the new name of the application.
4. Press OK.
1-10
2012-04-13
S778EN
3.5
Switching language for all

applications
1. Select languages
The "Language selection" mask is displayed.

2. Select the desired language.
Note
With Windows Vista and Windows 7:
In the Korean, Chinese, Japanese, Polish and Russian languages, observe the operating system of the computer on
which TruTops has been installed.
Example:
"Korean": for a Korean operating system.
"Korean (West)": with Western operating system.
3. Press OK.
The new language becomes effective the next time TruTops is
started.
3.6
Closing open files
Files currently open in the applications (e.g. drawings, nesting

jobs, processed tubes) can be closed without having to close
and reopen the application itself.
Select >File >Close.
The working range of the application is empty.
The application status is the same as directly after starting it up.
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-11
4.
TruTops can be set individually depending on the user (e.g. type

and number of applications that are opened, individually created
toolbars, size of the symbols...).
User-defined settings within an application are retained during
an update as well as during a new installation of TruTops.
The type and number of applications that are opened when starting TruTops remain unchanged after updating TruTops. Each
application is started once after being installed or whenever a
new user logs on.
4.1
Copying and transferring userdefined settings
User-defined settings (e.g. type and number of applications that

are opened, personal interface settings in the individual applications) can be copied and transferred as follows:
Copy settings of a user and provide them to another user.

Transfer the settings of a user from one work station (computer) to another work station (computer).
Copy interface settings of an application (e.g. of "CAD 1" )
and transfer them to the "CAD 2" application (on the same
computer).
Conditions
Administrator rights and copyrights are required in all user

folders in order to copy the user-defined settings.
User-defined settings of TruTops can be copied and transferred to another computer only for the same user.
1. Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >TruTops Administration >TruTops Config.

The Microsoft Windows Explorer is started. The folder in
which the user settings are saved is displayed automatically.
Example: English operating system with "millerha" as user
path 'C:\Documents and Settings\millerha\Application Data
\TRUMPF'" is opened.
The 'TRUMPF' folder has a subfolder for TruTops and further
subfolders for every application. In addition, the data is
stored as per the product versions.
2.
Either
To transfer the settings to another computer: copy the
entire 'TRUMPF' folder and paste it in the appropriate
folder on another computer.
1-12
2012-04-13
S778EN
or
To provide the settings to another user on the same
computer: copy the entire 'TRUMPF' folder and store it in
the intermediate storage at a suitable location.
Log in another user on to the computer.
Paste the entire 'TRUMPF' folder in the appropriate folder
of another user.
or
To copy (e.g.) the settings of the "CAD 1" application and
transfer them to "CAD 2" application: copy the 'x.usr' file
in the folder of the "CAD 1" application and paste it in
the folder of the "CAD 2" application.
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-13
5.
Language switchover
Application
Toolbars (can be customized,

can be moved to the desired
position using the sizing tool)
Menus, function browsers and

toolbars
Main menu bar with main menu

and submenus
Function browser
Exiting TruTops
Status bar and message line
Command and input line (can

be moved to the desired position using the sizing tool)
Command block
TruTops user interface (here: CAD application is open)
Main menus and submenus
1-14
Fig. 50209
The main menus and submenus contain all functions available in

the relevant application (CAD, Nest, Laser, Punch ...).
2012-04-13
S778EN
Function browser
Function category (corresponding to an entry in the main

menu)
Pin, pressed (function group is

permanently open)
Function group (corresponding

to a submenu)
Pin, open (function group is

closed as soon as another one
is opened)
3
4
Multi-function button
Quick navigation bar (can be

displayed and hidden)
Button text (can be displayed

and hidden)
Scrolling with the mouse wheel
Function navigator
Fig. 50208
The function browser contains the most important (TruTops-specific) functions. The function browser is subdivided into separate
function categories (e.g. "Modify"). The function categories are
further divided into function groups (e.g. "Move").
The function browser can be dragged to the desired width. Frequently used function groups within a function category can be
"pinned", i.e. can be opened permanently.
Multi-function buttons
Some of the buttons in the function browser function as multifunction buttons or options buttons.
Multi-function buttons are marked with a triangle in the bottom
right. They display their current function in the function browser.
The current function can be changed with a right click (submenu).
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-15
Options buttons switch functions on or off.
Multi-function button
Options button
Displays the current function

(here: create 1 copy and move
by 2 points)
Green: Function is activated.

Gray: Function is deactivated
Multi-function buttons, options buttons
Toolbars
Fig. 50212
Toolbars allow quick access to the most important functions.

Depending on the user, they can be created individually, can be
added to commands, can be moved and downsized. The toolbars can thus be adapted to typical programming tasks at any
time.
Status bar and message line
Command line and input line
The current X and Y position of the mouse pointer is displayed in the status bar (including the measuring unit).
The message line displays the ongoing action. Examples:
Reading of file.... finished
Drawing deleted!
The command line gives instructions about what is to be

done. Examples:
Enter first point
Identify object to be rearranged
Mark element or click on "OK"
The required data can be entered in the input line. Each

entry must be confirmed with the enter key () on the keyboard. Examples of entries:
X and Y coordinates of points.
Angle.
5.1
Displaying and hiding the function

browser
Note
In the Bend application, the function browser cannot be hidden.
Activate or deactivate >View >Toolbars >Function browser.
1-16
2012-04-13
S778EN
5.2
Displaying and hiding button texts in

the function browser
The button texts in the function browser can be hidden and displayed again.
If the button texts are hidden, one can only work with icons and
tool tips.
1.
Either
Select >Tools >Options....
or
Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt....

Select the "Options" tab.
2. Activate or deactivate "Show icon and text".
3. Select Close.
5.3
Displaying and hiding quick

navigation bar
Function groups can be opened very quickly with the quick navigation bar (4) (see "Fig. 50208", pg. 1-15).
1.
Either
or

2. Activate or deactivate "Show Quick navigation bar".
3. Select Close.
5.4
Sizing tool
Button
"File" icon bar
Fig. 50210
1. Select >View >Toolbars.

2. Activate or deactivate the desired toolbars.
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-17
5.5
Moving toolbars
Downsizing toolbars
1. Using the mouse, move the toolbar to the desired position

with the sizing tool (= vertical lines on the left side).
2. To downsize the toolbar on the left: use the mouse to move
the toolbar with the sizing tool (= vertical lines on the left
side) to the left until the toolbar on the left is downsized.
or
Using the mouse, move the toolbar with the sizing tool
(= vertical lines on the left side) to the right until the toolbar
is downsized.
Two arrows are displayed on the right side of the downsized
toolbar (>>).
Arrows to select the hidden functions
Minimized "File" icon bar
Fig. 50211
3. To select the functions that are (now) hidden: click >> and
select the desired function.
5.6
Modifying existing toolbars, creating

own toolbars
In addition to the already existing toolbars, the user can create

his own toolbars and equip them with the required buttons.
Alternatively, unnecessary buttons can be deleted and missing
buttons can be added to the existing toolbars.
Creating a toolbar
1. Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt....

2. Select New in the "Toolbars" tab.
3. Enter the name of the user-defined toolbar and select OK.
The toolbar that is (still) empty is displayed automatically
under the main menu bar.
Adding a button to the

toolbar
1-18
4. Select the "Commands" tab.

5. In the "Categories" field, click on the desired category.
6. Drag the desired command from the "Commands" field into
the new toolbar.
7. After creating all the desired toolbars, select Close.
2012-04-13
S778EN
Removing a button again?
8. If the "Adapt" mask is no longer open: select >View >Toolbars >Adapt... again.
9. Drag the buttons to be removed out of the toolbar using the
mouse and drop them.
5.7
Renaming a toolbar

2. Mark the icon bar that is to be renamed in the "Toolbars"
tab.
3. Select Rename.
4. Enter the new name of the toolbar and select OK.
5. Select Close.
5.8
1.
2.
3.
4.
Deleting a toolbar

Mark the icon bar that is to be deleted in the "Toolbars" tab.
Select Delete.
Select Close.
5.9
Resetting toolbars to their original

status
All individual modifications (e.g. user-defined toolbars, moved

toolbars) are cancelled when resetting the toolbars. The originally
installed status is restored. (Exception: size of the symbols.)
2. In the "Toolbars" tab, select Reset....
5.10 Modifying the size of the symbols

The size of the symbols in the toolbars and the function browser
can be modified. (However, the size of the symbols in the menus
and the quick navigation bar cannot be modified.)
1.
Either
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-19
or
Select "Options" tab.
2. Activate or deactivate "Large symbols".
3. Select Close.
5.11 Displaying overlapping contours

Select >View, >Highlight overlapping contours.
The overlapping contours are displayed in cyan and all intersecting points as yellow squares. The contours are separated at the
intersecting points.
5.12 Reactivating disabled optional

message boxes
1. Select >Extras >Modify data....
2. Select >User >Configuration.
The "Configuration" mask is displayed.
3. Select "Show optional message boxes again".
4. Press Modify.
1-20
2012-04-13
S778EN
6.
TruTops with PDM (Product Data

Management)
6.1
What is PDM?
With the PDM Data Management, files can be saved and managed centrally for all products.
Data Management with PDM
The advantages of PDM
Fig. 56726
S778EN
2012-04-13
PDM is a central storage location for any number of TruTops

work stations and various TruTops products.
All TruTops products work using PDM.
The dependencies between files are displayed for all products.
You can delete and export files, recognize dependencies and
view file properties with a mouse click.
1-21
You can use the new TruTops file browser to search for
parts quickly and specifically using the advanced search criteria in PDM.
There are three options available as interfaces to older TruTops versions and other software products which are not
PDM-compatible:
Importing and exporting files and directories via the TruTops file browser.
Importing and exporting files and directories with the Windows prompt or automated by means of a script.
Direct access via an enabled Windows folder or network
drive.
6.2
TruTops with PDM, TruTops without

PDM a comparison
Characteristic
TruTops with PDM
TruTops with file

system
The system checks whether the files are up to date.
Yes
The dependencies between files are monitored for all products.
Yes
Searching for and displaying files by means of TruTops-specific

characteristics (e.g. material) is supported.
Yes, fast
Yes, slow
Heterogeneous data management (metric and inch) is supported.
Yes
Yes
File attributes ("Properties") created with different character sets

(European, Japanese, ASCII) can be saved (display in TruTops
still not correct).
Yes
Comparison of TruTops with PDM and TruTops with file system
Tab. 1-1
When working without the PDM, all functions of the TruTops file
browser are available.
1-22
TruTops with PDM, TruTops without PDM a

comparison
2012-04-13
S778EN
7.

The following PDM functions can be called up via the Windows

prompt or can be executed in an automated manner via script
files (*.bat).
Function
Command
Remark
Exporting files/directories from a directory
Get
(see "Files and folders, importing/exporting

(PDM)", pg. 1-41)
Importing files into a folder
Put
(see "Files and folders, importing/exporting

(PDM)", pg. 1-41)
Deleting files from a folder
Delete
(see "Examples of PDM functions which can be

performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1-24)
Listing files in a folder
List

Generating lists of attributes
ListAttributes

Creating a new (sub) folder
Mkdir

Deleting an empty (sub) folder
Rmdir

Copying a file or folder into a target

folder
Copy

Moving a file or folder to a target folder
Move

Redetermining file properties and

dependencies
Rescan

Executing commands contained in a

script file
Batch

Tab. 1-2
7.1
1. Start Windows prompt.

2. Go to the ':\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin' folder.
3. Enter the following command:
pdmCLI.exe h
S778EN
2012-04-13
PDM functions, calling up via prompt/scripts

(pdmCLI.exe)
1-23
Help for pdmCLI.exe is displayed:
Help for pdmCLI.exe
Fig. 43561
4. To call up help for a specific command (e.g. "Put"), enter the

following command:
pdmCLI.exe h Put
Help for the specific command is displayed:
Fig. 43562
Help on the "Put" command
7.2
Examples of PDM functions which

can be performed with pdmCLI.exe
Notes
1-24
Write everything in a single line when entering commands

in the command prompt or in script files.
Be sure that slashes, backslashes, and spaces are correct.
Replace server name with the actual name of the server.
Only those parts highlighted in bold can vary from the commands shown in the examples. Everything before and after it
remains the same.

(pdmCLI.exe)
2012-04-13
S778EN
Opening command prompts,

creating script files
1.
Either
Start Windows command prompt.
Go to the folder ':\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin''.
or
Deleting file
Write cd C:\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin in a selfwritten BAT shell file (*.bat).

Extend the following (example) command lines.
2. To delete the 'box.mi' file in the '/
TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1/' folder, for example, enter the
following command:
pdmCLI.exe Delete /TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1/box.mi -service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address=servername:
9999
3. Press <Enter> or <Return> ().
Listing files in a folder
4. To list all files in the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1' folder, for

example, enter the following command:
pdmCLI.exe List /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --servicename=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address=servername:9999
Generating lists of attributes
6. To create a list of attributes, enter the following command:

pdmCLI.exe ListAttributes --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 -port-address=servername:9999
Creating a new (sub) folder
8. To create a folder '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1', for example, enter the following command:

pdmCLI.exe Mkdir /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --servicename=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address=servername:9999
Deleting a (sub) folder
10. To delete the folder '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1', for example, enter the following command:
pdmCLI.exe Rmdir /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --servicename=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address=servername:9999
Copying a single file into a

different folder
12. To copy the 'box.mi' file in the '/

TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1' folder to the '/
TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2' folder, for example, enter the
following command:
pdmCLI.exe Copy /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1/ box.mi -target-directory=/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2 --servicename=TruTopsPDM2 -- port-address=servername:9999
Copying several files into a

different folder
S778EN
2012-04-13
14. To copy all files from the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1'

folder into the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2' folder, for

(pdmCLI.exe)
1-25
pdmCLI.exe Copy /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --targetdirectory=/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2 --servicename=ToPs_PDM --port-address=servername:9999

Moving a single file into a
different folder
16. To move the 'box.mi' file from the '/TRUMPF.NET/

TEST_DIR_1/' to the '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2' folder, for
pdmCLI.exe Move /TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1/ box.mi -target-directory=/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2 --servicename=TruTopsPDM2 -- port-address=servername:9999
Moving a folder
18. To move the '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1' folder into the '/

TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2' folder, for example, enter the
following command:
pdmCLI.exe Move /TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1 --targetdirectory=/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2 --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address=servername:9999
Redetermining file properties

and dependencies
20. Enter the following command:

pdmCLI.exe Rescan --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --portaddress=servername:9999
1-26

(pdmCLI.exe)
2012-04-13
S778EN
8.
The TruTops file browser features the following functions:
Convenient and simple operation with a user-friendly interface (Windows standard).

Advanced search functions: various additional configurable
search criteria assist you in systematic part management.
All files in the TruTops file browser are displayed in a folder
structure.
The dependencies between files are displayed (PDM).
Simple import and export of files (PDM).
Creating and restoring file versions (PDM).
Navigate back
Create version
Navigate forwards
Update view
Go to next higher directory
10 Navigator
Filter view (search)
11 Directory contents (file list)
Folder view
12 Current path
Show and hide version window
Create new folder
13 Show directories from which a

file has already been opened
TruTops file browser (here via File, Open, with PDM)
Quick access to folders
Quick access to a folder in the TruTops file browser is possible

as follows:
S778EN
2012-04-13
Fig. 53347
Open file browser (e.g. via >File >Open).

Keep the <Shift> key pressed and press the <Tab> key twice
or click directly in the file list using the mouse.
Enter the first letters of the desired folder until the required
folder is marked.
1-27
Last selected folder
TruTops shows the current path under the toolbar (9).

To show folders from which a file has already been loaded: open
the current path with (11).
File sorting options
The displayed files can be sorted according to the required detail

by clicking on the detail (e.g. "File size").
The detail used for sorting is marked in gray. Clicking repeatedly
on the detail modifies the sorting direction (upward/downward).
Context menu of the

Shortcut Menu
Context menu of TruTops file browser (here via Open file,

with PDM)
Fig. 41364
Note
Menu items that cannot be selected at the relevant point are
grayed out.
8.1
The TruTops file browser is automatically opened when, for

example, a file is opened via >File >Open or a file is saved via
>File >Save.
Additionally, the TruTops file browser can be opened independent from the loading or saving of a file:
In an arbitrary TruTops application: select >File >File
browser....
or
Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >PDM Browser.
1-28
2012-04-13
S778EN
8.2
1. Open file browser (e.g.via >File >File browser).

2.
Either
Select
(Create new folder).
or
Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Select >New.
3. Enter the name of the new folder.
5. If required, refresh view with
8.3
(Refresh) or <F5>.
Deleting folders

2. Select the folder to be deleted.
3.
Either
Press <Entf> or <Del>.
or

Select >Delete.
4. Confirm the query with OK.
8.4

2.
Either
Go to the folder to be renamed.
Select the folder.
or
Go to the folder in which files are to be renamed.
Select the file.
3.
Either
Click on the folder or the file name once.
or

Select >Rename.
4. Enter a new name.
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-29
5. Confirm the new name with <Enter> or <Return> () or click

outside the folder or file name.
8.5
Deleting and restoring files, emptying

the recycle bin (PDM)
When working with PDM, deleted files are moved to the recycle
bin of the file browser. These files can be restored from the
recycle bin if required (including all attributes such as material,
material thickness etc.).
The folder name of the recycle bin is 'RecycleBin' and can be
modified (at the PDM server) by the PDM administrator.
When working in the file system, a simple query appears asking
whether the file should be deleted permanently.
Deleting files

2. Go to the folder from which files are to be deleted.
3. Select the file(s) to be deleted. To mark several files: press
<Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed.
4.
Either
or

Select Delete.
5. Confirm the query.
When working with PDM, the files (including the path specifications and the extension '.trash.zip') are moved to the recycle bin of the file browser.
Tip
To delete files permanently (then they are not moved to the
recycle bin and cannot be restored): press the Shift key
when deleting files.
Restoring deleted files
Emptying recycle bin
1-30
6. Go to the recycle bin of the TruTops file browser ('RecycleBin').

7. Select the file to be restored (i.e. the complete file specification with the file name and the extension '.trash.zip'). To
mark several files: press <Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed.
8. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
9. Select >Restore.
10. Go to the recycle bin of the TruTops file browser ('RecycleBin').
2012-04-13
S778EN
11. To delete single files in the recycle bin permanently: select

the files. To mark several files: press <Strg> or <Ctrl>
pressed.
12. To delete all files in the recycle bin permanently: select files
with <Strg>+<A> or <Ctrl>+<A>.
13. To delete the complete recycle bin permanently: select the
recycle bin ('RecycleBin').
Note
If the entire recycle bin is deleted (folder including its content), it is automatically recreated the next time a file is
deleted.
14.
Either
or

Select >Delete.
15. Confirm the query.
Note
Renaming recycle bin
The recycle bin can be renamed only on the PDM server.

16. Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >PDM Administration >PDM Admin.
17. Double click in the RECYCLE_BIN_NAME line in the table cell
of the "ParamValue" column (default content of the cell:
RecycleBin).
18. Rename RecycleBin as desired.
19. Select Exit.
20. Select >Start >Settings >Control panel >Administration
>Services.
21. Select TruTopsPDM2.
22. Select Restart service.
8.6
Searching for files

2.
Either
Select
or
Select Search....
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-31
3. Set filters (the filters can be combined) and enter the

searched names (case insensitive). If required, use place
holders (see "Searching with the help of place holders (wildcards)", pg. 1-68).
4. Open the list field "Search in:" with .
5. Select the folder where the search should be started.
6. If required, select "Search sub-folder".
7. To start the search: select Search.
8. To switch on the folder view again: select
.
8.7
Adding other details to the list field

of the files
By default, the TruTops file browser displays the "File name", the
"File size" and the "Last write access" (sorted in ascending order
of file names) in the file view.
The displayed details can be expanded (e.g. with "Machine
name" or with "Sheet thickness").
Note
The more details the TruTops file browser displays, the more
time it requires to create the view.
Standard information in the list

header
Files list
TruTops File Browser
1-32
Fig. 41788
2012-04-13
S778EN
Adding details
1. To add details: right click in the list header (1).

2.
Either
Select the desired detail.
or
Moving details in the list

field to the desired position
Select >More.
Select the desired details.
Press OK.
3. Keep the mouse button pressed and drag the details one
after another to the desired position.
4. To sort files by a specific detail: click on the detail.
The detail used for sorting is marked in gray. Clicking repeatedly
on the detail modifies the sorting direction (upward/downward).
8.8
File formats from TruTops (e.g. *.GEO, *.TMT, *.ROT ) can be

opened with the Geo Viewer in PDM. The appropriate shortcut
required to open them with the Geo Viewer is created automatically when installing TruTops.
Opening a file with the Geo
Viewer
Closing Geo Viewer
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open file browser (e.g.via >File >File browser).

Search for the file to be opened with the Geo Viewer.
Select the file.
If the file browser was opened via >File >Open or >File
>Save: right click to open the context menu, select >Open.
5. If the independent file browser is opened: double click on the
file.
6. Close Geo Viewer with OK.
8.9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Search for the file(s) to be sent.
Select the file(s).
Select >Send to....
Select >Mail recipient.
An e-mail mask containing the selected file as an attachment is

displayed. The e-mail can be processed further and sent.
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-33
8.10 Zipping files

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Search for the file(s) to be zipped.
Select the file(s).
Select >Send to....
Select >Zip-File.
A zip file containing all the selected files is created in PDM. The
name of the zip file comprises the name of the file selected first
(without the file extension) and the new file extension '.tpdm.zip'.
In one more step, the zip file can, for example, be exported into
the file system or be sent to a mail recipient (see relevant sections).
8.11 Sending files from PDM to "My

Documents" in the file system
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1-34

Search for the file(s) to be zipped.
Select the file(s).
Select >Send to....
Select >My Documents.
2012-04-13
S778EN
9.
Creating and restoring file versions

(PDM)
9.1
Displaying and hiding the version

window
Hide and show version window
Button for creating a file version
Directory contents (file list)
File, of which a version is to be

created and archived
Version window (archive)
File versions in version window
Fig. 50219
File versions are displayed in a separate version window. In the

TruTops file browser (with PDM), the version window appears by
default.
To hide and then view the version window again: select
(Version window).
9.2

2. Select the file from which a version is to be created
3.
Either
Select
S778EN
2012-04-13
(Create version).
1-35
or
Select >Create version.
The "Properties... - Version x" mask, "Version information"
tab is displayed.
4. Enter any information you wish about the new version.
5. Press OK. (Cancel cancels the entering of information, however not the creation of the file version.)
The file version is displayed in a separate version window
(see "Fig. 50219", pg. 1-35).
9.3
Note
If a file version is to be modified (e.g. contours are deleted or
added), the file version must be copied from the version window
into the normal directory. File versions cannot be opened directly
from the version window.
2. Select the file from which the versions have been created
All file versions of the selected file are displayed in the version window (see "Fig. 50219", pg. 1-35).
3. Select the file version to be recovered.
5.
Either
In order to copy the file version from the version window
into the normal directory under its original file name (so
that the file version can be opened with the appropriate
application): select >Restore.
Replying to a query:
Yes: A version is created from the file from the normal
directory and it is stored in the version window.
No: The file in the normal directory is overwritten with the
file version.
or
In order to copy the file version into the normal directory
under a different file name (so that the file version can
be opened with the appropriate application): select
>Restore under....
The "New file name" mask is displayed.
Change the suggested file name if required.
1-36
2012-04-13
S778EN
6. Press OK.
The restored file is displayed in the normal directory and can be
opened with the appropriate application (e.g. TruTops CAD).
9.4

2. Select the file from which the versions have been created
All file versions that have been created from the selected file
are displayed in the version window (see "Fig. 50219", pg.
1-35).
3. Select the file version to be deleted.
5. Select >Delete.
9.5
Tips & Tricks

Earlier, variants of a file had to be saved as copies under different names (see "Fig. 53348", pg. 1-37).
But now, variants of a file can be archived together as file versions under one name. Only the current status of a file is displayed in the file list of the TruTops file browser and the file versions are in the version window (see "Fig. 50219", pg. 1-35).
The following gives an example of how an (old) copy of a file
('egon1.geo') can be created as a file version of the current status ('egon.geo').
Latest status of the file
Copy of a file (old status)
Variants of a file in the file list
Fig. 53348

2. Create a file version of 'egon1.geo' (right click to open the
context menu, select >Create version).
A file version is stored in the version window of 'egon1.geo'
which is identical to 'egon1.geo'.
3. Open 'egon.geo' and save it as 'egon1.geo'.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Tips & Tricks
1-37
When overwriting, 'egon1.geo' in the file list is overwritten.

The file version of 'egon1.geo' in the version window is
retained.
'Egon1.geo' has the current status. The old status of the file
version is located in the version window.
4. Delete 'egon.geo'.
5. Rename 'egon1.geo' as 'egon.geo.'
6. If several files are to be archived together:
Create a version of the oldest file and overwrite it with
the second oldest file. (This ensures that the file versions
in the version window are stored in the right sequence).
Repeat the process till all file versions in the version window have been archived together.
Then rename the file in the file list whose versions are
currently present.
1-38
Tips & Tricks
2012-04-13
S778EN
10.
File Properties
10.1 Viewing file properties

Note
The properties of files which have been written on an operating
system with a different language and which contain special characters may be displayed incorrectly.
Either
(With PDM) show properties of a file when checking the
dependencies (see "Dependencies Between Files", pg.
1-45).
or

Search for the file whose properties are to be displayed.
Mark the file.
Select >Properties.
The "Properties..." screen, "General" tab is displayed.
To view all the information for a file: select the "File info"
tab.
Select "Mask attributes that are not occupied" as
required.
10.2 Selecting the unprocessed material ID

and raw material from the drawing
data
In addition to the unprocessed material, the raw material can
now also be selected. This unprocessed material is then preset
in TruTops Punch. TruTops Bend does not have a sheet layout,
i.e. the unprocessed material and raw material are not requested
in TruTops Bend until a bend is created. This selection should
now be made in TruTops CAD, provided the unprocessed material is available in the database. The advantage is that this selected raw material is supported by TruTops Work and TruTops
Unfold.
Selecting an unprocessed
material ID
1. Select >File, >Properties....

The "File information" mask is opened.
2. Select the drop-down arrow for the unprocessed material ID.
The "Select material" mask is opened.
S778EN
2012-04-13
File Properties
1-39
3. Enter %AI%, for example, between the two percent signs

(below the list field, first list field: Material ID, second list
field: Stock ID) .
The list field displays all entries that begin with these letters.
The material selection is thereby filtered and restricted.
Note
The selection can be limited even further using the "Z" filter
field. If, for example, <=3 is entered here, all unprocessed
materials with a material thickness of 3 mm or less are displayed. >=3 displays all unprocessed materials with a thickness of 3 mm or more.
4. Select Unprocessed material.
The unprocessed material is applied.
Selecting the raw material
5. Select the raw material drop-down arrow.

The "Selection" mask is opened.
Note
If the raw material does not match the unprocessed material
or vice versa, the corresponding raw material or unprocessed
material is automatically used. If there is no corresponding
unprocessed/raw material, the relevant field remains empty
and must be reselected.
6. Select raw material.
The raw material is adopted.
1-40
File Properties
2012-04-13
S778EN
11.

(PDM)
11.1 Files, importing/exporting via

Windows Explorer (PDM)
The PDM file storage can be used like a normally enabled Windows folder or an enabled network drive. This enables for example, saving drawings from a CAD system directly in PDM.
Connecting the PDM
network drive
1.
Either
Start Windows Explorer.
Select >Extras >Connect network drive .
Select Drive.
Enter \\Servername\trumpf_pdm2 under "Folder" or
using Search search for '\\Servername\trumpf_pdm2'.
(Server name = name of the server on which PDM has
been installed.)
Select Finish.
or
Importing/exporting files
Start the Windows command prompt via >Start >Programs >Accessories >Command prompt.
Enter NET USE P: \\Servername\trumpf_pdm2.
(Server name = name of the server on which PDM has
been installed. Any free drive letter can be selected as
the drive letter.)
2. Use the selected drive to store files and directories in PDM
or to read them out from PDM.
11.2 Importing files and single folders

using the file browser (PDM)
Files and folders are imported using the TruTops file browser as
follows:
S778EN
2012-04-13
PDM adopts the folder structure from the file system and
ensures the correct sequence. All sub-folders are also imported and their structures are adopted. The target folder in the
PDM can be located anywhere.
TruTops determines the existing dependencies between the
files and saves them.
Files and folders, importing/exporting (PDM)
1-41
Notes
Selecting an import folder
Import folder
1.
2.
3.
4.
If a *.GEO file is moved to a different folder after being

imported, TruTops deletes the dependency to all sheets to
which the *.GEO was nested.
Dependencies can only be established to files that are also
in the PDM. No dependencies are created if, for example, a
nested sheet (*.TAF) is imported before the parts (*.GEO)
are imported.
Depending on the file format, not all dependencies between
the files can be determined when importing. For example,
dependencies to .pdf files are set in TruTops when they are
created. No dependencies can be read from .PDF files when
exporting from PDM or re-importing into PDM.
Go to the folder where files are to be imported.
Select >Import directory.
The "Import directory" mask is displayed.
5. Go to the folder to be imported.

6. Mark the folder.
Importing files
Note
So that dependencies can be established between files,
always import files chronologically in the sequence of
their creation or import whole folders at a time.
7. Select >Import file.
The "Import file(s)" mask is displayed.
The mask has the same functions as the file browser (e. g.
adding further details to the list field of the files, searching for
files in the filter view...; see section "TruTops file browser").
8. To restrict the file selection in the folder view ( ): open the
"File type" list field with .
9. Select file type.
10. Mark the searched files. To mark several files: press <Strg>
or <Ctrl> pressed.
11. Select OK.
11.3 Folders, importing several folders in

a single job step (PDM)
Several folders (that are independent of each other) can be
imported into the TruTops PDM in a single job step via the
"PDM importer".
1-42
2012-04-13
S778EN
Additionally, a different target folder can be selected in TruTops

PDM for each folder. TruTops determines the existing dependencies between the files and saves them.
Select folder
Defining target paths
1. Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >PDM Importer.

2. In the "PDM directory import" mask, mark the folder to be
imported.
3. Transfer the folder to the right list field with
.
4. To import other folders: repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. Right click on the folder icon under "Target path".
The "Selection of PDM target path" is displayed.
Delete folder from the import

list
6.
7.
8.
9.
Select the target folder.

Select OK.
Mark the folder to be deleted.
Select
Note
Updating file dependencies

after import
When importing folders, the dependencies between files are

automatically checked and entered in the PDM. A .TAF'. for
example, knows which '.GEO' it uses. A '.GEO', however,
does not know the '.TAF' in which it is being used.
If all '.TAF' files are imported from one folder first and then
the corresponding 'GEO' files belonging to them are imported
from another folder, the dependencies cannot be entered
during the import.
Starting import
10. To set the dependencies correctly after the import: select

"Update file dependencies after import".
11. If all folders to be imported have been transferred into the
right-hand list field and the target folders have been defined:
select Start directory import .
12. After the import: select Exit.
11.4 Files, exporting via the TruTops file

browser (PDM)
2.
Either
Go to the folder to be exported.
or
Change to the folder from which files are to be exported.

Select the file(s) which are to be exported. To mark several files: press <Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed.
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-43
4. Select >Export.
The "Target path for export..." mask is displayed.
5. Go to the folder to which the files are to be exported.
6. Mark the folder.
7. Select OK.
11.5 Importing/exporting files using the

prompt/script (PDM)
Files and folders can also be imported into the PDM or exported
from the PDM via the Windows command prompt or automated
via shell scripts (*.bat) (see "PDM functions, calling up via
prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)", pg. 1-23).
Exporting/importing using
the prompt
Exporting a file
1. Start Windows command prompt.

2. Go to the folder ':\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin'.
3. To export files, enter the following command (enter everything in one line, and be sure that slashes or backslashes
and spaces are correct). Replace the highlighted example
names with actual names:
pdmCLI.exe Get --service-name=ToPs_PDM --portaddress=servername:9999 --target-directory=C:\target directory /source directory/example file.geo
Exporting a directory
5. To export directories, enter the following command (enter

everything in one line, and be sure that slashes or backslashes and spaces are correct). Replace the highlighted
example names with actual names:
pdmCLI.exe Get --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --portaddress=servername:9999 --recursive --use-entity-directory -target-directory=C:\target directory/source directory/example directory
Importing files
7. To import files, enter the following command (enter everything in one line, and be sure that slashes or backslashes
and spaces are correct). Replace the highlighted example
names with actual names:
pdmCLI.exe Put --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --portaddress=servername:9999 --target-directory=/target directoryC:\source directory\example file.geo
Automated export/import
using script files
1-44
9. Write cd C:\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin in a self-written

BAT shell file (*.bat).
10. Add the above (exemplary) command lines.
2012-04-13
S778EN
12.
12.1 Checking dependencies between files

(PDM)
Files can, on the one hand, form the basis for other files and, on
the other hand, be based on other files. Checking these dependencies is important whenever, for example, a file needs to be
modified or deleted.
Example: The file is the basis for other files
On which sheets (*.TAF) has a particular part (*.GEO)

already been nested?
In which NC programs (*.LST) does a particular GEO file
(*.GEO) occur?
Example: the file uses the other following files:
Which parts (*.GEO) have been nested on a particular sheet

(*.TAF)?
Note
If a *.GEO file has been moved to a different folder after being
imported, TruTops deletes the dependency to all sheets on
which the *.GEO was nested.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Search for the file whose dependencies are to be checked.
Mark the file.
Select >Dependencies (if >Dependencies has been grayed
out, the file has no dependencies.)
6. To check which other files the file uses: select the "Used..."
tab.
7. To check which other files are based on the file: select the
"Basis for..." tab.
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-45
Fig. 41785
8. To group the display according to file types: select "Group

according to file type".
9. To view a preview of dependent files: select "Preview" (selfholding) and select the desired file.
12.2 Deleting, exporting dependent files,

displaying properties
Viewing the "Dependencies"
mask
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Delete dependent files
6.
7.
8.
9.
Export dependent files
10.
11.

Search for the file whose dependencies are to be checked.
Mark the file.
Select >Dependencies (if >Dependencies has been grayed
out, the file has no dependencies.)
In the "Dependencies" mask, select the file to be deleted.
Select >Delete.
Select the file(s) which are to be exported. To mark several
files: press <Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed.
Select >Export.
The "Target path for export..." mask is displayed.
Displaying properties of
dependent files
1-46
12.
13.
14.
15.
Switch to the directory to which you want to export.

Select the directory.
Press OK.
Mark the file(s) whose properties are to be displayed. To
mark several files: press <Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed.
2012-04-13
S778EN
17. Select >Properties.

The properties of the file are displayed.
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-47
13.
13.1 Checking the updated status of the

files automatically when loading and
saving in TruTops (PDM)
To automatically check the updated status of the files when
loading them in TruTops: set the value of the "PDMWarningMode" variables in the public system rules to the desired
value (see TruTops Laser or TruTops Punch software manual, chapter "Setting basic data"):
0 = Do not check updated status.
1 = Check updated status when loading.
2 = Check updated status when saving.
3 = Check updated status when loading and when saving.
1-48
2012-04-13
S778EN
14.
Characteristics: a property of
elements and contours
A characteristic is a property which one or more elements or one

or more contours possess.
Characteristics are created in TruTops CAD, saved in the geo
file and can be evaluated in other TruTops applications.
Advantages:
Rows of holes and hole grids can be machined more easily:

Rows of holes that have been created in TruTops CAD
through >Create >Macros >Row of hole can also be evaluated in other TruTops applications. The conversion into rows
of holes is no longer required. As a result, it is also possible
to create rows of holes which are not axially parallel. The NC
program is shortened.
In TruTops CAD, Geometries with the characteristic Property
are interpreted as a unit. All actions are applied to the
entire unit, reducing the drawing effort considerably.
14.1 Switching "Characteristic fixed" on or

off - TruTops behavior
"Characteristic fixed" is active:
Certain elements are combined to form a unit with the characteristic property. If the "Characteristic fixed" is active, then
a certain action is applied either to the complete unit (i.e. to
all elements) or the action is rejected.
For example, a single element of the "Single square hole"
unit cannot be deleted. The entire single hole is deleted.
All impermissible actions result in the contour or the element being displayed in pink. The colored highlight is kept up
to the next redrawing.
Examples:
A single stroke cannot be stretched. The single stroke is displayed in pink.
It is not possible to shorten elements for single strokes. The
elements are displayed in pink.
Clicking on an element results in the selection of the entire
unit (all elements). When boxing in an element using the
mouse, an action is executed only if the entire unit has
been boxed in.
"Characteristic fixed" is not active:
S778EN
If "Characteristic fixed" is not active, the elements of contours can be arbitrarily modified with the Property characteris-
2012-04-13 Characteristics: a property of elements and contours
1-49
tic. A single element of the single square hole can be

deleted, for example. During modification, the Property characteristic is lost and the display color "orange" is reset to the
normal line color.
Example
Single square hole
"Characteristic
fixed"
Delete
Active
Element
Not
active.
Effect
Contour
The entire single hole is deleted.

X

The single element of the single hole is deleted.
The display color changes from orange to the normal line color. The characteristic is dissolved.
X
Row of square
holes
X
X

The entire row of holes is deleted.
The row of holes remains unchanged.

The clicked contour of the row of holes is displayed in pink.
If the drawing is updated (
is restored.
), the original state
The clicked element of the contour is deleted.

The remaining holes are assembled into smaller
rows of holes.
(Example: row of holes with 10 holes, an element
of hole 3 is deleted: one of the new rows of holes
consists of holes 1 and 2, the other consists of
holes 4 to 10.)
The clicked contour is deleted.

The remaining holes are assembled into smaller
rows of holes.
(Example: row of holes with 10 holes, an element
of hole 3 is deleted: one of the new rows of holes
consists of holes 1 and 2, the other consists of
holes 4 to 10.)
Tab. 1-3
Switching "Characteristic
fixed" on and off
1. Select >Edit >Characteristic fixed.

or
Select Fix characteristics . (If "Characteristic fixed" is activated, the button is pressed).
Highlighting characteristics
2. Select Highlight characteristics
The characteristics are displayed in orange.

Removing characteristics
3. Select >Edit >Delete >Characteristics.

or
Select Delete characteristics
1-50
Characteristics: a property of elements and contours 2012-04-13
S778EN
14.2 Notches: Advanced options through

the "Characteristic" property
The "Characteristic" property automatically increases the number
of options for shaping and processing notches:
S778EN
2012-04-13
Notches can be enhanced by roundings, bevels or subnotches.

Roundings, bevels, separating cuts or sub-notches can be
removed from a notch. TruTops CAD joins adjacent notch
elements automatically.
If a notch is deleted entirely, the adjacent elements are
joined again.
Notches can be copied, moved, rotated, mirrored and
stretched.
The length of end elements of notches can be changed.

1-51
15.
Screen display
15.1 Adapting window size

The window size can be adapted in a stepless manner. This is
advantageous, for example, when working with online documentation simultaneously, or when the start bar lies over the TruTops
command bar.
Drag the window frame to the desired size using the mouse.
15.2 Increasing or reducing the work

surface
Increasing the work surface
1. Click the vertical separating line between the blue bar and
the work surface.
The blue bar is hidden.
Reducing the work surface
2. Click the blue line at the left edge of the screen.

The blue bar appears.
15.3 Modifying color scheme

The following color schemes are possible:
Bright (white) background.

Dark (black) background.
Blue background.
Gray background.
Each color scheme is effective only for the current application

(CAD, Nest, Laser, Punch ...).
1.
Either
or

2. Open the color scheme with and mark the desired color
scheme.
1-52
Screen display
2012-04-13
S778EN
15.4 Moving masks and messages on the

interface
In TruTops, masks and messages can be freely moved on the
interface. This is advantageous, for example, when a message
and the objects under the message need to be visible.
1. Click on the title bar of the mask or the message.
2. Hold down the mouse button and move to the desired position.
15.5 Configuring and activating viewing

options
Viewing options can be configured for the functions "Sheet layout", "Technology", "Optimization" and "NC/Setup plan".
If required the configured viewing options can be activated by
selecting one of these functions in the function browser.
Configuring viewing options
Automatically activate
viewing options in the
function browser?
Manually activate viewing

options?
S778EN
2012-04-13
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select >View >Presettings >Adapt....

Select function (e.g. "Technology").
Activate desired display options (e.g. "Positioning lines").
To activate the corresponding viewing options when the function is selected in the function browser: select "Activate in the
function browser".
Select other functions and other display options if required.
Press OK.
Select >View >Presettings.
To manually activate the configured viewing options: select
function (>Sheet layout, >Technology, >Optimization or >NC/
Setup plan).
Screen display
1-53
16.
Display of drawings
16.1 Restructuring display of drawings

Either
Select >View >Zoom >Refresh.
or
Press <F5> button.
or
Select Refresh view
16.2 Displaying drawing completely

Either
Select >View >Zoom >All.
or
Press <Ctrl>+<T>.
or
Select Total view
16.3 Displaying sheet completely

This view can be displayed only in Laser and Punch applications.
Either
Select >View >Zoom >Sheet.
or
Select Total sheet view
16.4 Displaying detail view

Boxing in the desired detail
1.
Either
Select >View >Zoom >Detail.
or
Select Detail view
1-54
Display of drawings
2012-04-13
S778EN
Zooming in (detailing)
2. Click on the first point in the box with the mouse pointer (cursor).
3. Click on the opposite point in the box.
4. Right click on the desired detail in the graphics area.
The graphics is zoomed in on. The pick point in the graphics
area becomes the new center.
Zooming out
5. Use the middle mouse button to click on the desired detail in

the graphics area. (If a wheel mouse is used: press the
wheel of the wheel mouse).
The graphic is zoomed out from. The pick point in the graphics area becomes the new center.
16.5 Moving screen section

Either
Select >View >Zoom.
Select >Up, >Down, >Left or >Right.
or
Position the mouse pointer (cursor) as sizing tool in the
working range.
Keep the wheel of the wheel mouse (or the middle button) pressed.
Move the mouse pointer.
Tip
Depending on the usual method, the <Ctrl> button can be
pressed. This however is not necessary.
16.6 Zooming drawing

Either
For stepless zooming: position the mouse pointer (cursor)
in the working range.
Keep the right mouse button pressed.
Move the mouse downwards (zoom out) or upwards
(zoom in).
or
To zoom stepwise: position the mouse pointer (cursor) in
the working range.
Keep the <Ctrl> key pressed.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Display of drawings
1-55
Zoom in on or zoom out from the drawing using the

wheel of the wheel mouse.
16.7 Getting last view

TruTops always memorizes the last view that was set through a
button or using the mouse.
Either
Select >View >Zoom >Last zoom.
or
Select Show last view
16.8 Memorizing and recalling view

Memorize view
1. Use the mouse or the Total view

or Detail view
to set the view that is to be saved.
2.
buttons
Either
Select >View >Zoom >Memorize zoom.
or
Select Memorize view
Getting saved view
3.
Either
Select >View >Zoom >Get zoom.
or
Select Get view
16.9 Displaying and hiding outline points

Either
Select >View >All points or >View >Open points.
or
Select Show all points
Contour point
1-56
Display of drawings
or Show open points
Description
Green
Closed contour point
Red
Open contour point
2012-04-13
S778EN
Contour point
Description
Yellow
More than two contour elements attached to a point

Tab. 1-4
S778EN
2012-04-13
Display of drawings
1-57
17.
Selection preview, selecting

components
17.1 Working with selection preview

With selection preview, actions which are performed with the
mouse are visible immediately on the cursor or on the screen.
Function
Screen/cursor display
Example
Measuring
The current measurement result is shown

on the cursor
Length, point, circle

measurements
Selection of components (elements, bendings, contours etc.)
Components are highlighted in color
Deleting contours, creating bending lines,

stretching
Selection of components
The number of selected components is

shown on the cursor
Deleting elements,
moving, smoothing
Corner selection
The corner and both

corner elements are
highlighted in color
Creating roundings,
bevels, notches
Position selection
Special element points

(see the following
table) are caught and
are displayed on the
cursor
Creating points, line 2

points, curve center
radius
Selection preview options
Tab. 1-5
Special element points:
1-58
Point
Affected elements
Symbol
End Point
Line, bevel, curve, rounding
Square
Make Midpoint
Circle, construction circle, curve,

rounding
+ (color: cyan)
Intersection
All Entities
Text: "x" and

large circle
Element center
Line, bevel, curve, rounding
Text: "1/2"
0 degree position

rounding
Text: "0"
90 degree position

rounding
Text: "90"
180 degree
position

rounding
Text: "180"
270 degree
position

rounding
Text: "270"
Other element
point
All Entities
Small circle
2012-04-13
S778EN
Point
Affected elements
Symbol
Virtual corner
(original position
of a corner that
was beveled,
rounded or
notched)
Bevel, rounding, notch
Square
Element points
Tab. 1-6

Select >View >Selection preview.
Selection preview is active (a check mark appears in front of
the menu item).
17.2 Selecting components

Elements, contours, bendings or points can be selected and
modified individually (individual selection). Multiple selection is a
further option. For this, they are firstly selected one after the
other and are then modified.
Multiple selection
Components are selected one after the other and are then modified for multiple selection. Selecting the component once again
undoes the selection.
1. Function, e.g. delete, select elements.
2. Press the <Ctrl> key.
The * symbol on the cursor shows that multiple selection
mode is active.
3. Select the elements to be deleted.
The selected elements are marked in color. If >Selection preview is active, the number of selected elements is displayed
on the cursor.
4. Select OK.
The selected elements are deleted.
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-59

When this mode is selected, a component cannot be deselected
once it has been selected. This is only possible by changing
over to multiple selection mode.
1. Function, e.g. delete, select elements.
2. Press the <Shift> key.
The + symbol on the cursor shows that fixed multiple selection mode is active.
3. Select the elements to be deleted.
The selected elements are marked in color. If >Selection preview is active, the number of selected elements is displayed
on the cursor.
4. Select OK.
The selected elements are deleted.

1. Select components.
2. Press the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key to switch to the other mode.
The selected mode is indicated by the symbol on the cursor.

Either
Select >Edit >Unmark.
or
Release the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key.
Click on the selected components again.
The components are displayed in black again.

All drawn components are marked using this function. Individual
components can then be deselected.
1-60
2012-04-13
S778EN
Select >Edit >Mark all.

All components are marked.
Tip
If All is used, the selected function, for example "Delete", will be
immediately applied to all components.
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-61
18.
18.1 Automatically placing the mouse

pointer in masks
3. Select "Place mouse pointer at OK".
or
Select "Place mouse pointer at the next area of action".
4. Press Modify.
1-62
2012-04-13
S778EN
19.
19.1 Using Windows keyboard commands

and shortcuts
TruTops can now be operated using the usual Windows keyboard commands or shortcuts:
All menu items linked with a shortcut have been appropriately marked (e.g. >File >Open...: <Ctrl>+<O>).
The keyboard commands for the Command block (9) (see
"Fig. 50209", pg. 1-14) are displayed in the appropriate tool
tip:
Total view: <Ctrl>+<Enter> () or <Ctrl>+<Return> ().
Example 1
Example 2
End: <Esc>.
Ok: <Enter> or <Return> ().
1. To save a file: press <Ctrl>+<S> (instead of selecting >File

>Save).
2. To undo an action: press <Ctrl>+<Z> (instead of selecting
>Edit >Undo).
19.2 Entering numerical values and

coordinates
Entering decimal values
1. When entering decimals, use a point as separator. (Example:

enter 30.5.)
Entering coordinates
3. Enter X and Y coordinates separated by a comma. (Example: enter X = "10 mm", Y = "20,5 mm": 10,20.5.)
19.3 Entering texts in input fields

1. Click into the input box with the mouse pointer (cursor).
2. Enter characters one after the other.
3. To confirm the input: Press <Enter> or <Return> ().
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-63
19.4 Using key functions of TruTops

During initial installation and update of TruTops, the Windows
key functions are automatically set in the individual applications.
However, one can also work with the TruTops key functions on
request.
Note
The key functions must be separately set in each existing application.
1. Select the application in which the TruTops key functions are
to be set.
2. Select >Tools >Modify data....
4. Select "Set TruTops key functions".
5. Select Modify.
Key
Configuration
TruTops key functions
Windows key function
Jump to next input field..
Confirm mask; is the same as

pressing Ok.
<>, <>
Delete characters in input fields.
<SHIFT>+<Backspace>
<Tab>
Jump to next input field. All the field contents are automatically marked.
<Tab>+<> or <Tab>+<>
Jump to next input field. Automatic marking of all the field contents is
removed.
Keep <SHIFT> pressed, mark the

area using <> or <>.
Mark selected field contents from the cursor position onwards.
Keep <SHIFT> pressed + <Pos 1>

(German keyboard) or <Home>
(English keyboard).
Mark from the cursor position to the start of the input field.
Keep <SHIFT> pressed + <End>

(German keyboard) or <End> (English keyboard).
Mark from the cursor position to the end of the field.
(Field contents are marked)
Delete marked field contents.
<Entf> (German keyboard) or <Del>

(English keyboard)
(Field contents are marked)
Marked field contents are replaced with the character pressed.
Press desired character.

<SHIFT>+<Tab>
Jump to previous input field.
<Esc>
Close mask; is the same as pressing: Cancel.
TruTops or Windows key functions
1-64
Tab. 1-7
2012-04-13
S778EN
19.5 Using "Copy" "Paste"

The "Copy and Paste" function is available in all TruTops input
fields.
Depending on the position of the cursor in the input field, the
contents are copied either completely or only partly into the intermediate memory.
When pasting, the copied contents appear at the point where the
cursor is located.
Contents of the intermediate memory can be pasted from other
programs and into the TruTops input fields and vice versa.
Copy and paste as described in the following table.
Pasting into empty input field
Copying
Cursor position
Key combination
Key combination
Result
Example 123
<CTRL> + <C>
<CTRL> + <V>
Example123
Example123
or
or
Example123
Example123
<Strg> + <C>
<Strg> + <V>
ple123
Copying and pasting
Tab. 1-8
19.6 Using keyboard buffer of the

command line (repeating entries)
Repeated entries and functions do not need to be reentered.
The keyboard buffer saves entries or functions which have been
entered into the command line or which have run in the background. The last commands can be opened and scrolled through
using :
1. Open the list field of the command line with .
2. Mark the desired command or the desired entry.
The command or the entry is repeated.
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-65
20.
Calculator
You can carry out the following actions using the calculator:
Entering numerical values and coordinates.
Executing arithmetic operations and entering the result of the
arithmetic operations simultaneously.
The calculator is automatically activated during a new installation

of TruTops and a TruTops update. It can be operated with the
mouse as well as (to some extent) with the keyboard in all modules. It is displayed automatically on double-clicking in an input
field.
Calculator function
Operation using the

mouse
Operation using the

keyboard
Opening the calculator
Double click in an
input field for numerical values.
(Not possible)
Deleting an entry
C / Cl
(Not possible)
Exiting the calculator

without adopting
entries
Abort
<Esc> (possible only if

the Windows key functions have been set)
Closing calculator,
adopting entry
OK
<Ctrl/Ctrl>+<Enter/
Return> ()
Squaring
x2
(Not possible)
Pi
Pi
(Not possible)
Multiplying
<*>
Dividing
</>
Adding
<+>
Subtracting
<->
Result
Calculator functions
Tab. 1-9
20.1 Deactivating calculator permanently

The calculator is automatically activated during a new installation
and a TruTops update.
To deactivate the calculator permanently: set the value of the
"ST_NumInputWithMouse" variable in the public rules to 0
(under >Tools >Modify data... >Rules >System).
1-66
Calculator
2012-04-13
S778EN
20.2 Entering numerical values in input

fields
1. Position the mouse pointer (cursor) in the input field for
numerical value.
2. Double click.
The "easy" calculator is displayed:
Fig. 20085
3. Click on the desired figures and arithmetic operations or

enter them using the keyboard.
4. Select OK.
The calculator is closed.
20.3 Entering X and Y coordinates of

points
1. Select Calculator
(on the left near the command line).
The calculator extended by "Coordinate" is displayed.

2. Enter the numerical value of the X coordinate in the upper
input field.
3. Select X.
The value is adopted in the lower input field.
4. Enter the numerical value of the Y coordinate in the upper
input field.
5. Select Y.
The value is adopted in the lower input field.
6. Press OK.
The calculator is closed.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Calculator
1-67
21.
Searching with the help of place

holders (wildcards)
Place holders simplify the search, when a designation (e.g. a file

name) or a number (e.g. a technology table) is not exactly
known.
The following place holders can be used in the TruTops file
browser:
? = 1 arbitrary character.
* = arbitrary character string.
In case of database accesses (under >Tools >Modify data...) and

when selecting the technology table, the percent sign ("%") is a
place holder for arbitrary characters:
1-68
1% = 1, subsequently none, one or several arbitrary characters.

%1 = none, one or several arbitrary characters, subsequently
1.
Searching with the help of place holders (wildcards) 2012-04-13
S778EN
22.
22.1 Reactivating hidden message and

confirmation masks
3. Select "Show optional message boxes again".
4. Press Modify.
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-69
23.
Print
23.1 Printing screen content

The present screen can be printed with this function.
1. Load the file whose screen content is to be printed.
2. Select >File >Print >Screen....
The standard printer mask is displayed.
3. If required, modify the settings.
4. Press OK.
The screen content is printed.
23.2 Configuring line thickness when

printing screen contents
If the screen contents are printed on a printer with high resolution, the lines may be hard to see.
1. Open the file topsprn.ini in the Windows folder using a text
editor (such as Notepad).
Note
The entry LineWidthResolution specifies what proportion of
the printer's resolution is used for a line width of 1 pixel. With
printer resolution of 600dpi, the default value of 150 results
in a line thickness of 4 pixels.
Higher values produce finer lines, lower values produce
thicker lines.
2. Adapt the LineWidthResolution entry.
23.3 Printing Geos as HPGL

TruTops CAD can print GEO files in the '*.HPGL' format (=
graphical output of plotters).
1. Load the desired file in the '*.GEO' or '*.DXF' format.
2. Select >File >Print >Plotting....
The "Plotting" mask is displayed.
3. Make the desired settings.
1-70
Print
2012-04-13
S778EN
4. Press OK.
The 'GEO' is printed in the '*.HPGL' format.
23.4 Printing labels (optional)

Using the Prepare-Label NC post-processing program, information can be saved to be able to print it on labels later using the
Label-Printer program.
A label can contain, for example, a barcode, a part drawing or
other information.
1. Select >NC program >NC program >Start.
The "Generate NC program" mask is displayed.
2. Select "Set-up plan".
3. Select "Graphic (*.HTML)".
4. If the single part graphic is to be printed on the label: select
"Single part graphic".
5. Select "Parameters", "NC post-processing program".
6. Open selection with .
7. Select Prepare_Label.
8. Press OK.
As long as the NC post-processing program is active, information for all NC programs is collected. The information is
deleted only the next time a label is printed.
9. When all the programs have been created: >File >Execute
>LabelPrinter.
"LabelPrinter - output settings" is displayed.
Label-Printer makes available information from the currently generated NC program.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Print
1-71
24.
24.1 Drawing auxiliary lines

1. Select >Aux. tools,>Construction line >Two points.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Condition
The drawing contains at least one auxiliary line.
Fig. 4726
1. Select >Aux. tools,>Construction lineP>arallel.

2. Click on the auxiliary line (P1) for which a parallel line is to
be drawn.
3. For one parallel auxiliary line: click on the point (P2) on the
parallel auxiliary line.
or
For several parallel auxiliary lines: enter all distances at
which parallel auxiliary lines are to be drawn (separate
numerical values through blanks. Do not use any commas.
Example: 10 20 30).
4. Press .
5. Click on the side on which the parallel line(s) should appear.

lines
1. Select >Aux. tools >Construction line >Horizontal.
1-72
2012-04-13
S778EN
or
Select >Aux. tools >Construction line" >Vertical.

Condition
The drawing contains at least one arc element or circle.
P1 Approximate tangent point
P2 End point of the tangent

Fig. 27381
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary line >Tangent at point.


an element
P1 Point on element
P2 Start point of the auxiliary line

at right angles
Fig. 4729
1. Select >Aux. tools >Construction line >Perpendicular.

S778EN
2012-04-13
1-73
Drawing an auxiliary line using a point and

angle of inclination
P1 Start point of the auxiliary line
Angle
P2 Point on the auxiliary line

Fig. 4730
1. Select >Aux. tools >Construction line >Angle X.

Drawing an auxiliary line through point and

angle to the base line
P1 Point on auxiliary line

P2 Point on base line
Angle between auxiliary line

and element
Fig. 4732
1. Select >Aux. tools >Auxiliary line >Angle to line.

1-74
2012-04-13
S778EN

at 2 arc elements
P1 First tangent point
P2 Second tangent point

Fig. 4731
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary line >Tangent at 2 arcs.


Application: dividing an element with a vertical construction line
between two random points (P1) and (P2)
Fig. 4733
1. Select >Aux. tools >Construction line >Division.

2.
Either
Click on the first point (P1).
or
Enter the division factor (between 0 and 1).
Division factor 0.5: The auxiliary line is placed at the center of the base element.
Division factor 0.2 means that the auxiliary line is placed
after one fifth of the base element.
Click on the first point.

3. Click on the second point (P2).
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-75
24.2 Drawing auxiliary circle

points
Fig. 4734
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Three points.

Drawing auxiliary circle through center and

radius
Fig. 4735
1. Select >Auxiliary circle >Auxiliary circle >Center radius.

P1 Start point of the diameter
P2 End point of the diameter

Fig. 4736
1-76
2012-04-13
S778EN
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Diameter.

Drawing auxiliary circle through center and

diameter
Fig. 4709
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Center - diameter.

Fig. 4737
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Concentric.

2. Click on the base circle (P1).
3. Click on a point (P2) on the arc.
or
Enter the distance.
Positive value: concentric circle outside the basic circle. Negative value: concentric circle inside the basic circle).
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-77

elements
P1 Point on first tangent
P3 Point on circle line
P2 Point on second tangent

Fig. 4738
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Two tangents - one

point.

Fig. 4739
1.
2.
3.
4.
1-78
Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Tangent - two points.

Click on approximate tangent point (P1).
Click on a point (P2) on the arc.
Click on a point (P3) on the arc.
2012-04-13
S778EN

elements
P1 Tangent point on first element
P3 Tangent point on third element
P2 Tangent point on second element

Fig. 4740
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Three tangents.


element
P1 Tangent point
P2 Center of the auxiliary circle

Fig. 4741
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Tangent - center.

24.3 Auxiliary geometry

Note
Auxiliary geometries can be deleted partially or completely.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Auxiliary geometry
1-79

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Delete auxiliary geometry.
2. Select All if the auxiliary geometry is to be completely
deleted.
or
Click on individual elements if particular auxiliary geometries
are to be deleted.
3. Select Total view to rebuild the interface after the auxiliary
geometries are deleted.
or
Change the window setting.
24.4 Measuring
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Measure >2 points.

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Measure >Point.

between 2 points
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Measure >Horizontal or >Vertical.
Measuring coordinates, radius and

diameter of a circle
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Measure >Circle.
1-80
Measuring
2012-04-13
S778EN
Measuring angle
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Measure >Angle.
Measuring length
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Measure >Length.
24.5 Zero point of the coordinate system

Note
If the zero point of the coordinate system has been displaced
and the *.GEO is then saved and reloaded, the zero point is
located again at the original place: in the lower left corner of the
circumscribing rectangle of the loaded '*.GEO' (1).
Zero point of the coordinate system in the lower left 2

corner of the circumscribing rectangle
Offset zero point

Fig. 30651
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Displace zero point.

2. Click on the zero point.
S778EN
2012-04-13
1-81
25.
25.1 Diagnostics for program crash

A so-called "Crash-Dump" of the process is written in a file every
time TruTops crashes. This helps the TruTops development analyze the cause of the crash.
1. Following a crash, change to the following directory:e.g. in
TruTops Laser '...:\TRUMPF.NET\Applications\ToPs100\bin'.
In this directory you will find files with the following names:
'CRASH_20YYMMDD_hhmmss.DMP'.
'ERRORLOG_20YYMMDD_hhmmss.TXT'.
The time stamp of both files is the time of the crash:
20YYMMDD = year, month, day and hhmmss = hour, minute,
second.
2. Send both files and a description of what action cause the
crash to TRUMPF's CAD/CAM service.
1-82
2012-04-13
S778EN
Chapter 2
Setting basic data

1
2-5
1.1
Backup of data
2-6
1.2
2-6
1.3
2-6
1.4
2-7
TRUMPF function
2-8
Data management
2-9
3.1
2-9
Machine data
2-10
4.1
2-10
4.2
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-10
To update manually
2-11
2-12
2-12
Dimensions
2-12
Setting basic data
2-1
2-2
Setting basic data
Limit values
2-13
Workpiece support
2-13
Limit stops
2-16
4.3
2-17
4.4
2-18
4.5
To allocate and configure the automation

components
2-19
4.6

for palletizing
2-20
4.7
2-31
4.8
2-32
4.9
2-33
4.10
To set up the removal and sorting of small

parts
2-33
4.11
Adjusting the automation components
2-34
4.12
Adjust stop pin data
2-35
4.13
Clamps
2-36
To configure clamps
2-36
Adjust clamp data
2-36
4.14
To set up the production package edition
2-37
4.15
2-38
Copying machine
2-38
Deleting machine
2-39
Tool data
2-40
5.1
2-40
5.2
2-41
2-43
6.1
2-43
6.2
2-45
6.3
SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT with grippers: to

define moving table
2-49
6.4
2-51
6.5
2-54
6.6

for palletizing
2-56
GripMaster/Grip
2-68
7.1
2-68
2012-04-13
S778EN
S778EN
2012-04-13
SortMaster
2-70
Material data
2-71
9.1
2-73
9.2
To define the margins of a sheet of unprocessed material
2-76
9.3
2-76
9.4
2-77
10
Technology tables
2-78
10.1
2-79
TRUMPF laser-independent standard

tables
2-79
2-81
10.2
To filter technology tables
2-82
10.3
To change the header data for a technology

table
2-83
10.4
Copy technology table
2-84
10.5
To delete a technology table
2-85
10.6
To display and print a technology table
2-85
10.7
2-86
Modify parameter
2-86
2-87
Allocating rules
2-93
11
Laser rules
2-94
11.1
Name of the rules
2-94
11.2
Search for rules via technology table
2-95
11.3
Copy rules
2-96
11.4
Delete Rules
2-97
11.5
Display and print rules
2-98
11.6
2-98
Modify parameter
2-98
2-99
12
2-107
12.1
To change the value of a variable
2-107
12.2
To create a variable
2-108
12.3
To copy a variable
2-109
12.4
To display the details for a variable
2-109
12.5
To delete a variable
2-110
Setting basic data
2-3
2-4
Setting basic data
12.6
2-111
12.7
2-112
12.8
Description of the variables in the system

rules
2-126
13
Removal rules
2-148
13.1
To change priority
2-148
13.2
Change data
2-148
13.3
Create Rules
2-148
13.4
To reset a set of rules
2-149
14
2-150
14.1
Creating a free cycle
2-150
14.2
To copy any cycle
2-151
14.3
To change any cycle
2-152
14.4
To delete any cycle for the active machine
2-152
14.5
To print any cycle
2-152
14.6
To use formulas to calculate the time
2-153
15
NC post-processing programs, external

programs
2-154
15.1
To enter programs
2-154
15.2
To execute programs
2-156
15.3
Creating a collection call up for several NC

post-processing programs
2-156
15.4
To modify programs
2-159
15.5
To delete programs
2-159
16
2-160
16.1
To enter programs
2-160
16.2
To change programs
2-160
16.3
To run programs
2-160
2012-04-13
S778EN
1.
Technological knowledge that TRUMPF has developed for

TRUMPF machines over the years, and which has been continuously optimized, has been integrated into the TruTops database.
It contains all data that TruTops accesses in the different programming phases.
machine data.
Tool data.
Material data.
Technology tables.
Rules.
NC output data (NC cycles, formats, times ...).
Customer cycles.
Random cycles.
Current application
parameters
The technology tables and the rules contain the current application parameters that have been released by the TRUMPF Process Development Department. The updates of the data collections are released at regular intervals.
Knowledge base
The database is an upgradeable knowledge base. Newly

acquired knowledge in the field of processing technology can be
entered here. TruTops accesses this data the next time an NC
program is generated.
Working with the database
The database offers the following options:
Maintaining data
Creating data records (creating complete new ones or copying the existing ones).
Changing data records (modifying entries).
Deleting available data records.
Adding data about your material.
Creating separate technology tables and rules.
Create your own tools.
Checking the values stored in the database.
The database must be configured for the individual machine in

the Data Management. Only then are the required functions
available for processing in TruTops.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-5
1.1
Backup of data
Note
The data will be saved using the "Backup & restore" tool.
(See the TruTops installation manual)
1.2
Some data (e.g. a new set of rules, new technology tables, ...)
cannot be imported directly into the TruTops database without an
update.
Condition
The file extension corresponds to the current database version.
1. Load the storage medium.

3. Select >User >Database... >Modify....
The file browser opens.
4. Change the directory and mark the database file.
5. Press OK.
The new data will be read into the database.
1.3
To modify the database, any database script (*.exe file) can be

launched, to fix faults in the database or to meet customer
requirements (e.g. to change data).
Database scripts are available on request from TRUMPF Software Support.
2. Select >User >Database... >Modify....
3. Select the database script.
All changes are shown in a log after the modification.
2-6
2012-04-13
S778EN
1.4
Notes
Modifying file size
With this procedure, only application-specific data can be

sent. To send the complete database, use the "Backup &
restore" tool.
When working with a network database (MSDE), sending of
the TruTops database through email can only be started by
the database server.
The email program for sending the database must be MAPIcompatible.
Note
By default, when sending the database by email, it will be
broken up into 4 MB files. This file size can be changed.
To generate emails

2. Select >Rules >System.
3. Find the variable "DbComprSplitSizeInKb" and enter the
required file size under "Value".
4. Select >User >Database... >Send....
The "Send database via email" mask is displayed.
5. Fill in the input fields.
6. Press OK.
The database will be compressed and broken up into parts.
The required number of emails will be created in the email
program.
7. To send emails.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-7
2.
TRUMPF function
Certain functions are password-protected. This data can be

opened and modified only under the guidance of TRUMPF Software Support.
2-8
TRUMPF function
2012-04-13
S778EN
3.
Data management
All default values for machines and components have already

been set. The options available depend on the machine selected.
3.1
1. Start TruTops.
2. Open TruTops Laser.
Open TruTops Punch.
Note
The Data Management is usually opened for the currently
active machine. The machine cannot be changed within the
open Data Management.
3. If required, change the machine (via >Tools >Change
machine).
4. To open the data management, select >Extras >Modify
data....
S778EN
2012-04-13
Data management
2-9
4.
Machine data
The machine data is the basic requirement for the generation of

NC programs. TruTops can be configured for different machines
with an NC interface.
The technical data for the machine, the laser and the control
system is stored in the database. TruTops accesses this data
when generating an NC program.
NOTICE
Incorrect values in the machine data can lead to inoperable

NC programs.
Check whether all entries and changes are correct.

If in doubt, contact TRUMPF's CAD/CAM service department.
All the data necessary for your machine can be found in the current operating manual and the current programming manual of
your machine.
4.1
To be able to use new types of tool, optimized NC output etc. on

the machine, the machine must be regularly updated.
To be able to use optimized NC output etc. on the machine, the
machine version must be regularly updated.

For automatic updates, if necessary the machine version will be
updated daily from the first start of the machine. If the machine
is not connected to the network, the update will be cancelled and
a new attempt made on the next day.
Automatic alignment is possible for all machines, except the following:
L 1003,
TC 180
TC 240
TC 300
L 2000, TC 100, TC 120, TC 160, TC 180, TC 180 L,

N, TC 190, TC 200, TC 235, TC 240, TC240 L,
N, TC2 60, TC 260 A, TC 260 L, TC 260 T, TC 300,
L, TC 300 P, TC 500, TC 600 L.
L 2503, L 2503E, L 2520, L 2530, L 2530plus, L 3003, L 3003E,

L 3020, L 3030 (Bosch), L 4003, L 4003E, L 4030 (Bosch),
L 5005, L 6030 (Bosch), LC 04, LY 2500, TL 105D, TLC 1000H,
TLC 1005, TLC 105, TLC 1050, TLC 6005, TLC CUT5,
WS 2500, WS 2502, WS 4000, WS 4020.
2-10
Machine data
2012-04-13
S778EN

2. >Select Rules >Machine.
Note
The machine path must be specified in the UNC (Universal
Naming Convention) format.
Example: if the machine in the network is named
"TC5000R1", the correct path would be: \\TC5000R1\topsmanu.dir.
3. Adjust the "MachineExchangeDir" variable (see "The rules for
machines and systems", pg. 2-107).
A message about the successful update will be displayed.
To update manually
If automatic updates are not possible, the machine can also be
updated manually.
A manual update is necessary:
To create a file for alignment
To start the alignment
If network access to the machine is not possible.

If the software version of the "MMC" machine component is
< V07.27.00.
1. On the TruTops installation CD: select '\Support_Tools\ActMaschineVersion'.

2. Open the 'Readme.txt' file and follow the instructions.
4. Select >Machine >Data.
5. Select >Basic data >Machine info.
6. Activate "Update the machine via a storage medium".
The "Select directory" mask is opened.
7. Select File.
8. Press OK.
The machine will be updated.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-11
4.2
To configure the basic data of the

machine

The following subcategories belong to the "basic data".
Dimensions
Limit values
Workpiece support
Limit stops
Dynamics
Machine information
Note
The Data Management is usually opened for the currently active
machine. The machine cannot be changed within the open Data
Management.

2. Select >Machines >Data >Basic data.
A menu with subcategories will be opened.
3. Select the required subcategory.
4. Modify data.
5. Press Modify.
The changes are saved.
Exit the "Basic data ..."

mask
6. Go to another mask or another menu.
Dimensions
The following dimensions can be configured:
2-12
Working range
Travel limits
Maximum sheet size
2012-04-13
S778EN
Limit values
In the "Limit values" screen, the following can be defined for the
output of the NC program:
Maximum number of characters in the main program name

and the subroutine number.
(The characters are counted together.)
Maximum values for the X, Y, I and J coordinates.
(I and J coordinates: radius and end point for arcs).
Block number: Maximum number of characters for the line
numbering in the NC text.
Name of the machine drawing.
Transfer path name: The directory where the NC programs
for the data transfer will be copied.
Maximum number of characters for program names.
Table output.
Laser table format.
To output program names with leading zeros
Subroutine technique with programmable single part rotation.
Permit alphanumeric program names for Siemens control
systems.
Workpiece support
Carrier slats
Together with the laser cutting machine, NC programs are supplied with which carrier slats can be cut to fit into the workpiece
supports for the machine.
The shape of the carrier slats depends upon the configuration of
the machine (e.g. TruLaser 5030 with LiftMaster) and the type of
material which is machined on the machine (e.g. V2A).
By default, carrier slats are created for all machines supported
by TruTops with the following information:
NAME
Support point distance
Material that can be cut on it.
Note
Carrier slats which can be used for St37, are also used by
default for all other TRUMPF materials.
Carrier slats layout
S778EN
2012-04-13
Depending on the machine, TruTops already contains different

carrier slat layouts. The carrier slat layouts do not depend upon
the type of carrier slats.
2-13
In addition to this, for each laser cutting machine, within the fixed
pattern of pallets, individual carrier slat layouts can be defined
and saved as a selection.
The carrier slat layouts can be configured in the data management system (e.g. the default layout can be defined).
Note
If, when machining a sheet or a nesting job, tipping optimization
is set, then TruTops will also take account of the offset of the
carrier slats.
To select carrier slat layouts
and carrier slats
In the data management system, a carrier slat can be defined as

the default for machining a material and one carrier slat layout
can be defined as the default for a machine.
When machining, TruTops will then offer the default carrier slat
layout with the default carrier slat for the current material.
To create, modify or delete carrier slats

To create a new carrier slat
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
To modify carrier slat data
7.
8.
9.
Open the Data Management for the desired machine.

Select >Machines >Data >Basic data >Workpiece support.
Select "Carrier slat" Create.
Enter name, supporting point spacing and (for offset carrier
slats) the carrier slat offset.
In the right selection field mark the material, with which the
to copy it to the left
carrier slat can be machined and use
selection field.
Repeat the last step until all of the required materials have
been assigned.
When all of the data has been entered, select OK.
In the "Workpiece support" screen, in the lower left selection
field, mark the required carrier slat.
Select Modify.
The "Modify carrier slat" screen will be displayed.
To define the default carrier

slat
Note
For each material, only one carrier slat should be defined as
the default.
10. To use the carrier slat as the default when machining the
current material, select "Use as default".
11. If needed, modify the distance between the support points
and/or support point offset.
12. To delete or to add new materials which can be machined on
the carrier slat, in the corresponding selection field, mark the
.
material and delete with Remove, or add with
2-14
2012-04-13
S778EN
To delete a carrier slat
13. When all of the data has been entered, select OK.
14. In the "Workpiece support" screen, in the lower left selection
field, mark the required carrier slat.
15. Select Delete.
To assemble the carrier slats layout

Conditions
To assemble the carrier

slats layout
The required machine is active.

A processed sheet or a processed single part is loaded.
The laser application is active.
1. If necessary, close the data management with Exit.

2. Select >Optimize >Slats >Set.
All carrier slats which are possible for the active machine will
be displayed. Set slats will be shown red. Removed slats will
be shown blue.
3. One after the other, click on all slats that the machine operator must remove.
The color of the removed slats changes from red to blue.
4. If all of the required carrier slats are marked, select >Optimize >Carrier slats >Save layout.
5. Enter the assignment name.
6. Select OK.
The carrier slat layout has been saved and can be configured (e.g. the default layout can be defined).
To configure the carrier slat

layout
Defining standard layout
To have the layout displayed
To modify position 1 of the

carrier slat
To delete a carrier slat

layout
S778EN
2012-04-13
7. Open the Data Management for the desired machine.

8. Select >Machines >Data >Basic data >Workpiece support.
9. Mark the carrier slat layout to be defined as the default layout.
10. Select "Default layout".
11. Select Modify.
12. Mark the carrier slat layout to be offered when machining the
parts.
13. Select "Visible".
14. Select Modify.
15. Mark the carrier slat layout to be offered where the position
of the first carrier slat is to be modified.
16. Enter a new position for "Position of 1st slat".
17. Select Modify.
Note
Default TRUMPF layouts cannot be deleted.
2-15
18. Mark the carrier slat layout to be deleted.

19. Select Delete.
To create a new carrier slat layout

2. Select >Machines >Data >Basic data >Workpiece support.
3. Select "Slat layout" Create.
The "Define carrier slat layout"screen will be displayed
4. Enter data for the new slat layout.
5. Select OK.
The new carrier slat layout will be saved and can be used for
the machining of parts.
To select the carrier slat layout for

machining
1. If necessary, close the data management with Exit.
2. Load the sheet.
3. Select >Optimize >Slats >Load allocation.
The "Select carrier slat layout"screen will be displayed.
4. Select the required carrier slat layout and type of carrier slat.
5. Select OK.
Limit stops
In the stops subcategory, the positions of clamps, stops etc. can
be defined.
To define a clamp or stop

2. Select >Machines >Data >Basic data >Stops.
3. Select Create.
The "Selection" mask is displayed.
4. Select Type.
The "Create" screen will be displayed.
To modify a clamp or stop
2-16
5. Entering data.
6. Select OK.
7. Select the required clamp or stop.
2012-04-13
S778EN
8. Select Modify.
The "Modify" screen will be displayed.
To delete a clamp or stop
9.
10.
11.
12.
Modify data.
Select OK.
Select the required clamp or stop.
Select Delete.
The clamp or stop will be deleted.
4.3
To open the basic data

management
To change the parameters
for the NC output
To configure the basic data of the

machine

2. Select >Machines >Data.
Note
The parameters in Data 5 are set correctly when TruTops is
delivered and do not have to be modified.
3. Select Basic machine, Data 7.
4. Modifying parameters for the NC output:
Term
Meaning
Block numbering
Yes = a block numbering is outputted.

No = No block numbering will be output (e.g. if several NC programs are to be
stored in the control system, or for a small NC memory).
Block increment
The increment jump is used to define how many NC blocks can be added manually.
Transfer push-out subroutine
Yes = if the control system supports the functions of the default push-out subroutine
(Q9998).
Max. number of NC characters
If the correct NC memory capacity of the control system is entered here, then this is
monitored by TruTops during NC generation.
Name of transfer path
Here, the directory is entered in which the control system and/or the "transfer"
expects the data.
Tab. 2-1
To modify parameters for

subroutines
S778EN
2012-04-13
5. Press Modify.
6. To modify parameters for subroutines under "Subroutine definition":
2-17
Term
Meaning
Output of subroutine
Yes = subroutines are generated when the SR output is activated (default setting)
during optimization and NC output.
No = no subroutines are generated even if subroutine output is activated (default
setting) during optimization and NC output (e.g. for machines which have no additional memory (Multimemory)).
Linking of main program/

subroutine output
Yes = the subroutine names (numbers) are linked to the main program number and
are thus unequivocal. As a result, several programs can be stored in the NC control
system at the same time.
No = If the control system for the subroutine only accepts 3 to 4 digit numbers (e.g.
SINUMERIK 3N, SINUMERIK 8N or Fanuc 6MB, this is the default setting for
TRUMPF, depending on the control system).
Max.number of subroutines with MP/SR linking
The possible number of subroutines which can be saved is given here. This is
important for control systems which have a limited subroutine memory (e.g. 9 or 99
or 999, default = 99).
Remark
Entries in this field are displayed in the machine selection menu under Remark.
The letters "R", "S" and "V", indicate the clamp type:
R = retractable clamps.
S = penetrating clamps (linear magazine).
V = transitional clamps (can be freely moved on the linear magazine).
Note 2
Additional comments, e.g. installation location, internal machine name, ...
Show interface name

instead of official name
Yes = In the machine selection menu, the old machine name before the TRUMPF
name change or the development name will be shown. For machines which only
have a new name, the TRUMPF development name will be displayed.
No = The interface name will not be displayed.
Add machines to list of

favorites
Yes = The machine will be added to the list of favorites, which is shown when TruTops starts.
No = The machine will not be added to the list of favorites.
Tab. 2-2
7. Press Modify.
4.4
The following data can be viewed and changed under "Laser

data":
2-18
Rounding (contour control mode) yes/no: In contour control

mode, the control system processes the control of the following NC blocks in advance. When the direction of the tangent
is changed, the transitions will be rounded.
Path slope (acceleration-braking ramp) yes/no: With path
slopes, a constant speed is produced over the block transitions, so that the laser moves around the contour of the
workpiece with a constant speed (see the programming manuals for machines with path slope).
Height regulation on/off? (Do not change this setting!)
Piercing sensor (PierceLine) yes/no?
2012-04-13
S778EN
To change the laser data
Work with high pressure?

Feed forward yes/no?
SprintLine yes/no?
Reduced piercing with SprintLine yes/no?
Activate/deactivate measuring cycles 0, 1, 2 or 3 for defining
the sheet thickness when piercing.

2. Modify data.
3. Press Modify.
Exiting "Laser data"
4.5
To allocate and configure the

automation components
Depending on the selected type of machine, automation components will already have been allocated and configured (See
chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program"):
The allocation of the automation components or the data of the
allocated automation components (configuration) can be modified
as follows:
Configuring Lifts

2. Select >Machines >Data >Automation >Lifts.
The automation components which are allocated to the active
machine will be displayed.
Deleting allocation
To allocate other automation

components
Configuring the allocated

components
3. To delete the allocation of an automation component: mark

component.
4. Select Delete.
5. Select Allocate.
The "Lift selection" screen will be displayed. It contains all
automation components which can be allocated to the active
machine.
6. Mark the desired component and select OK.
7. Mark the automation component that is to be configured and
select Modify.
The "Lift configuration" mask is displayed. The data contained in the mask corresponds to the standard configuration
of the allocated components.
8. Modify the data if necessary.
To change the settings for LiftMaster offset, suction cup data,
suction cup types, movability or use, select the corresponding
Modify buttons.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-19
9. When all of the data has been changed, select Modify.

The modified data will be saved.
Finishing configuration
10. Select Previous.
4.6
To define and configure the

unloading area for palletizing
For every machine with automation, several dedicated unloading

area configurations for palletizing can be defined. When palletizing, you can select from the previously defined unloading area
configurations.
For machines with open control systems, the unloading area
application data on the machine must be additionally adapted to
the respectively selected unloading area configuration in TruTops.
Conditions
An automation component is allocated to the machine.

The unloading area application data for your machine will be
adjusted for the unloading area configuration selected in TruTops. This means that the zero points for the "Units" must be
matched to the machine.
Notes
When defining units and pallets, the input screens are identical for the TruTops Laser and TruTops Punch applications.
Fields where no input is possible in the currently active application are grayed out.
The palletizing graphics are only presented when the unloading area data in the loaded *.tmt file corresponds with an
unloading area configuration that has been created.
The unloading area data is saved in the *.tmt file only since
the TruTops Punch Version 3.2. The palletizing graphics can
therefore no longer be displayed with *.tmt files from older
TruTops versions.
Term
Description
Unit
Several units can be located in the unloading area of the machine (e.g. an unloading platform
for stationary pallets and a SortMaster Pallet / TRUMASORT L for moved pallets). One unit
includes a group of pallets. It can be movable or stationary. All pallets on all unloading platforms belong, for example, to one unit.
Pallet
A pallet is a location where lift stocks are deposited. A pallet can, for example, be an allocated location, a standard Euro pallet or a scrap bucket.
Lift stock
Lift stock means parts (e.g. good parts, scrap, waste grids, waste strips) which are picked up
by a lift and unloaded. Everything that the lift unloads is lift stock.
2-20
2012-04-13
S778EN
Term
Description
Stackable products
One stackable product comprise one or more identical lift stocks (e.g. finished parts).
Stackable product is identical when the following conditions are fulfilled:
Stack
the geometry of the lift stock is identical.
The material thickness of the lift stock is identical.
the lift stocks are all incorporated in the same manner by the lift. Example: For all finished
parts with identical geometry, the lift fixes at the same place of the finished part.
A stack corresponds to the total of all lift stocks that are stacked at one position. All the lift
stocks of a stack must concern the same stackable product. Only the same finished parts can
for example form a stack.
Tab. 2-3
Creating a configuration

2. Select >Machines >Data >Automation >Palletizing.
The "Unloading area" screen will be displayed.
4.
Either
To create a new configuration, under "Configurations",
select Create.
or
To create a configuration on the basis of an existing configuration:
Mark an existing configuration.
Under "Configurations", select Copy.
or
To modify an existing configuration:
Under "Configurations", select Modify.
Note
The ID is freely selectable. The next free number will automatically be suggested.
To define the units for

configurations
5. To enter or change "Number (ID)" and "Comment".

6. Press OK.
7. Mark the configuration for which a unit is to be created.
Note
Pallets always have a clear relationship to a unit. This is
why, when a unit is deleted, all of the pallets which are
assigned to that unit will be deleted.
8.
Either
To create a new unit, under "Units", select Create.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-21
or
To create a unit on the basis of an existing unit:
Mark an existing unit.
Under "Units", select Copy.
or
To modify an existing unit:
Under "Units", select Modify.
The "Unit" screen will be displayed.
9. Enter or modify data:
Optional
Description
Number (ID)
Each number per unit can be allocated only once for each machine.
Values from 2 to 16 are possible.
Value 0: reserved for the unloading platform. There can thus only be one unloading
platform per machine.
For machines whose control is programmed using M functions and U addresses (e.g.
TC 500 R):
Value 2: the first SortMaster pallet/TRUMASORT L (L2) or double cart.
Value 3: the second SortMaster pallet/TRUMASORT L (L3) or double cart.
For U addresses, the number (ID) in TruTops must agree with the number of the
SortMaster/TRUMASORT in the machine control system.
For machines with SINUMERIK 840D control systems - tabular display in the NC text
(e.g. TC 600 L):
Machine(Q2, Type)
Remark
When palletizing, the comment will be output in the palletizing drawing of the unit and
in the processing information.
Position X, Y
Is not evaluated by TruTops Punch.
Speed, acceleration
programmable?
Position of the unit. The reference point is the pallet changer's zero point.
The speed and acceleration of the unit are to be programmed: Set buttons to Yes.
The values for speed and acceleration can then be set under >Technology >Lift >Lift
removal >Parameters....
The speed and acceleration of the unit are not to be programmed: Set buttons to
No.
Weight monitoring
To deactivate weight monitoring: Set buttons to No.
Maximum permitted
weight
To activate weight monitoring: Set buttons to Yes.
2-22
For automatic palletizing, parts will only be put on the pallets until the maximum
permissible parts weight of the unit or pallet is reached.
For interactive movements, stacks can only be shifted on a pallet if the maximum permissible parts weight for the pallet will not be exceeded.
2012-04-13
S778EN
Optional
NC output: Y in positions
Description
Is not evaluated by TruTops Laser.
If the Y value is to be output as a position number for movable units which can be
positioned in the Y direction: Set buttons to Yes.
The Y values are then fixed, defined positions (typical for double carts).
Start position
If the Y value is to be output in mm for movable units which can be positioned in

the Y direction (typical for SortMaster pallet/TRUMASORT L): Set buttons to No.
For immovable units (unloading platform): Set buttons to No.

Y value of the first position. The pallet positions in Y must be matched to the start position in Y.
If pallets are entered for this unit later on, the specified start position must lie within the
pallet range. The pallet's Y position must be suitably chosen.
Start position
End number
The number of the first position (typically 1).

The number of the last position (typically 19).
Distance of positions

Y distance between two adjacent positions.
Examples:
Upper/lower cart identical
Y = 60 mm in case of SheetMaster (1300) and double cart or storage cart.
Option only enabled for "double cart" type.Not available for TruMatic 7000.
Upper/lower cart identical: Set buttons to Yes.
Mandatory entry for TC 600 L with control version < 6.0.
Pallets need to be entered only for the upper cart. The pallets for the lower cart
are generated automatically.
The upper and lower carts are not identical: Set buttons to No.
The pallets for the upper and lower cart must be entered separately.
The number and size of the pallets can be different on the upper and lower
carts.
Example:
Double cart with positions 1 to 19 (start position 1, end number 19) and a distance
of positions of 60 mm. The start position (start position 1) is located at Y=60 mm.
The pallet position is at Y=0 mm.
If a pallet position of Y = 0 is defined for a starting position of Y = 60 mm, then the
lift (Y lift zero position) moves to the position Y = 60 mm from pallet edge.
Y sorting motion
If the lower edge of the raised lift stock coincides with the Y lift zero position, then
the lift stock is deposited precisely at the start position - a rare event.
In other cases, the unloading position does not coincide exactly with the starting
position (see "Fig. 20232", pg. 2-26).
Option only enabled for "double cart" type.

For TruTops Laser, the Y sorting movement is done by the lift.
For TruTops Punch, the Y sorting movement is done by the unit.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-23
Optional
Description
Lower cart ID
Upper cart ID
Under "Lower cart ID", enter 4.

The "Upper cart ID" is grayed out. The entry under "Number (ID)" will automatically be
used.
The fields are grayed out, because for TruTops Punch, the ID numbers are always the
same.
Tab. 2-4

Optional
Description
Number (ID)
TC 500 R):
(e.g. TC 600 L):
Machine(Q2, Type)
Remark
Position X, Y
Speed, acceleration
programmable?
No.
Weight monitoring
Maximum permitted
weight
2-24
2012-04-13
S778EN
Optional
Description
Start position


Start position
End number


Examples:
carts.
Example:
Y sorting motion

S778EN
2012-04-13
2-25
Optional
Description
Lower cart ID
Upper cart ID

used.
same.
Tab. 2-5
Start number 1 for

Y = 60 mm
Lift stock
End number 19
Double cart
Pallet for Y = 0 mm
Positions of double cart, pallet and lift items
To define the pallets for a

unit
Fig. 20232
11. To define other units for a configuration

12. Mark the unit for which a unit is to be created.
13.
Either
To create a new pallet, under "Pallets", select Create.
or
To create a pallet on the basis of an existing pallet:
Mark an existing pallet.
Under "Pallets", select Copy.
or
To modify an existing pallet:
Under "Pallets", select Modify.
The "Pallet" mask is displayed.
2-26
2012-04-13
S778EN
Optional
Pallet number (ID)
Description
Can be issued at will.
The numbers must be unique across the machine's entire unloading area. The numbers of existing pallets on other units must not be issued again.
For machines whose control is programmed using M functions and U addresses

(e.g. TC 500 R), the numbers can be issued at will, but must be unique.
For machines with SINUMERIK 840 control systems - table output in the NC text
(e.g. TC 600 L), the pallet numbers in TruTops must match the numbering of the
pallets in the control system.
Note
Any text can be entered as a comment. The comment will be output in the palletizing
drawing of the pallets and in the processing information.
Stackable products
If good parts, scrap or waste grid is selected, this restriction is then only valid for the
automatic palletizing. Manually, for example, a good part can be shifted onto a scrap
pallet.
Position X, Y
The reference point is the pallet changer's zero point.

The position of the pallet reference point relative to the punching head mid-point. The
pallet reference point is always the corner of the pallet which is nearest to the punching
head mid-point (see "Fig. 34927", pg. 2-30).
Notes on the input:
If the lift is to the left of the machine as seen by the operator:

X value negative; Y value positive.
If the lift is to the right of the machine as seen by the operator:

If the unit belonging to the pallet in Y is programmed in positions, the Y position of

the pallet must match the first programmable Y position of the unit.
Size X,Y
Dimensions of the pallet (positive sign).
Pallet edge X,Y
The margins of the pallet in which no stack should be placed.

When automatically palletizing the parts, the system will first attempt to not place the
stack in the margins. Only if this is not possible, will the system then place in the margins.
Container
Allocate to a standard pallet: Set buttons to Yes.
Allocate to a bucket: Set buttons to No.

Under table
If the pallet is fully or partially beneath the machine table: Set buttons to Yes.
When unloading, the machine will first move backwards. This lengthens the machine
time.
Fixed position
If the pallet is not underneath the machine table: Set buttons to No.
If all stacks on this pallet are to be formed in the same position: Set buttons to Yes.
Example application: scrap bucket
If there is no fixed position on the pallet where items should be stacked: Set buttons
to No.
(see "Fig. 34928", pg. 2-30)
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-27
Optional
Description
Position X,Y

The position relative to the pallet's reference point one which lifted items should be
deposited.
SheetMaster:
The left lower corner of the rectangle enveloping the lifted item will be deposited on
the fixed position.
Coordinates: +X +Y.
TRUMALIFT SC, SE:
The right lower corner of the rectangle enveloping the lifted item will be deposited on
the fixed position.
Coordinates: +X +Y.
(see "Fig. 34928", pg. 2-30)

Maximum stack height
Maximum height of a stack that should be created on this pallet. If zero is entered as
the maximum stack height, then no stack can be created at this position.
Standard: 200 mm.
Cart number
A cart number can only be defined if there is a double cart with different upper and
lower carts. For double carts with identical upper and lower carts, pallets will only be
assigned to one cart. Pallets on the 2nd cart will automatically be produced.
Tab. 2-6

Optional
Description
Pallet number (ID)

Note
Stackable products
pallet.
Position X, Y

Notes on the input:


2-28

2012-04-13
S778EN
Optional
Description
Size X,Y
Pallet edge X,Y

Container

Under table
time.
Fixed position
to No.
(see "Fig. 34928", pg. 2-30)

Position X,Y

deposited.
SheetMaster:
the fixed position.
Coordinates: +X +Y.
TRUMALIFT SC, SE:
the fixed position.
Coordinates: +X +Y.
(see "Fig. 34928", pg. 2-30)

Standard: 200 mm.
Cart number
Tab. 2-7
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-29
Pallet left-hand lift
Pallet reference point
Pallet right-hand lift
Punching head center

Fig. 34927
Pallet
Lift stock
Rectangle encapsulating the

lift stock
Fixed position X,Y (SheetMaster)
Fixed position X,Y (TRUMALIFT SC, SE)

Fig. 34928
16. To define further pallets for a unit.
2-30
2012-04-13
S778EN
4.7
The following general options can be configured for the

machines:
Sheet alignment with height regulation Yes/No?

Defining loading corner.
(The terms upper left, upper right, lower left and lower right
refer to the screen display. The machine zero point is in the
lower left of this display.)
Align sheet with DetectLine (Cateye) Yes/No?
Reduced approaching II Yes/No?
Gas flushing Yes/No?
Set Microweld Yes/No?
Define the "Cutting head collision area" for the tipping optimization.
Two-head machines have the following additional machine data:
To change the general

options
Is two-head mode possible Yes/No?

Offset in X Yes/No?
For yes: The minimum X distance to the cutting head (=minimum distance between the two cutting heads in the X direction).
Offset in Y Yes/No?
For yes: The minimum Y distance to the cutting head (=minimum distance between the two cutting heads in the Y direction).
Park position possible Yes/No?
One-head op. with head 2 possible Yes/No?
Head adjustment time calculation Yes/No?
The time taken to bring the two cutting heads to the desired
distance from each other can be included in time calculation.
Head adjustment speed.

2. Select >Machines >Data >Options >General.
The options for the selected machine will be displayed.
3. Modify data.
4. Press Modify.
To change the data for twohead mode
5. Select >Machines >Data >Options >Two-head.

The options for two-head mode will be displayed.
6. Modify data.
7. Press Modify.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-31
Exit "Two-head"
4.8
The available options depend on the machine. The machine

options are listed in the order confirmation.
2. Select >Machines >Adapt.
3. Activate "Machine options" and choose Next.
Note
The following table shows all of the options. Which options
are really available depends upon the active machine.
4. To activate machine options:
Meaning
Optional
Non-scratch
machining
Ball roller tables

with brush inserts
(prev. nonscratch machining)
Activate if the machine is equipped with the "Antiscratch machining" package.

Which of the two options is available, depends upon the age of the machine.
Active die
Activate if the machine has an active die.
Repositioning cylinder present
Activate if the machine is equipped with a repositioning cylinder. It can then be repositioned with repositioning cylinder and/or presser foot.
Sliding support table
Activate if the machine is equipped with a support table for the flap opening.
Adjustable presser
foot
The force of the presser foot can be programmed in order to avoid imprints on sensitive
materials.
Activate if the presser foot force can be adjusted.
StripLine
(Presser foot force
programmable)
The force of the presser foot can be programmed in order to avoid imprints on sensitive
materials.
Activate if the machine is equipped with "StripLine".
If a value is entered for the presser foot force, it must be monitored by the machine. This
monitoring slows down the process of pressing down.
Clamps can be
individually
opened
Clamp groups
available
Activate if the machine is equipped with clamps which can be opened individually or with
groups of clamps.
With clamps that can be opened individually, every clamp can be separately controlled.
For groups of clamps, the clamps are controlled together. The clamps in a group can
only be opened and closed together, as a unit.
Which of the two options is available, depends upon the age of the machine.
Small part sorting
present
Activate if there is a TRUMASORT S, a SortMaster Box/TRUMASORT R4 or a conveyor

belt with deflector located below the small parts flap.
Tool lubrication
Activate when intensity of lubrication and/or lubricant container can be programmed.
Die spray lubrication
Activate if the machine is equipped with spray lubrication. The sheet is lubricated from the
bottom using spray lubrication.
2-32
2012-04-13
S778EN
Optional
Meaning
Softpunch
Reduces the noise level generated during punching.
Tapping
Activate if the machine supports tapping.
MultiBend
Activate if the machine supports the MultiBend tool in order to execute bends.
MultiShear
Activate if the machine supports the MultiShear tool in order to process parts cleanly.
MultiTool
Activate if the machine supports MultiTools. When a MultiTool tool is selected, the clamp
contour for MultiTool and standard tools is automatically activated.
Slotting
Activate if the machine supports the slotting tool. The 30 x 5 slotting tool can be used
(feed = 5 mm).
Engraving
Activate if the machine supports "Engraving".
Quick forming
Activate if the machine supports "Quick forming". "Quick beading" is possible in the forming area.
Engraving
Activate if the machine supports "Engraving". The engraving tool can be used for labeling.
Roller tools
Activate if the machine supports the roller tools.
Adaptive stroke calibration
Activate if the machine is equipped with "adaptive stroke calibration". After a measurement
the ram stroke will be exactly adjusted for the current material thickness.
Loading table
Activate if the machine for the SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT is equipped with an auxiliary

table.
Deburring
Activate if the machine supports "Deburring".

Tab. 2-8
4.9
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select >Extras >Modify data....

Select >Machines >Adapt.
Activate "Repositioning devices".
Select Next until the "Repositioning devices" screen is displayed.
Note
If both the repositioning device and the presser foot are activated, then, when automatically repositioning, the workpiece
will be clamped at three points. If only one repositioning
device is to be active, then repositioning must be interactive.
5. Setting options.
4.10 To set up the removal and sorting of

small parts
Setting the removal of small
parts
S778EN
2012-04-13

2. Select >Machines >Adapt.
3. Activating "Removal of small parts".
2-33
To set up the sorting of

small parts
4. Select Next until the "Remove small parts" screen is displayed.

5. In the list, mark the flap for which the removal of small parts
is to be set up.
6. Activate options.
7. At small parts sorting, click on .
8. Select sorting unit.
9. Select Read-in configuration at the SortMaster Box Linear
sorting unit.
The "Load container configuration" mask will appear.
10. Select the configuration file in the file browser and press OK.
Tip
The supplied standard configuration file SortMasterLinearConfiguration.xml is saved at '...:\TRUMPF.NET\Data\KleinteileSortierung'.
The configuration file is read into TruTops. The active configuration can be selected in the TruTops Punch application.
4.11 Adjusting the automation

components
Automation components are optional loading and unloading units
such as SheetMaster or GripMaster/Grip: The available options
depend on the selected machine.
The data of all standard lifts and the most of the special lifts is
already stored in TruTops. The data of a special lift must be
imported into TruTops only if it has never been delivered by
TRUMPF so far.
Condition
Activating a lift
The machine whose automation components are to be set is

activated.
1.
2.
3.
4.

"Activate automation components (SheetMaster, GripMaster)".
Select Next until the "Automation components (SheetMaster,
GripMaster)" screen is displayed.
5. Under "Loading unit", activate "SheetMaster".
The "Lift selection" mask is displayed.
6. Select "Add SheetMaster to selection".
Another "Lift selection" mask is displayed.
2-34
2012-04-13
S778EN
Note
The version number and the suction cup assignment designation help in determining whether the lift is a standard lift or
a special lift. Standard lifts have 3-digit version numbers (e.g.
V105). Special lifts have 5-digit version numbers (e.g.
V10599). They end either with "90" or with "99". The suction
cup assignment designation starts with an "S".
7. Select the desired lift in the list and confirm with OK.
The selected lift is added to the list in the first "Lift selection"
mask.
8. In order to delete a lift from the selection list for the selected
machine:
Select lift in the list.
Select Delete SheetMaster from selection.
Confirm message with Yes.
9. To activate a lift for the selected machine: select a lift in the
list and confirm with OK.
The lift is activated and is displayed under "Configure SheetMaster" as loading and unloading unit.
Activating GripMaster/Grip
10. Under "Configure GripMaster", activate "GripMaster".

11. Click on near GripMaster.
12. In the "Grip selection" mask, select GripMaster/Grip and confirm with OK.
The name of the GripMaster / Grip is displayed under "Configure GripMaster".
The automation components are activated.
4.12 Adjust stop pin data

Define available stop pins
Activate the stop pin for

manual loading
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Activate "Stop pin data".
Select Next until the "Stop pin data" screen is displayed.
Define available stop pins via the Yes and No buttons.
Note
Loading with SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT always takes place
on the sensor pin, no matter how the default pin is defined.
6. Activate the stop pin to be activated during manual loading

under "Pin number (default preselection)".
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-35
Tip
If under >File >New, Load, "Adopt as default" has been activated, the stop pin specified there will automatically be activated in the data management system.
Enter the data for the stop
pins
7. Enter the positions, dimensions and types of the stop pins.

8. Under "Load from" select the loading direction from the operator's view.
9. Enter the Y loading position.
4.13 Clamps
To configure clamps
Note
The entries and switch settings corresponds to the standard
installation conditions. Modifications may be made only if the
configuration differs from the default settings.
3. Select Clamp data.
Notes
Data 7 is only enabled for TruPunch 2020 / TC 2020 R
FMC compact. The data is stored in the control parameters and may not be changed.
The settings under Data 8 are required only when

dependencies exist in the machine between the sheet
length in X direction, the loading position and the clamp
positions. This is, for example, the case with retractable
clamps.
4. Select Data 8.
5. Modify data.
6. Press Modify.
Adjust clamp data

To set the number of clamps
2-36
Clamps

2. Activate "Clamp data".
3. Select Next until the "Clamp data" screen is displayed.
2012-04-13
S778EN
Note
The clamp drawing and the number of possible clamps has
already been preset and need not be changed.
4. Enter the number of clamps used.
Note
By default, all clamps can only be opened together. The
number of programmable clamps is then 1.
5. If the machine has individual, openable clamps, then activate
"Open clamps individually".
The number of programmable clamps corresponds to the
number of clamps used.
To define the default
positions of the clamps
Defining sheet data
6. Enter the slot numbers for the clamps and select Update.
The clamps default positions will be shown in the display.
7. Click on next to Active material.
The "Specify Sheet Data" mask is displayed.
8. Prepare sheet (See chapter "Machining parts, generating an
NC program").
9. Select Exit.
4.14 To set up the production package

edition
Several NC programs can be compiled, one after the other, into
one production package in the sequence of their generation.
If several NC programs are to be linked together in an arbitrary
sequence to form a production package, then after TruTops has
been installed, the NcLink program will be available.
A corresponding type of production package will be used,
depending on the machine and the automation system. Each
type takes account of a different, particular machine constellation.
For the correct type of production package to be selected in TruTops, it must first be determined at the machine.
After TruTops has been installed, there is a program with which
the correct type of production package can be easily determined
at the machine.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Clamps
2-37
The production package will only be supported by machines with

an open control system and by machines with a Cell-Server connection:
To determine the type of

production package
To determine the type of
production package
TC L 3050, TC L 3030 with Siemens control system:

On software version V4.75.
TruLaser 5000 series
TruLaser 3000 series
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
See Software manual NcLink, TubeLink.

Activate "Production package edition".
Select Next until the "Production package edition" screen is
displayed.
6. Open the list with .
7. Select the type of production package.
8. To book the single parts of a production package generated
by means of a nesting job in TC-CELL with an order number
(corresponds to "customer" in the Nest application), select
"Output job information".
4.15 To copy or delete a machine

Copying machine
In order to be able to create various configurations from a
machine, it can be copied (several times).
The various configurations of a machine can be selected in the
Tube application and the relevant Data Management independently of one another.
1. Start Windows Explorer.
2. Go to the following directory:
<LW>\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\DbTools\MachineCopy'.
(LW = drive letter)
3. Double-click on the 'machineCopy.bat' shell script.
The "Copy machine" mask is displayed.
4. Mark the desired language and select OK.
2-38
2012-04-13
S778EN
Note
The correct ODBC entry can be called up via >Help >Info
"Files". The current database will be shown in the first line,
enclosed in round brackets.
5. Mark the ODBC entry in which a copy of the machine is to
be stored (e.g. T100_V45_V600) and select OK.
Mark the ODBC entry in which a copy of the machine is to
be stored (e.g. T300_V45_V600) and select OK.
The "Copy/Delete machine" mask is displayed.
6. Mark the machine to be copied.
7. Select Copy.
The machine is copied. A number is attached in front of the
type no. ("Type") and increases consecutively (number for
the first copy: "1").
8. Select Exit.
10. Configure the machine.
Deleting machine
2. Go to the following directory:
<LW>\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\DbTools\MachineCopy'.
(LW = drive letter)
3. Start the machineCopy.bat script file (double click).
The "Copy machine" mask is displayed.
4. Mark the desired language and select OK.
5. Mark the ODBC entry from which the machine is to be
deleted (e.g. T100_V45_V600) and select OK.
Mark the ODBC entry from which the machine is to be
deleted (e.g. T300_V45_V600) and select OK.
The "Copy/Delete machine" mask is displayed.
6. Mark the machine to be deleted.
7. Select Delete.
8. Select Exit.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-39
5.
Tool data
Note
The basic settings are made for the tool data in the data management system. The tools themselves are created under >Tools
>Management... ().
5.1
Note
A description of programming and the meaning of the various
addresses (tool changes) is given in the programming manual for
the machine.
To define the number of
tools in external magazines

3. Select Tool system data, Data 1.
Notes
The difference in the maximum number of tool stations in
the tool alternating system minus the number of clamps
determines the maximum number of tools that can be
alternated automatically with linear magazines.
For the TC 180 L, TC 260 L, TC 300 L and TruMatic 3000, if a protective tool is used for the laser
machining, this must be deducted from the quantity.
If more tools are required for processing than can be

replaced, a relevant message appears when sheet
machining is being optimized.
4. Enter the max. number of tools in external magazines.
5. Press Modify.
6. Select Data 2.
To define the NC output

format for tool changes
Note
The type of addresses the machine understands depends on
the machine type and the software update.
7. Select NC output format:
2-40
Tool data
2012-04-13
S778EN
Format
Type
Meaning
18-character T
address
Tool shape/tool
geometry
Valid for multi-purpose machines with BOSCH-CCxxx control systems from software update T23-4xx without ToolMaster (40)/TRUMATOOL 40.
Ident number
(numerical)
Valid for multi-purpose machines with BOSCH-CCxxx control systems from software update T23-4xx with ToolMaster (40)/TRUMATOOL 40.
Sequential 2-digit
number (special
tools)
Valid for multi-purpose machines with BOSCH-CCxxx control systems up to software update T23-4xx.
13-character T
address
The last two digits

from the ID number
(special tools).
K address
For special tools, digits 4 and 5 of the T address are output as

a sequential 2-digit numbers.
This number is only valid for the produced program.
Valid for multi-purpose machines with BOSCH-CCxxx control systems up to software update T23-4xx.
Ident number
(numerical)
For digits 12 and 13 of the T address for special tools, the last
two digits of the ID number will be used. It is a precondition for
the use of this format, that these two digits differ for all special
tools.
This number is valid for all generated programs.
K address is applicable for the TC 260 with Bosch-CCxxx and cell

control system and for machines with software update < T23-4xx.
If "Preparatory" is set to Yes, then in the NC program, another
preparatory cycle will be introduced prior to the tool change.
CCTOOLNO
Ident number
(alphanumeric)
Applies for all machines with open control systems (SINUMERIK 840D, Bosch type 3, Bosch PNC-P): tool selection for the
tool which is next to be put into the tool holder using the
TC_TOOL_CHANGE command.
Tab. 2-9
To define the automatic

rotation of the tool angle
Note
This makes sense for machines where the tools have to be
loaded in differing mounting positions (e.g. with a changer
wheel and a linear magazine: TC 240 R or TC 260 and
TC 200 R or TC 500 R).
8. Select "Automatically output all tool angles rotated by 180
degrees".
9. Press Modify.
5.2

3. Select Lubrication system data, Data 1.
Note
Detailed specifications regarding the lubrication of tools are
given in the operating manual.
4. Setting options.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Tool data
2-41
5. Press Modify.
The change is saved. The settings made are outputted at the
beginning of the NC program if they do not correspond to the
start-up status of the machine.
2-42
Tool data
2012-04-13
S778EN
6.
6.1
The entries and switch settings corresponds to the default settings. Modifications may be made only if the configuration deviates from the default settings.
Condition
SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT is allocated to the machine (see

"Adjusting the automation components", pg. 2-34).

2. Select Suction cup data.
The "Suction cup data" mask is displayed.
3. Select the suction cup whose data is to be modified from the
following list.
4. Click near the suction cup ID on .
Note
As a rule, swivel cups may only be on valve numbers 1 3.
5. Select the suction cup ID in the list.
The data of the suction cup is displayed in the mask:
Term
Explanation
Loading sensor
The loading sensor monitors whether the sheet is held

during the loading cycle.
The loading sensors are shown with a left arrow (in
the direction of loading).
Unloading sensor
In the deposition area, the unloading sensor monitors

the lift's Z axis (stack height). If no unloading sensor
is active on the part, then the lift cannot determine the
initial deposition height.
The unloading sensors are shown with a right arrow
(in the direction of unloading).
Vacuum monitoring
The vacuum sensor on a suction cup monitors

whether the parts are held during the trip.
Vacuum sensors are shown with a downward arrow.
Tab. 2-10
Tip
The suction cup ID is also the order number of the suction
cup.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-43
Note
The suction cup should be displaced only as far as its hose
length allows.
6. To change the position of the suction cup:
Select X pos. or Y pos..
The possible reserve positions in the specified search
radius around the current suction cup position are displayed.
If required, modify the search radius and confirm with
Search radius.
Select the desired position in the list.
The new position is displayed in the mask.
7. If required, modify the remaining suction cup data:
Optional
Explanation
Valve number
Corresponds to the consecutive number of the suction cup (S-No.).

All valve numbers of a lift must be integers and continuously ascending starting with
1.
Coupled cup No.
Example: 3 suction cups are coupled with a suction cup group. The valve number
(S-No.) of all suction cups is 4. A coupled cup no. (K-No.) between 1 and 3 is additionally allocated to each of the 3 suction cups.
If the suction cup is not coupled: coupled cup no. = 0.
All coupled cup numbers must be integers and continuously ascending staring from
1.
Bar
If the value = 0, the suction is on the basic frame. If the value = 1 or 2, the suction
cup is on bar 1 or 2.
Vacuum circuit
Number of the vacuum circuit. If the lift has only one vacuum circuit, the value = 0.
Min.No.Tight
Minimum number of suction cups in a suction cup group that must be able to be
activated, so that the entire group can be activated.
If unthrottled suction cups are placed in the suction cup group, "Min.No.Tight" must
be identical with the number of suction cups in the group.
Angle
Angle of rotation of the suction cup.
Use for loading
Suction cup is permitted for loading.

If magnetic suction cups are permitted for loading, multiple sheets are raised from
the stack. If loading without magnetic holders is not possible, reducing sleeves must
be used, which reduce the magnetic force of attraction such that only 1 sheet is
raised.
Use for unloading
Suction cup is permitted for unloading.

To remove perforated sheets, tread plates etc. the standard suction cups can be
replaced by special suction units (see "Suction cup types" or TRUMPF suction cup
catalogue).
Integrated into suction

plate
Suction cup has been integrated into the suction plate. The X or Y position cannot
be modified.
Tab. 2-11
8. If suction cup data has been modified: select Check.

Impermissible gaps in the valve/coupler numbers are
searched for.
2-44
2012-04-13
S778EN
9. Select Modify.
The suction cup data is saved.
6.2
Condition
SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT is allocated to the machine as the

unloading unit (see "Adjusting the automation components",
pg. 2-34).
Note
1.
2.
3.
4.
Optional

Select >Machines >Data.
Select SheetMaster.
To change the data (see the following tables), select
Change.
Description
Data 1 (for SheetMaster, TRUMALIFT SB, TRUMALIFT SE, TRUMALIFT SC)

Position (operator
view)
NC output format
Sheet thickness detector
Prepare loading at end

of program
Operator view means that the operator is standing in front of the machine looking in the
direction of the machine.
direct: All lift functions will be output at the point where they are needed.
time-optimized: All preparatory functions such as suction cup coupling or lift coordinates will be output as early as possible so as to integrate the transmission time into
the machine's run time.
Manual:
A sheet thickness detector (double sheet detector) is present that cannot be programmed
There is no sheet thickness detector present.
mechanical: The thickness of the material will be checked by a probe.
inductive: The thickness of the material will be checked inductively. The sheet metal
thickness detector is programmable.
"Prepare loading at end of program" means that, while a sheet is still being machined, a
new sheet is already being fetched by SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT.
This option defines the default settings. Apart from not possible the behavior for individual programs can be modified under >NC program >NC program >Start, "Parameters".
Name of Lift
S778EN
not possible: In this case, preparatory loading is not possible at all, and this setting
will define that to be the default.
No: Preparatory loading is possible but is not preset.
Yes: Preparatory loading is possible and is preset.
SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT from 1/95: the lift name corresponds to the program version number of the nameplate.
All S-lifts: The name of the lift is displayed.
2012-04-13
2-45
Optional
Description
Drawing name
To display the SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT in TruTops, there is a drawing of the lift available. The drawing is in the directory 'C:\TRUMPF.NET\data\Lift\'. If the aluminum profile
on the lift is shifted, then this drawing must be modified.
Max. carrying capacity
Maximum admissible weight in kg that the SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT is permitted to

transport.
Max. sheet thickness
The value can only be specified for the TC 260.
X dim. sheet edge-lift

zero point
X dim. measured in mm from the sheet edge to the zero point of the SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT.
X dim. sheet edge-Lift

ref. pt.
X dim. measured in mm from the sheet edge to the reference point of the SheetMaster/
TRUMALIFT.
Data 2 (for SheetMaster, TRUMALIFT SB, TRUMALIFT SE, TRUMALIFT SC)

X offset value vacuum
carriage zero point tool center
Since the position of the suction frame is displayed at the last machining position, the
offset value from the center of the punching head to the suction frame offset is entered
here. This dimension is contained in the suction cup reference drawing.
Safety offset to X offset value
Safety offset in mm that is to be calculated.
Can speed, acceleration and sheet thickness be programmed?

Max. sheet dimension
in X
Min. sheet dimension
in X
The X offset value specifies the distance that the edge of the metal sheet should be
removed from the tool center, when loading the stop pin, before the speed is reduced.
Is not used by SheetMaster.
No: The default setting for SC, SB, SE
Yes: The default setting for TASC 100 lift control
Minimum and maximum sheet dimensions that can be transported by SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT during loading and unloading. Should one of the four limits not be observed,
then manual loading will be generated.
Max. sheet dimension

in Y
Min. sheet dimension
in Y
Data 3 (for SheetMaster, TRUMALIFT SB, TRUMALIFT SC)
NC output format
Definition of whether speed and acceleration have to be output in the NC program in

Levels or in %.
NC output speed
Definition of the speed level from 1-6. Each speed level is assigned to a certain speed
in m/min (see description of lift).
NC output acceleration
Definition of the acceleration levels from 1-6. Each acceleration level is assigned to a
certain acceleration in m/s2 (see description of lift).
X dim. waiting position
Waiting position in mm when loading in X direction.
Max. sht thickn. stripping
During peeling, the sheet is separated with the aid of a peeler cup. If the sheet is too
thick, the force of the suction cup is not enough to overbend the sheet. The peeler cup
is not activated.
The material thickness is entered, up to which peeling is possible.
X dim. sheet edge machine
The distance between the front edge of the sheet metal stack and the center of the
punch head in the X direction. This corresponds to the sheet pick-up position. This
dimension can be found in the machine's installation plan.
Y dim. sheet edge Machine
Distance between the sheet stack stop angle at the spreader solenoid and the center of
the punching head in Y direction. Corresponds to the offset of the loading stack to the
lift zero point.
Data 4 (for TRUMALIFT SB, TRUMALIFT SC)
2-46
2012-04-13
S778EN
Optional
Material
Description
To select a material:
Select Selection.
Click on the material.
The data for the material will be displayed in the fields.

Materialcode
The inductive double sheet detector (material detector) is supported. The measured values can be saved in the memory from 0 to 99 in TruTops Data Management.
The values between 0 and 99 must correspond to the locations of the machine control
system. The locations are allocated at the control system. Number "0" stands for "no
measurement".
To determine and enter the values:
Carry out a double sheet detector measurement on the desired material.
Save the measurement results under locations 1 - 99 of the machine control system
(Example: number of the location = 1).
Enter the number of the location in TruTops under "Materialcode".
Select Selection.
Click on the material.
Select Create.
The data is entered in the list field.

Data 5 (for SheetMaster, TRUMALIFT SE, TRUMALIFT SC)
Number of carrier
cups
Number of coupled
cups
NC output format
Definition of whether speed and acceleration have to be output in the NC program in

Levels or in %.
NC output speed
Definition of the speed level from 1-6. Each speed level is assigned to a certain speed
in m/min (see description of lift).
NC output acceleration
Definition of the acceleration levels from 1-6. Each acceleration level is assigned to a
certain acceleration in m/s2 (see description of lift).
1st dropping height in

Z
Specification of the minimum height for the regular dropping of parts onto units, which
are located under the machine table.
The "1st dropping height in Z" corresponds to the value of the maximum dropping
height (see data 6). A "soft dropping" or "depositing" is not possible in the area under
the machine table.12
Retract from clamp in

DY
Specification of the traverse path in Y direction to move a part from the clamping area.
Traversing speed
Corresponds to the speed with which the travel motion is to be executed for release
from the clamp.
Distance between
punching head - lift
pedestal X
Dimension from the center of the punching head to the front edge of the first lift pedestal in X direction.
DistancePunching
head - lift pedestal Y
Dimension from the center of the punching head to the front edge of the first lift pedestal in Y direction.
max. X traversing path

during Y return stroke
X traversing path during the Y suction frame displacement return.
1
2
S778EN
2012-04-13
Is not supported in this version of TruTops.

Value has no significance for SC/SE.
2-47
Optional
Description
X unloading area outside of the machine

start/end
When automatically palleting, the stacks will be placed within the defined X unload area
(the area corresponding to the machine configuration).
Palletizing under the

table
This defines whether an unloading area should also be defined under the machine
table.
Start within the

machine
The start of the unloading area under the machine table related to the machine zero
point (punching head).
When stacks are moved, they can only be displaced within the defined X unloading
area.
Data 6 (for SheetMaster, TRUMALIFT SE, TRUMALIFT SC)

Min. dropping height
The lift drops the parts from this height if "Soft dropping" is selected.
Max. dropping height
The lift drops the parts from the maximum dropping height, if "Regular dropping" is
selected.
Lift stroke Y
Traversing path for SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT when unloading after laser processing

(only for TC 600 L, TruMatic 6000/TC 6000 L).
Software limit switch

Laser X axis
Dimension < 0, to which the SheetMaster can move when the laser is active.
Standard pos. laser X

offset
Dimension between the software limit switch X and the standard unloading position X.
Dimension > 0 to which the TRUMALIFT SC, SE can move when the laser is active.
This dimension is calculated during interactive and automatic positioning of the lift, when
determining the lift X position. The lift will remain the entered distance away from the
software limit switch.
For machines with a negative value for "Software limit switch laser X axis" (e.g.TruMatic 3000) this value must also be negative. For machines with a positive value for
"Laser X axis software limit switch" (e.g. TC 260 L) this value must also be positive.
Min. Y travel pos.

punching
Minimum traversing position in Y direction of the SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT during

punching.
Min. Y travel pos.

laser
Minimum traversing position in Y direction of the SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT during laser

processing.
X offset punching
head to suction cup
frame zero point
For lift removal, these two parameters define where the suction cup frame zero point is,
relative to the center of the punching head.
Y offset punching
head to suction cup
frame zero point
Last punching stroke
fr.Lift
The machine will only trigger the last stoke if the SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT has reached
the position to unload the part.
Machine-dependent presetting:
Last stroke after sucking
Yes: TruPunch 5000/TC 5000 R, TC 600 L, TruMatic 6000/TC 6000 L.
No: All other machines.
The part will only be separated out if the suction cups have picked it up (safe removal).
Machine-dependent presetting:
Yes: TC 600 L, TruMatic 6000/TC 6000 L.

Also possible for: TC 500 R, TruPunch 5000/TC 5000 R.
Safety offset to X offset value
2-48
No: All other machines.
Value which is to be calculated as a safety offset at the "minimum X pick-up position":
Default for SheetMaster: 0 mm
Default for TRUMALIFT SE, SC: 1 mm.
2012-04-13
S778EN
Optional
Description
Y travelling of Lift over

unloading area
This option can be enabled for SheetMaster 1305/1605.
Min.Y travel pos. lift
This means that, when depositing an item, the lift can also move in the Y direction, corresponding to the configured positions.
Max. Y travel pos. lift

Data 8 (for SheetMaster, TRUMALIFT SC)
Number of grippers
(max. 2)
The SheetMasters (1000 and 1250) are equipped with a maximum of two lifting grips.
1st gripper position in

X
1st gripper position in X direction to the center of the punching head in the smallest
pick-up position.
1st gripper position in

Y
1st gripper position in Y direction.3
2nd gripper position in

X
2nd gripper position in X direction to the center of the punching head in the smallest
pick-up position
2nd gripper position in

Y
2nd gripper position in Y direction.3

DY
Corresponds to the traverse path in Y direction, in order to draw back the opened
clamps.
X transfer position lift
Corresponds to the position at which the sheet skeleton is taken over from the lifting
grip.
Min.Y position tr.guide

rail
Corresponds to the Y position at which the sheet skeleton is transferred to the lifting
grip.
X pos. sheet skeleton
Corresponds to the deposit position of the sheet skeleton for removal with a lifting grip.
The standard versions of the SheetMaster (1300, 1600, 1306 and 1606) are not equipped with lifting grips. Sheet skeletons can be removed with GripMaster/Grip.
Tab. 2-12
6.3
SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT with
grippers: to define moving table
For SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT with grippers, the waste grid is

pulled over the moving table with grippers and is put down.
During automatic palletizing, good parts are stacked on good
part pallets and waste grids and scrap parts are stacked on the
moving table. Waste grids and scrap parts at the machine are
also stacked on the moving table, if after the automatic palletization, they are manually pushed onto a good part pallet. Good
parts at the machine are accordingly always stacked on good
part pallets.
Defining the configuration

3. Select Unloading area, Data 1.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Is currently not evaluated by TruTops.
2-49
4. Under "Configurations", select Create.

5. Enter "ID" and "Comment" (e.g. Moving table).
6. Press OK.
The configuration created will be displayed in the list.
7. Mark the configuration in the list.
8. Under "Units", select Create.
Note
The moving table must be defined as a double cart.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Under "Type", select Double cart.

Under "Speed, acceleration programmable?", select No.
Under "NC output: Y in positions", select No.
Under "Upper & lower cart identical", select No.
Under "Y sorting movement", select Lift.
Press OK.
The moving table will be defined as a double cart.
Defining pallet for sheet

skeletons and scrap
15. Mark the Double cart unit.

16. Under "Pallets", select Create.
17. Under "Pallet number (ID)", enter 1.
18. Enter a comment (e.g. scrap pallet 1).
19. Under "Stack item", select Scrap and waste grid.
20. Depending on the machine involved, enter "Position X, Y",
"Size X, Y" and "Pallet margin X, Y".
21. Select "Under table", No.
22. Under "Fixed position", select No.
23. Enter "Maximum stack height".
24. Press OK.
The pallets for sheet skeletons and waste parts are defined
on the upper cart.
Defining pallets for finished

parts
25. Mark the Double cart unit.

26. Under "Pallets", select Create.
27. Under "Pallet number (ID)", enter 2.
28. Enter a comment (e.g. good part pallet 1).
29. Under "Stack items", select Good part.
30. Depending on the machine involved, enter "Position X, Y",
"Size X, Y" and "Pallet margin X, Y".
31. Under "Fixed position", select No.
32. Enter "Maximum stack height".
2-50
2012-04-13
S778EN
33. Under "Cart number", select Lower cart.

34. Press OK.
35. Define further finished parts pallets.
The pallets for finished parts are defined on the lower cart.
6.4
Machine control systems which still work without tabular display,

use so called U parameters in NC programs to control a lift.
U parameters are used to approach points such as the pick-up
or unloading positions of the lift. If the position of a lift does not
correspond to the standard installation, the U parameters will
have to be modified.
They each contain information about which point is concerned
and its position in the system of coordinates. They are controlled
by the dimensions which can be modified in the TruTops data
management system.
Variable
Dimension in TruTops
Description
Entry in the data

management system
A4
X dim. sheet edge machine
>Machines >Data,
SheetMaster, Data 3
X offset zero pt of suction

carriage / tool centre
>Machines >Data,
SheetMaster, Data 2
X value of sheet edge - lift

zero point.5
>Machines >Data,
SheetMaster, Data 1
X dim.sheet edge - Lift ref.

pt5
>Machines >Data,
SheetMaster, Data 1
E4
Safety offset in add. to X

offset
>Machines >Data,
SheetMaster, Data 2
Transfer position Lift in X
>Machines >Data,
SheetMaster, Data 8
L4
X dimension waiting position
>Maschines >Data,
SheetMaster, Data 3
Software limit switch Laser

X axis
>Machines >Data,
SheetMaster, Data 6
N4
Safety offset in add. to X

offset
>Machines >Data,
SheetMaster, Data 6
S778EN
2012-04-13
This dimension only affects a single U parameter and is thus very suitable to change it.
This value is an imaginary, calculated value, which can be taken from

the suction cup layout drawing.
2-51
Variable
Dimension in TruTops
Description
Entry in the data

management system
X offset punching head to

suction cup frame zero
point
Default for SheetMaster (1305/1605): X = 50 mm

(variables O and N4.
>Machines >Data,
SheetMaster, Data 6
Default for all other lifts: X = 0 mm (variables O

and N4.
The value can change due to lift or part movement.
(see "Fig. 27215", pg. 2-53)
Y offset punching head to

suction cup frame zero
point
>Machines >Data,
SheetMaster, Data 6
Results from O (including N) and the value which

results from manually moving the lift or part.
Results from N and the value which results from

manually moving the lift or part.
The pallet's X position
The pallet's absolute X position. For machines

with open control, this value is only used for the
palletizing image.
>Machines >Data,
Unloading area, "Pallets", "Position X,Y" top
(see "Fig. 27216", pg. 2-53)

T
The X position of stacked

items on the pallet
The X position of stacked items relative to the

pallet's position.
(see "Fig. 27216", pg. 2-53)
U4
X offset of stacked items to the lift: the distance

from the zero point of the suction cup frame to
the left lower corner of the stacked item when
positioning the lift. Takes account of the variables
N4 and G during grip disposal and the variable M
for lasers.
>Machines >Data,
Unloading area, "Pallets", "Position X,Y"
bottom
-
Is influenced by manual movement of the lift or

part.
(see "Fig. 27214", pg. 2-54)
Tab. 2-13
2-52
2012-04-13
S778EN
Drawings to some dimensions:
Part
Lift
Suction frame-zero point
X offset value punching head suction frame-zero point
Last stroke
Fig. 27215
Punching head
Stackable products
Pallet: position X
Pallet
Stackable products on pallet:

position X
Fig. 27216
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-53
Stackable products with circum- 3

scribing rectangle
4
Lift
Suction frame-zero point

X offset stackable products - lift
Fig. 27214
The dimensions listed above affect the U parameters in the following way.
U parameters
Item
Composition
Example
U12
X pick-up position when unloading (punching)
Q + B - C + D
X pick-up position when unloading (laser)
R - M
U13
X deposit position when unloading
S + T
C + D
U16
X pick-up position when loading
A6 + B + D
U17
X waiting position when loading (not available for all

lifts)
L6
U18
X deposit position when loading
+U6
+ B -
A6 = 800; B = 200;
D = 80
U1601080
L6 = 2760
U1702760
B + D +
E6
B6 = 200; D = 80;
E6 = 20
U1800300
Composition of the U parameters
Tab. 2-14

2. To change required dimension.
6.5
If a lift is set up with an offset in the Y direction, then it is a special installation. This Y offset must be entered into the data management system.
2-54
This dimension only affects a single U parameter and is thus very suitable to change it.
2012-04-13
S778EN
The suction frame zero point and the suction cup coordinates do
not have to be modified.
Notes
The standard dimensions and tolerances for the lift are in the
installation plan. This data has already been entered in the
data management system.
The validity of modified values is not checked.
The entry of incorrect values for Y offset!
CAUTION
Collision between punching head and approaching lift.
Recommendation: only shift the lift in the direction of the

operator.
If in doubt, contact TRUMPF software support.

3. Select SheetMaster, Data 3.
Note
The value must not be modified if the loading stack is offset
by the same value as the lift.
4. To modify "Y dim. sheet edge-machine":
Existing value
Y offset of lift
to punching
head
Y offset of the
loading stack
New value
Example 1
-20 mm
-60 mm
0 mm
-80 mm
Example 2
-20 mm
-60 mm
-60 mm
-20 mm
(default value
remains)
Tab. 2-15
5. Press Modify.
6. Select Data 6.
Note
When shifting the lift in the direction of the operator, the Y
offset has a negative sign.
7. To modify "Y offset punching head to suction cup frame zero
point":
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-55
Existing value
Y offset of lift to
punching head
New value
Example 1
20 mm
-60 mm
-40 mm
Example 2
0 mm
-60 mm
-60 mm
Tab. 2-16
Note
The values must only be modified for the SheetMaster
1305/1605 and if the lift can be moved in the Y direction.
8. To modify "min Y - shift position of lift" and "max Y - shift
position of lift":
Existing value
Y offset of lift to
punching head
New value
min: -24 mm
-60 mm
min: 36 mm
max: 380 mm
max: 440 mm
Tab. 2-17
6.6
To define and configure the

unloading area for palletizing
For every machine with automation, several dedicated unloading

area configurations for palletizing can be defined. When palletizing, you can select from the previously defined unloading area
configurations.
For machines with open control systems, the unloading area
application data on the machine must be additionally adapted to
the respectively selected unloading area configuration in TruTops.
Conditions
An automation component is allocated to the machine.

The unloading area application data for your machine will be
adjusted for the unloading area configuration selected in TruTops. This means that the zero points for the "Units" must be
matched to the machine.
Notes
2-56
When defining units and pallets, the input screens are identical for the TruTops Laser and TruTops Punch applications.
Fields where no input is possible in the currently active application are grayed out.
2012-04-13
S778EN
The palletizing graphics are only presented when the unloading area data in the loaded *.tmt file corresponds with an
unloading area configuration that has been created.
The unloading area data is saved in the *.tmt file only since
the TruTops Punch Version 3.2. The palletizing graphics can
therefore no longer be displayed with *.tmt files from older
TruTops versions.
Term
Description
Unit
Several units can be located in the unloading area of the machine (e.g. an unloading platform
for stationary pallets and a SortMaster Pallet / TRUMASORT L for moved pallets). One unit
includes a group of pallets. It can be movable or stationary. All pallets on all unloading platforms belong, for example, to one unit.
Pallet
A pallet is a location where lift stocks are deposited. A pallet can, for example, be an allocated location, a standard Euro pallet or a scrap bucket.
Lift stock
Lift stock means parts (e.g. good parts, scrap, waste grids, waste strips) which are picked up
by a lift and unloaded. Everything that the lift unloads is lift stock.
Stackable products
One stackable product comprise one or more identical lift stocks (e.g. finished parts).
Stackable product is identical when the following conditions are fulfilled:
Stack
the geometry of the lift stock is identical.
The material thickness of the lift stock is identical.
the lift stocks are all incorporated in the same manner by the lift. Example: For all finished
parts with identical geometry, the lift fixes at the same place of the finished part.
A stack corresponds to the total of all lift stocks that are stacked at one position. All the lift
stocks of a stack must concern the same stackable product. Only the same finished parts can
for example form a stack.
Tab. 2-18

2. Select >Machines >Data >Automation >Palletizing.
4.
Either
To create a new configuration, under "Configurations",
select Create.
or
To create a configuration on the basis of an existing configuration:
Under "Configurations", select Copy.
or
To modify an existing configuration:
Under "Configurations", select Modify.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-57
Note
The ID is freely selectable. The next free number will automatically be suggested.
To define the units for

configurations
5. To enter or change "Number (ID)" and "Comment".

6. Press OK.
7. Mark the configuration for which a unit is to be created.
Note
Pallets always have a clear relationship to a unit. This is
why, when a unit is deleted, all of the pallets which are
assigned to that unit will be deleted.
8.
Either
To create a new unit, under "Units", select Create.
or
To create a unit on the basis of an existing unit:
Under "Units", select Copy.
or
To modify an existing unit:
Under "Units", select Modify.

Optional
Description
Number (ID)
TC 500 R):
(e.g. TC 600 L):
Machine(Q2, Type)
2-58
2012-04-13
S778EN
Optional
Description
Remark
Position X, Y
Speed, acceleration
programmable?
No.
Weight monitoring
Maximum permitted
weight
Start position


Start position

End number


Examples:
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-59
Optional
Description
carts.
Example:
Y sorting motion

Lower cart ID
Upper cart ID

used.
same.
Tab. 2-19
2-60
2012-04-13
S778EN
Optional
Description
Number (ID)
TC 500 R):
(e.g. TC 600 L):
Machine(Q2, Type)
Remark
Position X, Y

Speed, acceleration
programmable?
No.
Weight monitoring
Maximum permitted
weight
Start position


Start position

S778EN
2012-04-13
2-61
Optional
Description
End number

Examples:
carts.
Example:
Y sorting motion

Lower cart ID
Upper cart ID

used.
same.
Tab. 2-20
2-62
2012-04-13
S778EN
Start number 1 for

Y = 60 mm
Lift stock
End number 19
Double cart
Pallet for Y = 0 mm
Positions of double cart, pallet and lift items
To define the pallets for a

unit
Fig. 20232
11. To define other units for a configuration

12. Mark the unit for which a unit is to be created.
13.
Either
To create a new pallet, under "Pallets", select Create.
or
To create a pallet on the basis of an existing pallet:
Under "Pallets", select Copy.
or
To modify an existing pallet:
Under "Pallets", select Modify.

Optional
Pallet number (ID)
Note
S778EN
Description

2012-04-13
2-63
Optional
Description
Stackable products
pallet.
Position X, Y

Notes on the input:



Size X,Y
Pallet edge X,Y

Container

Under table
time.
Fixed position
to No.
(see "Fig. 34928", pg. 2-30)

Position X,Y

deposited.
SheetMaster:
the fixed position.
Coordinates: +X +Y.
TRUMALIFT SC, SE:
the fixed position.
Coordinates: +X +Y.
(see "Fig. 34928", pg. 2-30)
2-64
2012-04-13
S778EN
Optional
Description
Standard: 200 mm.
Cart number
Tab. 2-21

Optional
Pallet number (ID)
Description

Note
Stackable products
pallet.
Position X, Y

Notes on the input:



Size X,Y
Pallet edge X,Y

Container

Under table
time.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-65
Optional
Description
Fixed position
to No.
(see "Fig. 34928", pg. 2-30)

Position X,Y

deposited.
SheetMaster:
the fixed position.
Coordinates: +X +Y.
TRUMALIFT SC, SE:
the fixed position.
Coordinates: +X +Y.
(see "Fig. 34928", pg. 2-30)

Standard: 200 mm.
Cart number
Tab. 2-22
2-66
2012-04-13
S778EN
Pallet left-hand lift
Pallet right-hand lift
Punching head center

Fig. 34927
Pallet
Lift stock
Rectangle encapsulating the

lift stock
Fixed position X,Y (SheetMaster)
Fixed position X,Y (TRUMALIFT SC, SE)

Fig. 34928
16. To define further pallets for a unit.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-67
7.
GripMaster/Grip
The GripMaster/Grip helps in the removal of the remainder

sheets and sheet skeletons.
Trutops automatically offers the possible SheetMaster/TRUMALIFT and GripMaster/Grip variants. The purchase order or training documentation shows which automation components have to
be configured. For components which have already been installed, the name is noted on the nameplate.
7.1
Condition
GripMaster/Grip is allocated to the machine as the unloading

unit (see "Adjusting the automation components", pg. 2-34).
Note
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select >Machines >Data.
GripMaster, select "Data 1".
Modifying data:
Optional
Description
Position (operator
view)
The location of the GripMaster/Grip as seen by the operator.
Drawing name
Name of the drawing file, stored under 'C:\TRUMPF.NET\data\ToPsDrawings'. If you

have used your own drawing file then this must be stored there and its name must be
entered here.

DY
Traverse path in Y direction, in order to move the remainder sheet or the sheet skeleton
from the clamp area.
Traveling speed7
Speed in m/min.
Traversing acceleration7
Entry of acceleration in m/s2.
X transfer position
The X position at which the GripMaster/Grip should remove the remainder sheet.
If the GripMaster/Grip is to the right of the machine, all X positions are negative. If it is
to the left, then all X positions are positive.
Standard Y pos. transverse rail
Y position of the linear magazine during removal
2-68
GripMaster/Grip
Is not supported in this version of TruTops.
2012-04-13
S778EN
Optional
Description
X gripper position
X and Y positions of the two grippers.
Y gripper position
Tab. 2-23
5. Press Modify.
6. Select "Data 2" and change the data.
7. Press Modify.
S778EN
2012-04-13
GripMaster/Grip
2-69
8.
SortMaster
The SortMaster Box is a sorting unit with containers for the

accommodation of small workpieces.
TruTops automatically offers the possible SortMaster variants.
The purchase order or training documentation shows which small
parts sorting has to be configured. For components which have
already been installed, the name is noted on the nameplate.
2-70
SortMaster
2012-04-13
S778EN
9.
Material data
With the exception of sheet margins, the material data is

machine-independent. Additions or changes will not be overwritten when TruTops is updated.
If a new material is created, all of the values which are important
for its processing in TruTops must also be created. This is why
every material is assigned an alias, whose values should be
used instead.
TruTops uses the following layers of material data:
Term
Important properties
Description
Group
e.g. aluminum,
steel, stainless
steel,...
Materials are assigned to various

materials groups.
Material
e.g.:
The material is the basis for the

unprocessed material.
Tensile
strength
E-modulus
Unprocessed
material
Blank
If no bend allowances have been

entered for the associated unprocessed material, then the bend
Admitted proallowances from the bend allowcessing
ance alias will be used.
Material
Material
thickness
Foil
Tempering
X dimension
Y dimension
Unprocessed material is a material

of a defined thickness.
A blank is some unprocessed

material with defined dimensions
(= sheet).
By specifying a stock ID, the stock
management system can clearly
determine the storage position of
the blank and make it available for
machining. The stock ID is output
in the NC program and in other
TRUMPF-specific file formats (for
example *.taf, *.pdf, *.gmt, *.tmt...).
Material data levels
Tab. 2-24
All levels of the material data have a clear relationship to one

another.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Material data
2-71
Material data levels
Unprocessed material ID
Fig. 60476en
The standard raw material IDs are composed of the standard

raw material designation and the material thickness in 1/10 mm
(example: 1.4301-20).
An 11-character raw material ID is automatically created for new
raw materials.
Position
Variable
1-4
Explanation
Abbreviation if the material group.
5-8
Material thickness, 4-digits in 1/100 mm.
Foil type
-
none
One-sided, ready-to-laser
Two-sided, ready-to-laser
One-sided, Point
Two-sided, Point
One-sided, vaporize
K
10
Two-sided, Vaporize
Surface coating
none
Electrolytically galvanized
Hot-dip galvanized
Zinc-plated
Primed
Oxidized
11
High surface quality required?

-
Standard stripper level
Stripper level +1 mm (only TruTops Punch)
Meaning of the raw material ID
2-72
Material data
Tab. 2-25
2012-04-13
S778EN
Example: SS010125f-K
SS01: Stainless Steel 01 material group (1.4571).
0125: material thickness 1.25 mm.
f: foil type, one-sided, ready-to-laser.
-: no surface coating.
K: high surface quality is required (stripper level +1 mm).
Stock ID
The standard stock IDs correspond to the standard raw material

IDs with a sheet size of 2000 x 1000 mm.
A 21-character stock ID is automatically created for new raw
blanks.
Position
Explanation
1-11
Corresponds to the raw material ID.
12
Dummy.
13-21
Sheet size (X dimension x Y dimension) in mm.
Meaning of the stock ID
Tab. 2-26
Example: SS010125f-K-2500x1250
SS010125f-K: corresponds to the raw material ID.

2500x1250: sheet size with 2500 mm in X direction and
1250 mm in Y direction.
9.1

2. Select material.
The "Manage unprocessed material" screen will be displayed.
The submenus contain all groups, materials, unprocessed
materials and blanks which are already in the database.
Note
Materials differ through various physical properties such as
tensile strength or density. For the materials stored in TruTops, data is also stored on tapping, bending and laser cutting, which are not available for materials created by the customer. It thus only makes sense to create a new material if
its physical properties are fundamentally different from those
of existing materials.
3.
Either
Selecting Group.
or
Select Material.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Material data
2-73
or
Select Unprocessed material.
or
Select Blank.
4. To use a record as a template, mark the record.
The data is entered in the mask head.
The areas highlighted in red have to be given unique names.
Mask
Optional
Description
Group
Group name
Note: Existing materials which have not already been assigned

to one of the defined material groups are collected in the
Unknown group. These have to be manually assigned to the
defined groups.
Kilo price
Material price per kilo.

Note: If no TruTops Fab has been installed, the price specified
here by TruTops Calculate will be used.
Material
Currency
Note: The currency abbreviations are checked to determine

whether they can be used by TruTops Calculate. Correct
abbreviations include, for example: EUR, USD, CHF, GBP.
Relative magnetic holding

force (% magnetism (Fe))
Note: This must only be specified if a lift is used with magnetic suction cups.
If the material has the same magnetic holding force as iron,

enter 100%.
If the material is not magnetic, enter 0%.
Admitted processing
Defines the default setting for the permissible machining processes for blanks, which can be produced with this material.
LTT alias
When creating a material, an alias can be specified. If individual data items for the material have not been created (LTT,
thread, bend allowance), the values from the alias material will
be used.
Thread alias
Bend allowance alias
All alias information is independent of the sheet thickness.
2-74
Material data
2012-04-13
S778EN
Mask
Optional
Unprocessed
material
Light reflection
Description
Controls the lighting setting for optical systems.
Allowed Z tolerance
Dark matt: raw materials with oxidized or primed surface.
Matt: raw materials from the Steel group.
Glossy: raw materials from the groups StainlessSteel, Aluminium, Titan, Copper and Brass.
Reflective: raw materials with chromed surfaces.
Unknown: raw materials with foil and unknown raw materials.
Specifies the tolerance of the material thickness for a sheet

thickness gauge.
Note: Values must be entered without a sign.
Note
Note: The material thickness (Z dimension) does not have to

be added to the comment. It will be displayed in the list of
unprocessed materials.
Unprocessed material ID
Note: No special characters may be used.
High surface quality

required
Activate the option if by default low-scratch processing is to be

activated in TruTops Punch .
Via the following variables in the machine rules, other settings
for the surface finish can be modified:
Surcharge
HQSurfaceModal
HQSurfaceJobAndTaf
ScratchFreeDieLevelHQ
ScratchFreeDieLevelNormal
Surcharge for, e.g., foil or coating. The additional charge is

added to the kilo price of the corresponding material group.
Note: For the sheet selection, the complete sheet price will be
shown.
BNC name
Only for TruTops Bend.
Surface coating
Define surface finish for the selection of the suitable technology tables.
Foil type
It will be checked whether the parameters for the laser

machining have been suitably configured.
Will be output in the setup plan.
Keep Visible
Show or hide those raw materials that are not used or are
only rarely used in the selection in the technology part.
Note: Hidden entries can be made visible in the selection with
the "All" option.
Blank
Keep Visible
Show or hide those blanks that are not used or are only rarely
used in the selection in the technology part.
Note: Hidden entries can be made visible in the selection with
the "All" option.
Tab. 2-27
6. Select Create.
The material is added in the selection field.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Material data
2-75
9.2
To define the margins of a sheet of

unprocessed material
Depending on the type of machine, during machining, the metal

sheets are exposed to differing acceleration. The various types
of machine are thus divided into several categories of acceleration. Depending on the category, other default sheet margins can
be configured.
The settings can always only be modified for the currently selected machine and its acceleration category.
The values specified here will be suggested by default for new
material in TruTops Punch and Nest when creating multi-copy
machining.
2. Material, select Unprocessed material.
3. Mark an unprocessed material.
4. Select Sheet margins.
The "Default sheet margins" screen will be displayed.
5. Modify data.
or
Select Suggestion, to enter the default values specified by
TRUMPF.
6. Press Modify.
9.3

2. Select material.
The "Manage unprocessed material" screen will be displayed.
It contains all of the materials in the database.
3. Material, select Unprocessed material or Blank.
4. Select the data record.
5. Modify data.
6. Press Modify.
2-76
Material data
2012-04-13
S778EN
9.4
Note
TRUMPF materials cannot be deleted.
This is because, faulty assignments will result between

materials and technology tables in TruTops if original
material data from TRUMPF is deleted!
NOTICE
Do not delete original material files from TRUMPF.

2. Select material.
The "Manage unprocessed materials" screen will be displayed. It contains all of the materials in the database.
3. Material, select Unprocessed material or Blank.
4. Select the data record.
5. Select Delete.
6. Confirm message with Yes.
The material, the unprocessed material or the blank will be
deleted in the selection field and in the database.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Material data
2-77
10.
Technology tables
Notes
What is the purpose of the

technology tables?
The original TRUMPF technology tables are automatically

overwritten during each TruTops update. Copies are retained.
Original TRUMPF technology tables cannot be modified, they
can only be copied and saved under a different name (see
"Copy technology table", pg. 2-84).
So that an NC program can run on a machine, the technology

data (e.g. piercing time, gating frequency, kerf width ...) for laser
cutting must be available.
The technology data depends on the machine, the material and
the material thickness. These are all to be found in technology
tables.
The technology data appears in the NC program only if the technology table is sent to the machine control system together with
the NC program. If the NC program is sent without the technology table, the NC program will only contain the names of the
technology tables.
Machines of the same types and of the same groups employ the
same technology tables.
The technology data has been determined and released by
TRUMPF process development for the corresponding machines.
How does the machine

control system access the
technology data?
The original TRUMPF technology tables have already been

stored in the machine control system. The control system reads
the technology data from the technology tables.
Technology tables that you have created must be transferred to
the control system together with the NC program.
To send an NC program to the machine: (See chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program") Not possible for:
TC 240 L, TC 260 L.
Creating your own

technology tables
Note
Always create technology tables on the basis of an existing technology table.
If creating your own technology tables, each technology table
must also be assigned to one or more sets of rules: (see "Allocating rules", pg. 2-93).
One or more rules have already been allocated to the original
TRUMPF technology tables.
Information about the rules
2-78
Technology tables
(see "Laser rules", pg. 2-94)
2012-04-13
S778EN
Data collection
Further information on the technology tables can be found in the

machine's current data collection. The technology tables are
stored there under the same numbers as in the TruTops database.
The data collection is updated at regular intervals. It contains an
overview of the table names in which data has been changed
and notes about the changes. This means that changes in the
technology data can also be transferred to TruTops.
10.1 Naming technology tables

Depending on the machine type and on the control system being
used, the technology tables are structured differently:
Laser-independent technology tables: 18-character with information about materials, processing types, etc.
Laser-dependent laser technology tables: 7-character with
consecutive number.
TRUMPF laser-independent standard tables

Setup
The names of the technology tables consist of 18 characters,

each of which has a specific meaning.
In order to make them more legible, the characters are split into
several blocks which are separated from each other with a
hyphen.
Every block contains certain information:
S778EN
2012-04-13
Block
Block
Block
Block
1:
2:
3:
4:
Information
Information
Information
Information
on
on
on
on
the material
machining
the cutting head
the technology
2-79
The following table shows the structure of the table names and
the meaning of the individual characters:
Block 1:
Information
on the material
Character
Description
Possible values
Explanation
1-2
Type of material
AL
Aluminum
ST
Mild Steel
SS
Stainless Steel
SC
Foil-coated stainless steel

(Stainless steel Coated)
ES
Electrogalvanized mild Steel)
HS
Mild steel, hot-dip galvanized

(Hot-dip galvanized Steel)
3-5
CO
Copper
BR
Brass
Metric: specification in 0.1 mm
010
1 mm
Inch: specification in 0.01 inch
004
Material thickness
0.04 In
6
7
Block 2:
Information
on machining
Material standard
Identification
Metric
Inch
DIN-EN
AISI
JIS
TRUMPF standard table
1-4
TRUMPF additional table
5-9
Customer copy of table
Separation marker
10-11
Gas type
N2
Nitrogen
O2
Oxygen
Ai
Compressed air (Air)
Ar
Argon
Standard
High speed
NitroLine Plasma
12
13
14
2-80
Unit of measurement
Primary machining type
Secondary machining type
Separation marker
High Quality cutting
No secondary machining type
FlyLine
CoolLine
2012-04-13
S778EN
Block 3:
Information
on the cutting head
Block 4:
Information
on the technology
15-16
Focal length
10
Shortest focal length of the

machine group
20
Medium focal length of the

machine group
30
Longest focal length of the

machine group ( = standard
focal length)
17
Separation marker
18
Technology
2D machining
3D machining
Tube processing
Tab. 2-28
Examples:
Modifications
ST 010 M D 0 - O2 S 0 - 30 - 2
ST mild steel, 010 1 mm, M metric, D DIN-EN, 0
O2 oxygen, S standard machining, 0 no secondary
machining type
O2 oxygen, S standard machining, 0 no secondary
machining type
30 standard focal length
2 2D machining
SS 200 M D 0 - N2 P 0 - 30 2
SS stainless steel, 200 20 mm, M metric, D DIN-EN, 0
N2 nitrogen, P NitroLine (plasma). 0 no secondary processing type
30 standard focal length
2 2D machining
Note
The original TRUMPF technology tables are automatically overwritten during each TruTops update. Copies are retained.
If TRUMPF technology tables are to be changed: Copy and save
under a new name (see "Copy technology table", pg. 2-84).

The names of alphanumeric technology tables (only for open
control systems) have seven characters and are consecutive.
The names of the numeric technology tables have four digits and
are consecutive.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-81
Setup
alphanumeric
numeric
T2D-5100
3527
T2D-5101
3528
T2D-5102
3529
...
...
Tab. 2-29
An overview of the naming

conventions
Type
Designation
Description
alphanumeric
T ...
Names for original

TRUMPF tables.
K ...
Recommendation for own

tables.
1000 to 4999
Names of original
TRUMPF technology
tables.
5000 to 9999
Freely available.
numeric
Tab. 2-30
Modifications
Note
10.2 To filter technology tables

Opening Management

2. Select Laser.
The selection of all technology tables for the active machine
group is displayed.
Entering filter criteria
3. Enter filter criteria.

Tip
If filter fields are highlighted in red, there are no technology
tables with the specified criteria. In this case, the specification is ignored.
The number of technology tables displayed will be restricted.
2-82
2012-04-13
S778EN
10.3 To change the header data for a

technology table
The following data is included in the header data:
Name of the technology table

Comment text.
Machine group to which the technology table belongs.
Laser power.
Focal length lens.
Sheet thickness.
Material type.
Note
2. Select Laser.
group is displayed.
3. Filter the technology tables.
4. Mark the technology table.
5. Press OK.
The data is displayed in the mask header.
6. Press Modify.
The "Modify Laser Table" mask is displayed. The mask is filled with header data of the technology table.
7. Modify data.
8. Press Modify.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-83
10.4 Copy technology table

When giving your own tables names, observe the following specifications:
Maximum number of characters: 24

Permitted characters:
Capital letters (A-Z)
Digits (0-9)
Hyphen after the first position in the table name.
Illegal characters:
Symbols and accented letters (,,@,$,%,& etc.)
Underscore ("_")
Lower-case letters
Hyphen in the first position in the table name.
When copying from TRUMPF standard tables, the following

instructions have to be observed:
The 8th character (identifier) of the new table must be set at

a value between 5 and 9.
If the copied table is to be used for another material, the first
two characters have to be adapted to the new material.
For the TruMatic 3000 (K04), the copied table may not be
used for another material since otherwise the material identification will fail.
Note
Always create technology tables on the basis of an existing
technology table.

2. Select Laser.
group is displayed.
Tip
Search for technology tables whose data is similar to the
new technology table.
5. Press OK.
6. Select Copy.
The "Copy Laser Table" mask is displayed. The name of the
technology table will be extended by a leading "K".
2-84
2012-04-13
S778EN
Note
For numeric technology tables, the table name must be a
number above 5000.
7. Modify the name and the header data of the technology
table.
Tip
Recommendation for alphanumeric technology tables: leave
the "K" at the start of the table name.
8. Select Copy.
A copy of the technology table will be made.
10.5 To delete a technology table

2. Select Laser.
group is displayed.
5. Press OK.
6. Press Delete.
The "Delete Laser Table" mask is displayed. The mask is filled with header data of the technology table.
7. Press Delete.
The technology table will be deleted from the database.
10.6 To display and print a technology

table
To output a technology table

2. Select Laser.
group is displayed.
5. Press OK.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-85
6. Select Output.
The "Print/File output" mask is displayed. Under "Table number" the selected table will be displayed.
To display a technology
table
7. Select Display.
The contents of the technology table will be displayed.
8. Close the window again, via the
Printing technology tables
button.
Note
The technology table will be printed on the default printer
with no further interaction.
9. Select Printer.
The technology table will be printed. The layout will correspond to the display shown in the window.
10.7 Technology table parameters

Modify parameter
2. Select Laser.
group is displayed.
5. Select Continue.
An overview of the technology table parameters will be displayed.
6. Select the required menu and submenu.
7. Modify parameters (see "Description of the parameters", pg.
2-87).
8. Press Modify.
2-86
2012-04-13
S778EN

Menu
Submenu
Parameters
Description
General
Rules
Trumpf
Original TRUMPF rules which are allocated to the technology table.
Customer
Self-generated rules which have been

assigned to the technology table in the
"TRUMPF" column.
Editor
The creator of the technology table
Info
Cutting head
Accelerations
Times
Laser
Basic LTT
Underlying technology table.
Date of creation
Date of modification
Material standard
e.g. DIN-EN (Europe).
Machining
e.g. Oxygas cutting.
Machining option
e.g. Flyline possible.
Surface coating
e.g.galvanized.
Type of foil
e.g. Foil on one side.
Remark
Nozzle type
Cutting head number/

FocusLine characteristic
curve
Cutting head - type
Cutting acceleration
Divided up into "reduced", "normal" and

"high".
Acceleration 2. Y axis
Acceleration 2. X axis
Acceleration marking,
punch marking and vaporizing
Gas flushing cutting/piercing
Time for gas flushing between cutting and

piercing.
Gas flushing piercing/cutting
Time for gas flushing between piercing

and cutting.
Corner cooling
Corner cooling time.
Piercing
Beam diameter during piercing.
PierceLine piercing
Beam diameter when piercing with PierceLine.
Cutting small contour
Beam diameter when cutting a small,

medium or large contour.
Cutting medium contour

Cutting large contour
Marking
S778EN
2012-04-13
Beam diameter when marking.
Punch marking
Beam diameter when punch marking.
Evaporating
Beam diameter when vaporizing.
Spot welding
Beam diameter when spot welding.
2-87
Menu
Submenu
Parameters
Description
Cutting (Only for

machines with Siemens control.)
General
Speed
Speed during cutting.
Speed from punched hole
Gas type
Gas type for cutting.
Offset
Contour
LSS
In each case there is a distinction between small, medium and large

contours as well as between normal and reduced cutting.
Kerf.
Set dimension
Power
Laser power.
Gating frequency
Gating frequency of the laser beam.
Speed
Cutting speed.
Nozzle distance
Cutting head nozzle distance.
Gas pressure
The parameters in this screen may not be changed.

Upper limit speed
Power for upper limit

speed
Power up to upper limit speed.
Lower limit speed
Power for lower limit

speed.
Power up to lower limit speed.
Frequency for upper limit

speed
Frequency for upper limit speed.
Frequency for lower limit

speed
Frequency for lower limit speed.
Analog value control
Analog value control must be set to 1 for

the following machines:
TruLaser 2525/TCL 2530: For software

update V7.00 or higher.
TC L 3020 for software update V6.01

or higher.

or higher.

or higher.

or higher.
TruLaser series 3000.
Sensor systems
There is a distinction between normal and reduced cutting.

Threshold value 1
Threshold value 2
active
2-88
Threshold values 1 and 2 of the plasma

sensor system.
Plasma sensor system active/inactive.
2012-04-13
S778EN
Menu
Submenu
Parameters
Cutting (Only for

machines with
Bosch control.)

contours as well as between normal and reduced cutting.
Piercing (Only for

without PierceLine
with PierceLine
Description
Power
Gating frequency
Feedrate
Kerf
Delay time
Cutting gas pressure
Gas change time
Set dimension
Cutting distance
Acceleration
Cutting gas
There is a distinction between normal and reduced piercing.

SprintLine time
Set dimension
Setting dimension of the cutting head.
Ramp cycle time(Q2, Piercing time)
Ramp cycle number
Nozzle distance
Blow-out time
Gas pressure
Oil spraying
Sensor type
Gas type

S778EN
2012-04-13
Set dimension
Setting dimension of the cutting head.
Lateral air blast
Maximum piercing time
Expected piercing time
Ramp cycle number
Nozzle distance
Blow-out time
Gas pressure
Oil spraying
Sensor type
Gas type
2-89
Menu
Submenu
Piercing ()
Parameters
Description

Ramp cycle number
Blow-out time
Piercing gas pressure
Set dimension
Approach (Only for

machines with
Bosch control.)
Evaporating
normal/reduced approach II
Relative piercing distance for normal/

reduced approach II.
Reduced approaching
Relative piercing distance for reduced

approach.
Gas type

contours as well as between normal and reduced approaches.
Reduced approaching
Reduced gas pressure
Reduced laser power
Reduced pulse frequency
Gas for appr.
Set dimension
Only for machines with Siemens control.
Vaporizing time
Power
Gating frequency
Speed
Nozzle distance
Gas pressure
Gas type
Kerf
Only for machines with Bosch control.
Delay time
Gas change time
Pulse power and pause
power
Only for machines with a YAG laser.
Time pulse and time pause
2-90
2012-04-13
S778EN
Menu
Submenu
Marking
Parameters
Description
Set dimension
Power/
Laser power [Watt]

Gating frequency
Speed/
Feedrate
Kerf
Delay time
Gas pressure/
Cutting gas pressure

Gas change time
Nozzle height marking
Nozzle distance
Gas type
Power pulse and power

pause

Punch marking
Set dimension
Power/
Laser power [Watt]

Gating frequency
Speed/
Feedrate
Kerf
Delay time
Nozzle distance
Gas pressure
Gas change time
Ramp cycle number
Piercing height.
Blow-out time
Gas type

pause
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-91
Menu
Submenu
Parameters
Description
Other (Only for

MicroWeld

Is not evaluated by TruTops Tube.
YAG ...
Set dimension
Time
Time for positioning welding point.
Ramp cycle number
Nozzle distance
Gas pressure
Gas type

pause

MicroWeld (Only for
machines with
Bosch control.)

Time
Time for positioning welding point.
Ramp cycle number
Nozzle distance
Gas pressure
Gas type

pause

Rules (Only for
machines with
Bosch control.)
Cutting head number
Focal position
ID no. Nozzle
Diameter of the nozzle
ID no. Lens
Date of creation
Technology table creation date.
Editor
Technology table programmer
PlasmaLine
Plasma sensing.
Threshold value 1
Threshold values of the plasma sensor

system.
Threshold value 2
Gas flushing
Gas flushing when changing from cutting to piercing.
Gas flushing when changing from

piercing to cutting.
Remark
Trumpf
TRUMPF or customer rules which are

allocated to the technology table.
Customer
Basic LTT
Underlying technology table.
Description of the technology table parameters
2-92
Tab. 2-31
2012-04-13
S778EN
Allocating rules
Notes
Search for rules via

technology table
The original TRUMPF technology tables are automatically

overwritten during each TruTops update. Copies are retained.
If TRUMPF technology tables are to be changed: Copy and
save under a new name (see "Copy technology table", pg.
2-84).

2. Select Rules>Laser.
group is displayed.
5. Press OK.
The rules which are allocated to the selected technology
table are displayed.
Allocating rules
6. Select Add.
The "Assign rules" screen will be displayed.
7.
Either
Under "Rules" enter the name of the rules.
Press OK.
or
Next to "Rules" click on .
The "Select Process Rule" mask is displayed.
Mark the rules which are to be assigned to the technology table.
The specified rules will be assigned to the technology table.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-93
11.
Laser rules
11.1 Name of the rules

Names for rules can consist of differing characters: letters or
numbers or a combination of both. The maximum length of a
name is 14 characters.
TRUMPF process rules
"Old" laser rules:
"New" laser rules:
50001
T2D-3832-5
50002
...
50003
T2D-4304-6
...
...
50101
T2D-4307-4
...
...
Tab. 2-32
The names of TRUMPF rules are extended by a code number.

This code number shows the conditions for the rules:
An overview of the naming

conventions
1: Corners are rounded; without SprintLine.

2: Looping (corners become sharp).
3: Corners are ground (not rounding or looping).
4: Vaporizing, corners are rounded.
5: Corners are rounded, SprintLine.
6: Corners are rounded; ContourLine.
PierceLine-specific rules have an additional "P" at the end as
identification. Example: TRO-5388-5P.
Designation
Description
T ...
Name for original TRUMPF rules.
K ...
Recommendation for your own rules.

Tab. 2-33
Sequence and name
Standard rules are at the top during selection. The old naming
with numbers from 1-10 is no longer used.
For machines with PierceLine, PierceLine default process rules
are always at the top of the table list.
Default process rules possess up-to-date functions such as
SprintLine, ContourL, etc.
Standard
PierceLine: Standard
Evaporating (scale) contour
PierceLine: PCS: Evaporating (scale) contour
Vaporize (foil) point
PierceLine: Vaporize (foil) point
(for foil tables T2D-*FO*)
(for foil tables T2D-*FO*)
NitroLine (plasma), standard
PierceLine: NitroLine (plasma), standard
2-94
Laser rules
2012-04-13
S778EN
Standard
PierceLine: Standard
NitroLine (plasma), vaporize (foil) contour
PierceLine: NitroLine (plasma), vaporize (foil) contour
FlyLine, standard
PierceLine: FlyLine, standard
(As of control version 4.70)
(As of control version 4.70)
Without approaching (NC post-processing program)
PierceLine: No approach (NC postprocessing program)
HIGH-QUALITY, default
PierceLine: HIGH-QUALITY, Standard
HIGH-QUALITY, evaporating (foil) contour
PierceLine: HIGH-QUALITY, evaporating (foil) contour

Tab. 2-34
Modifications
Note
Original TRUMPF rules will automatically be overwritten during
every TruTops update. Copies will be retained.
If TRUMPF rules are to be changed, copy them and save under
a new name (see "Copy rules", pg. 2-96).
11.2 Search for rules via technology table

Searching technology table

Note
Before rules can be displayed, a technology table must be
selected to which the rules are allocated (see "Allocating
rules", pg. 2-93).
2. Select Rules>Data.
Select Rules>Laser.
group is displayed.
3. Enter filter criteria.
Tip
If filter fields are highlighted in red, there are no technology
tables with the specified criteria. In this case, the specification is ignored.
Display associated rules

5. Press OK.
The rules which are allocated to the selected technology
table are displayed.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Name of the rules
2-95
11.3 Copy rules

Notes
CAUTION
Original TRUMPF rules cannot be modified, they can only be

copied and saved under a different name (see "Copy rules",
pg. 2-96).
Your own sets of rules must be assigned to at least one
technology table: (see "Allocating rules", pg. 2-93).
Original TRUMPF rules will automatically be overwritten during every TruTops update. Copies will be retained.
NC programs created with PierceLine-specific data should

not be run on machines without PierceLine!
Risk of damage to machine.

technology table
PierceLine-specific rules must only be assigned to PierceLine technology tables.

Note
rules", pg. 2-93).
Select Rules>Laser.
group is displayed.
Copy rules
3. Search for rules via a technology table (see "Search for rules
via technology table", pg. 2-95).
4. Mark the rules.
5. Select Copy.
The "Copy rules" mask is displayed.
The screen will contain the header data of the rules to be
copied. The source contains the original names of the copied
rules. The name of the copied rules with a "K" in front will be
suggested as the name for the copy.
6. To modify the name and data of the set of rules.
Tip
The suggested "K" in the name for the rules helps to tell the
difference between copied rules and original TRUMPF rules
and should thus not be changed.
2-96
Name of the rules
2012-04-13
S778EN
7. Select Copy.
8. Confirm query with Yes.
11.4 Delete Rules

Note
TRUMPF rules cannot be deleted.
technology table

Note
rules", pg. 2-93).
Select Rules>Laser.
group is displayed.
Delete Rules
4. Mark the rules.
Note
Rules can only be deleted if they are no longer assigned to
any technology table.
5. Select Remove.
The assignment of the rules to the technology table will be
removed.
6. Select Check.
The "Unused rules" screen will be displayed. All rules which
are no longer assigned to a technology table will be displayed.
7. Click on rules to be deleted with the right mouse button.
The rules will be deleted from the database. The rules which
are allocated to the selected technology table are displayed.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Name of the rules
2-97
11.5 Display and print rules

technology table

Note
rules", pg. 2-93).
Select Rules>Laser.
group is displayed.
Show rules
4. Mark the rules.
5. Select Output.
The "Print/File output" mask is displayed.
6. Select Display under "Output form".
The contents of the rule are displayed.
7. Close the window again, via the
To print rules
button.
8. Select Printer under "Output form".

The rules will be printed, as shown on the screen, to the
standard printer.
11.6 Parameters for the rules

Modify parameter
technology table

Note
rules", pg. 2-93).
Select Rules>Laser.
group is displayed.
2-98
2012-04-13
S778EN
Note
rules", pg. 2-93).
Modify parameter
4. Mark the rules.
5. Select Continue.
An overview of the parameters of the rules will be displayed.
6. Select the button for the required category of parameters.
7. Modify parameters (see "Description of the parameters", pg.
2-99).
8. Press Modify.

Button
Parameters
Description
General 1
Info
"Info" is pre-allocated for TRUMPF rules.
Remark
When selecting the rule, the texts entered will be displayed, during
the production of the processing.
Open contour
The specifications under "Cut" and "Pierce" will be used when

machining open contours.
Contour surface
Definition of the minimum and maximum size of small, medium

and large contours.
Basic process rule
In rules copied from earlier TruTops versions, the basic process

rule can be added later. Advantage: During TruTops updates, the
parameters that have been added to the original rules are automatically added to the copies.
Part positioning
If the overshoot height of the cutting head is to be defined during

positioning: Set buttons to Yes.
Corner prior.
Preferred corner treatment.
Corner cooling time
Cutting gas
PierceLine required
1: Oxygen.
2: Nitrogen.
3 and 4: Compressed air.

Cutting with SprintLine
Fast positioning of the laser head when cutting with the distance
control system switched off. The laser is not switched off, but its
power is reduced.
Marking with SprintLine

Acceleration programming
Is no longer used. The value for the reduced acceleration is read

from the technology table.
Description of the parameters for the rules
S778EN
2012-04-13
Tab. 2-35
2-99
Button
Parameters
Description
General 2
Cutting: text contour

size
Texts are not cut during automatic processing except when the
"Cutting" laser mode has been selected and a processing with the
"Element" geometry reference has been set.
Marking: text contour size
Texts with the "Marking" characteristic, or with the text color

"Yellow" are marked during automatic processing if automatic
processing is started in the "Marking" laser mode.
Texts in arbitrary colors can be marked by selecting the "Marking" laser mode and by setting a processing with the "Element"
geometry reference.
Marking: contour
size
Marking: vaporizing:
type
The type of vaporization before the marking.
Dot marking: point

contour size
Points colored "Cyan" will automatically be punch marked, provided the automatic machining is started in laser mode "punch
marking".
Points in arbitrary colors can be point marked by selecting the

"Point marking" laser mode and by setting a processing with the
"Element" geometry reference.
Only for machines with Bosch control. If dot shaped punch marking
is to be programmed, the parameters "piercing distance", "piercing
gas pressure" and "gas type" must be changed in the technology
table (see data collection).
Dot marking: symbol
The type of punch marking of symbols. If 2 circles are to be punch

marked, their diameters must be specified.
Punch marking: type

of vaporization
The type of vaporization before the punch marking.
Tab. 2-36
Button
Parameters
Description
General 3
TwinLine
TwinLine: Length for

reduced approaching
Length for reduced approaching in the case of blanks and sheet

parting cuts (for an overview of the piercing and approaching
depending on the material, see current data collection).
Pre-cut part: length

for reduced
approach
Parting cut for
sheet: length for
reduced approach
Precut path
Speed
MicroWeld
Use as suggestion
2-100
Tab. 2-37
2012-04-13
S778EN
Button
Parameters
Description
Piercing
Contour type
Information, on the type of contour for which the other parameters

will be shown in the screen.
Piercing
In ramp mode the beam should pierce with reduced power: set
the button to reduced.
In ramp mode the beam should pierce with full laser power: set
the button to full.
Piercing type
Measuring cycle
Only for machines with Bosch control. The material thickness is

determined via a measurement cycle.
Radius ofspatter circle
Safety area in which no contour may lie, as plasma deposits can

occur during piercing. This safety area will be considered in the
collision check.
Tab. 2-38
Button
Parameters
Description
Approach
Approach
Cutting with full or reduced cutting data at beam start.
Type
Prec.stop

-
Distance control
system
Cutting with active height regulation at beam start. The cutting

head follows the sheet (Z axes motion) in a sensor-guided manner
at a constant cutting distance.
Cutting without active height regulation at beam start. The cutting
head moves over the sheet with a constant Z-position.
Path slope

-
Feed forward

-
Reduction
Only relevant with Reduced approach mode.
Precut

-
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-101
Button
Parameters
Description
Appr.angle
Angle to be used to approach inside and outside contours. By

default, all TRUMPF rules are delivered with an approach angle of
0. That means that the approach is central to a line, central to an
arc or a circle, and the approach path is vertical to the contour.
If approach is made to a corner, then the approach proceeds tangentially, i.e. directly in the cutting direction at the corner.
A negative angle entry generates an "acute" entry angle (large
change of direction at the entry point), a positive entry causes an
"obtuse" entry angle (less change of direction at the entry point).
Examples:
Strategy
0: an approach path with an angle 1 of 90 (90 - 0) relative

to the cutting direction of the contour will be produced.
-20: an approach path with an angle 2 of 70 (90 - 20) relative to the cutting direction of the contour will be produced.
+20: an approach path with an angle 3 of 110 (90 + 20)

relative to the cutting direction of the contour will be produced.
If the approach should only be to a contour corner, select

on corner.
If there is no corner, the contour will not be machined.
If the approach is only to be central to one element of the contour, a line or an arc, select to element.
If the approach should preferably be to a contour corner, select

corner/element.
If there is no element, the contour will not be machined.
If there is no suitable corner available, an attempt will be made

to approach an element.
If the approach is preferably to be central to one element of the

contour, a line or an arc, select element/corner.
If there is no suitable corner available, an attempt will be made
to approach an element.
To change other parameters on approaching elements or corners:

Select Continue.
Distance
Length of the approach path.
Radius
If, via the Next button, under the "Shape"parameter, line/curve was
selected: the radius of the arc.
Tab. 2-39
Button
Parameters
Description
Cutting
Cutting, type of cut
Cutting with full or reduced cutting data.
Prec.stop

-
2-102
2012-04-13
S778EN
Button
Parameters
Description
Distance control
system
If cutting is to use active distance control: Set buttons to Yes.

The cutting head follows the sheet (Z axes motion) in a sensorguided manner at a constant cutting distance.
If cutting is not to use active distance control: Set buttons to

No.
The cutting head moves over the sheet with a constant Z-position.
Path slope

-
Feed forward

-
Path correction

-
Outer contour with

microjoint
"End beam before end of contour" and "Outside contour/inside

contour with microjoint" cannot be active at the same time.
Inner contour with

microjoint
The Mircojoint width can be preset by specifying the length.
Length
End of beam before

contour end
If a microjoint is to be produced at the cut end during automatic

machining of the outer and inner contours: Set buttons to Yes.
If no microjoint is to be produced at the cut end during automatic machining of the outer and inner contours: Set buttons to
No.
"End beam before end of contour" and "Outside contour/inside

contour with microjoint" cannot be active at the same time.
If the laser beam is to be switched off just before the end of the
contour: Set buttons to Yes.
The contour will still be completely cut. During the machining of
stainless steel and aluminum, no notch will result at the end of
the contour.
If the laser beam is not to be switched off just before the end of
the contour: Set buttons to No.
Tab. 2-40
Button
Parameters
Description
Withdrawal
Withdraw outer cont.
Withdrawal inner
cont.
If the cutter should withdraw from the contour at the end of the
cut: Set buttons to Yes.
If the cutter should not withdraw from the contour at the end of
the cut: Set buttons to No.
Default setting for TRUMPF rules (apart from TC 180 L and
TC 300 L).
Distance
S778EN
2012-04-13
Safety area where no contour is allowed. This safety area will be

considered in the collision check.
2-103
Button
Parameters
Description
Withdr.angle
Angle to be used to withdraw from inside and outside contours. By

default, all TRUMPF rules are delivered with a withdrawal angle of
0. That means that the withdrawal is central to a line, central to
an arc or a circle, and the withdrawal path is vertical to the contour.
If the cutter withdraws from a corner, then the withdrawal is tangential, i.e. directly in the cutting direction at the corner.
A negative angle entry generates an "acute" entry angle (large
change of direction at the entry point), a positive entry causes an
"obtuse" entry angle (less change of direction at the entry point).
Examples:
0: a withdrawal path with an angle 1 of 90 (90 - 0) relative

to the cutting direction of the contour will be produced.
-20: a withdrawal path with an angle 2 of 70 (90 - 20) relative to the cutting direction of the contour will be produced.
+20: a withdrawal path with an angle 3 of 110 (90 + 20)

relative to the cutting direction of the contour will be produced.
Form corner
The shape of the withdrawal path at corners and elements:
Form element
If the withdrawal path is to be a straight line, select line.
If the withdrawal path is to be made up of a straight line and an

arc, select line/arc.
Distance
The length of the withdrawal path.
Radius
If under "Form corner" or "Form element", line/curve was selected:

the radius of the curve.
Prec.stop

-
Path slope
Distance control
system
If cutting is to use active distance control: Set buttons to Yes.

The cutting head follows the sheet (Z axes motion) in a sensorguided manner at a constant cutting distance.
If cutting is not to use active distance control: Set buttons to

No.
The cutting head moves over the sheet with a constant Z-position.
Feed forward

-
2-104
Tab. 2-41
2012-04-13
S778EN
Button
Parameters
Description
Positioning
Positioning between
contours
Overshoot height
"Positioning between contours" must always be set to Yes.

Height that the cutting head adopts when positioning between contours.
Tab. 2-42
Button
Parameters
Description
Rounding
Rounding
If corners are to be rounded: Set buttons to Yes.
If corners are not to be rounded: Set buttons to No.
Corner round
The type of corners to be rounded:
If only inside corners are to be rounded, select inside.
If only outside corners are to be rounded, select outside.
If both inside and outside corners are to be rounded, select

inside/outside.
Example: A 45 degree inside contour is made up of four identical

90 inside corners, a 45 degree outer contour is made up of four
identical 90 outer corners.
Type
The type of corner rounding.

TruTops Punch only supports Rounding.
Radius
If the rounding radius is to be kept exactly, the minimum radius

must correspond to the maximum radius.
Deviation
The tolerance range in which the rounding may lie is determined

from these values.
Angle
The angular range over which the corners should be rounded.

Only those corners will be rounded which lie between the specified
angles..
Length of element
before corner
If the distance before or after the corner is longer than the maximum value or shorter than the minimum value, the corner will not
be machined.
Length of element
after corner
Tab. 2-43
Button
Parameters
Description
Looping
Looping
If the corner treatment is to be activated with a loop: Set buttons to Yes.
If the corner treatment is to be deactivated with a loop: Set buttons to No.
Form
Radius
The loop shape:
If the loop is to run along the bisector of the corners, select

Bisector.
If the loop is to run along a loop on the corners, select Loop.
Only for "Shape", Loop: radius of the loop arc.

If the loop radius is to be kept exactly, the minimum radius must
correspond to the maximum radius.
S778EN
Length
Only for "Shape", Bisector: length of the bisector.
Angle
A loop will only be produced on those corners where the angle is

between the minimum and maximum values.
2012-04-13
2-105
Button
Parameters
Description
Length element
before looping
If the distance before or after the corner is longer than the maximum value entered or shorter than the minimum value entered, the
corner will not be machined.
Length element after

looping
Tab. 2-44
Button
Parameters
Description
Evaporating
Evaporating
If the contours can also be vaporized with laser machining: Set

buttons to Yes.
Whether the program should be created with or without vaporizing, can be decided when creating the NC program.
Type
If the contours should not be vaporized with laser machining:

Set buttons to No.
If only a certain radius should be vaporized around the piercing

point, select Circle. The size is entered under "Radius".
If only the piercing point should be vaporized, select Point.
If the entire contour is to be vaporized, select Contour.

With this setting, TRUMPF rules will be supplied for materials
which are typically vaporized.
2-106
Tab. 2-45
2012-04-13
S778EN
12.
Internal and public sets of
rules
Apart from the internal TRUMPF, password-protected rules, there

is also a public set of machine rules and a public set of system
rules available. In the set of machine rules, variables allow specific settings to be made for the active machine. The variables in
the system rules concern all machines and all of TruTops.
12.1 To change the value of a variable

Notes
In the internal, password-protected rules, variables can only

be changed with the help of the TRUMPF software support
team.
Changes to the public rules will be retained after a new
installation or an updates of TruTops.
Deleted or incorrect variables can lead to inoperable NC

programs!
NOTICE
Open rules
Do not delete TRUMPF variables.

Check all input and changes.

Note
The variable shown in the machine rules depends on the
active machine.
2.
Either
To open the machine rules, select>Rules >Machine.
or
To open the system rules, select >Rules >System.
A screen with all of the available variables will be displayed.
Tip
By entering filter criteria, the number of variables displayed
can be limited.
Display the value and

comment of the variable
S778EN
2012-04-13
3. Mark variables.
The value of the variables will be displayed under "value". In
the comment text underneath, information about the marked
variable will be displayed.
2-107
Modify the value
4. Modify the value.

5. Press Modify.
If the value entered is invalid, an error message will be displayed.
If it is necessary to restart the active TruTops application, for the
changes to take effect, a message will be displayed.
12.2 To create a variable

Not all variables have already been created when TruTops is
delivered. As required, some can be added.
Condition
Open rules
The machines for which the copied variables should apply

must be active.

Note
active machine.
2. To open the machine rules, select>Rules >Machine.
Tip
can be limited.
Creating a variable
3. Press Create.
The "Selection" mask is displayed.
4. Mark variables.
The "Selection" screen will be closed.
Enter value
5. Enter the value.

6. Press Create.
The value will be entered into the list.
7. Select Previous.
2-108
2012-04-13
S778EN
12.3 To copy a variable

In the machine rules, variables for one machine can be copied
and used for another.
Condition
Open rules
The machines for which the copied variables should apply

must be active.

Note
active machine.
2. To open the machine rules, select>Rules >Machine.
Tip
can be limited.
Variable, copying
3. Press Create.
The "Selection" mask will be displayed. It contains variables,
which are already in the database for other machines, but
which have not yet been defined for the active machine.
4. Mark variables.
The "Selection" screen will be closed.
Enter value
5. Enter the value.

6. Press Create.
The value will be entered into the list.
7. Select Previous.
12.4 To display the details for a variable

Other information is stored for the variables apart from the
descriptive text, such as the range of values, the test expression
or whether they will be overwritten by a TruTops update.
Open rules
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-109
Note
active machine.
2.
Either
or
Tip
can be limited.

Displaying details
3. Mark variables.
4. Select Info.
Details about the variables are displayed.
12.5 To delete a variable

NOTICE
Deleted or incorrect variables can lead to inoperable NC

programs!
Open rules
Do not delete TRUMPF variables.

Check all input and changes.

Note
active machine.
2.
Either
or
2-110
2012-04-13
S778EN
Tip
can be limited.
Deleting a variable
3. Mark variables.
4. Press Delete.
12.6 To assign the values to colors and

line types
If colors or line types can be defined for variables in the rules,
always the same digits are used for the respective color and line
type.
Value
Color
Line type
-1
Transparent
Black, if background is black.
Solid
White, if background is white.

1
White, if background is black.
Dashed
Black if background is white.

2
Red
Dotted
Yellow
Dot and dash
Green
Cyan
Blue
Magenta
Tab. 2-46
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-111
12.7 Description of variables in the

machine rules
Machine table
Punching head
Collision object
Sheet with overlength
Distance for the SheetCollisionDetectionLeftX variable
Distance for the SheetCollisionDetectionRightX variable
Distance between the punching head and the collision object
Fig. 51785
Variable
Value, Description
AuflagestegWerkstoffIgnorieren
The assignment of the material to the carrier slat will be ignored.
CutterCompensationPreviewElementCount
The number of preview elements for the calculation of an equidistant

line.
DrawingCleanTolerance
Tolerance value for geometry preparation during loading
EinrichteplanFormular
Name for default set-up plan form

Modification is required only if a customer-specific special solution for
the set-up plan is to be used.
ReportToPsAptV2.html: (standard)
EinrichteplanOptionen
Bit field for set-up plan options during NC generation.
EpZeitAusgabeFormat
The format in which the machine time should be output in the setup
plan.
FlyCuttingEndLength
1: Decimal
2: hh:mm:ss.
3: Decimal and hh:mm:ss.
Length for flying switch off.
FlyCuttingEnd Radius
Radius for flying switch off.
FlyLineMaxSize
Maximum size of the FlyLine range.
FocusOffsetAllowed
FunktionBSSEnabled
FunktionPosiAufSchneiabstandEnabled
2-112
Focus offset during the approach.
0: No
1: Yes
Machine supports FlyLine.
0: No
1: Yes
Allow the function to position at cutting distance.
0: No
1: Yes
2012-04-13
S778EN
Variable
Value, Description
FunktionTcPosModeEnabled
LaserFocalLength
Allow the flying switch off function (TC_POS_MODE).
0: No
1: Yes
The lens focal lengths which are enabled by default. The technology
tables with lens focal lengths which have not been enabled, will not
be offered for selection when programming the machining.
LaserGas
5,7,9,6.7
An example: the lens focal lengths 5, 7.5, 9 and 6.7 inches have
been enabled.
Gas types enabled by default. The technology tables with gas types
which have not been enabled, will not be offered for selection when
programming the machining.
Explanation of digits:
LaserLttSpecPreSql
1 = Oxygen.
2 = Nitrogen.
3 = Customer-specific gas.
4 = Air.
Example:
1,2,3,4: All types of gas are enabled.
Special addition for LTT selection.

Is built in to the SQL "where" condition. AND is automatically inserted.
LaserLttSpecSql
Special addition for LTT selection.

Is built in to the SQL "where" condition. AND is automatically inserted.
LaserXControl
Machine has a LaserX control.
0: No
1: Yes
LST_PfadModal
The path under which all NC programs are saved. This path can also
be set via the NC options screen.
MachineExchangeDir
Path under which the machine can be found in the network. It must
be specified in UNC (Universal Naming Convention) format.
Example: If the machine in the network is named "TC5000R1", the
correct path would be: '\\TC5000R1\topsmanu.dir'.
If the path is set and the machine is integrated into the network, data
can be requested directly from the machine.
MachineExchangeDirUser
The user name for the automatic comparison of machine versions.

Note: Only necessary if the user name was modified during commissioning.
MachineExchangeDirUserPwd
The password for automatic machine updates.

Note: Only necessary if the password was modified during commissioning.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-113
Variable
Value, Description
MaschCtrlVersion
These variables are entered by either the automatic or semi-automatic

version update via the auxiliary program on the installation CD. (see
"Updating machine version", pg. 2-10)
MaschDiasVersion
MaschLasVersion
MaschMmcVersion
If neither an automatic nor a semi-automatic version update is possible, the versions can also be set manually.
MaschNcVersion
MaschPlcVersion
Machine microjoint
Microjoints are possible on the machine.
0: No
1: Yes
NCLinkLiteModus
NcLink: simple mode active (1)
NCLinkProduktionsPlanTyp
Configured NC link for production plan type
NcNameInitMode
The NC program name according to:
NcNameRemember
NcMitGrafik
1: Sheet file name
2: Rule
3: Self-holding
The last used Nc program name is suggested in case of a restart.
0: No
1: Yes
Output single-part graphic with the NC text:
0: No output
1: Output graphic in *.GEO format
2: Output graphic in *.SVG format
Note: Set variable to 1 if the machine has an automation system. In

this way, the single-part data can be used for the technology correction.
NestDefaultStartingCorner
Default starting corner in the Nest application.
0: No default starting corner.
1: Bottom left.
2: Top left.
3: Bottom right.
4. Top right.
PosLevelMarkingHigh
Positioning height for large sheet thickness range during marking.
PosLevelMarkingLow
Positioning height for small sheet thickness range during marking.
PosLevelSheetThickness
Limit value for sheet thickness range for PosLevel during marking.
Limit value: large sheet thickness range
RepositAdditionalPalletUnit
RepositAllowed
TruLaser 8000: oversize format additional pallet available.
0: No oversize-format additional pallet (only oversize-format pallet

changer).
1: Oversize format pallet changer and oversize-format additional

pallet available.
TruLaser 8000: Repositioning mode allowed.
0: No
1: Yes
RepositPalletSize
TruLaser 8000: Size of the oversize-format pallet changer.
RepositRangeTolerance
TruLaser 8000: Tolerance range for repositioning (reduction of the

working area).
2-114
2012-04-13
S778EN
Variable
Value, Description
Sc_BAHNK_ONOF
Parameter "Cut with path correction ". Calculation of the laser tool
path at the control system.
SecondPierceInSheetCut
0: No
1: Yes
Output second piercing for separation cuts with a common piercing

spot.
0: Output.
1: Suppress.
SheetThicknessForReductionPartContour
For sheet separation cuts, the material thickness from which a reduction on the good part edge is output.
SheetThicknessForReductionSheetCutEnd
For sheet separation cuts, the material thickness from which a reduction on the separation cut end is output.
SicherheitMagnetanwahl
Safety factor during automatic suction cup selection.
SicherheitSaugeranwahl
Safety factor during automatic suction cup selection.
SortedPartInhibitForMicrojoint
Automatic disable of mircojoints at contour end for parts with unloading processes.
SortmasterKollisionsbereichMinX
Start of the collision area lies in Xmin.

For example, if the machine is standing 147 mm to the left of the
sorting pallet: enter -146).
T1MSrNcL_AnfahrMuldeStartPkt
Approach dimple contour start point.
T2MSrNcL_DoOutputTcPartEnd
1: Middle
2: Before rounding
3: After rounding
Output of TC_PART_END.
0: No
1: Yes
T2MSrNcL_HPKennung
Main program identification.
T3MrGuiL_AutoTransferPrpAktiv
To initiate the transfer of production plans.
T4MSrNc_ZeitangabeErp
0: Only start on demand.
1: Start without demand.
Time output.
0: Standard
1: User's responsibility
2: No TRUMPF times
TimeDelayContourChanging
Required time for contour change in seconds (average value for time
calculation)
TimeDelayGasPressureChanging
Required time for gas pressure change in seconds (average value for
time calculation)
VaporizingWithSprintLas
Carry out vaporization with SprintLine.
0: No
1: Yes
S778EN
2012-04-13
Tab. 2-47
2-115
Variable
Value, Description
ActiveDieHighQualityDistanceFactor
Only for machines with active die.
ScratchFreeDieConstantFactor
These 3 variables can adapted, in order to modify the maximum

depth to which the active die can lower.
ScratchFreeDieMaterialFactor
ScratchFreeDieThicknessFactor
Note: The machine comes to a standstill from calculated maximum

depths of > 32 mm onwards for standard dies.
The maximum depth is calculated with the formula:
Maximum depth in mm = E-ModulStahl / E-ModulAktives Material *
ScratchFreeDieMaterialFactor + 1 mm / material thickness in mm *
ScratchFreeDieThicknessFactor + ScratchFreeDieConstantFactor
Via the "ActiveDieHighQualityDistanceFactor" variable, the calculated
maximum depth can also be modified (see the following values).
However, these values do not affect the minimum depth which is calculated from the maximum depth.
AlphaNumPrgNr
AnzahlFestBelegterMagazinplaetze
AptWzwMagPlatzAusDB
AutocutBearbAufTafelrandLoeschen
1: Active die lowers to the specified maximum depth.
1.1: Active die lowers to 110% of the specified maximum depth.

(standard)
1.2: Active die lowers to 120% of the specified maximum depth.
etc.
0: Use program number.
1: Use alphanumeric program numbers.
Only for machines which are programmed via the TC-APT interface.
0: Magazine stations are issued in sequence, starting from 1.
> 0: The number of magazine stations which are always fitted with
the same tools. This number must always have been entered
straight away in the tool data for a magazine station. Further tools
(without a magazine station number) will get magazine stations
above this number.
Only for machines which are programmed via the TC-APT interface.
0: Magazine station is numbered consecutively.
1: Magazine station number of the tool is used.
Automatic processing operations of finished parts whose edges correspond to the sheet edge are deleted.
Exception: roller deburring.
AutocutErsetzbareBearbsLoeschen
AutoNset_GripIgnorieren
BlechEinlegenVorWzgWechsel
Those punching operations that are unnecessarily generated by the

automatic processing are deleted.
Only for machines with GripMaster/Grip.
0: The suggestion for the repositioning path takes into account the
position of the GripMaster/Grip if this does not necessitate any
additional clamping.
1: The suggestion for the repositioning path is the minimum repositioning path as in case of machines without GripMaster/Grip, with
which all processing operations are attained.
Instead of changing the variable, the following option can be activated.

>Machines >Modify, "Automation components", "Exchange first tool
before sheet loading".
BlindMatrizeIdentNr
2-116
ID number for the protective tool
2012-04-13
S778EN
Variable
Value, Description
BookAllRemainingPartsOnDummy
The handling of parts not removed in the PARTS_IN_PROGRAM_POS table.
BookNotProcessedParts
0: Do not insert.
1: Insert without part removal reference.
2: Insert as "removed with waste grid".
The handling of unmachined parts in the PARTS_IN_PROGRAM_POS table.
0: Do not insert.
1: Insert.
CarvingFeed
Default feed for engraving tool
CheckRemoval_InContour
A check is carried out to determine whether inside contours are

removed.
CreatePIPPForWaste
0: No
1: Yes
To create PARTS_IN_PROGRAM_POS.
DefaultNiederhalteKraft
0: No
1: Yes
Only for TruPunch 5000/TC 5000 R.

The presser foot force for machines where this force can be set via
an NC program.
DefaultRemovalMethodLaserChute
DefaultRemovalMethodLaserDie
Default type of part removal when laser cutting: Die.
DefaultRemovalMethodLaserFlap
DefaultRemovalMethodLaserManual
DefaultRemovalMethodPunchChute
20: (standard)
Default type of part removal when laser cutting: Chute.

9: Laser die
Default type of part removal when laser cutting: Flap.
2: Fold down
23: Fold down - push-out
32: Push-out - fold down
52: Eject - fold down
352: Push-out - eject - fold down
Default type of part removal when laser cutting: Manual.
4: Cutting free
34: Cutting free - push-out
Default type of part removal when punching: Chute.
13: Cut off - push-out
DefaultRemovalMethodPunchDie
Default type of part removal when punching: Die.
DefaultRemovalMethodPunchFlap
Default type of part removal when punching: Flap.
DefaultRemovalMethodPunchManual
S778EN
2012-04-13
12: Cut off - fold down
123: Cut off - fold down - push-out
132: Cut off - push-out - fold down
21: - Fold down - cut off
213: Fold down - cut off - push-out
Default type of part removal when punching: Manual.
14: Cut off
134: Cut off - push-out
2-117
Variable
Value, Description
DefaultRemovalPushingOrder
DefaultSheetType
Default - part removal strategy
0: Push - open.
1: Open - push.
The default value for "Sheet type" when creating a new sheet. This
affects the punching head position when loading a new tool.
0: Plane.
1: Bent.
(the safest but slowest variant)
2: Uneven.
DrawingCleanTolerance
Tolerance value for geometry preparation during loading.
DynMultiToolMachinePrefix
Prefix for the dyn. Multitools ID number.
EinrichteplanFormular
Name for default setup plan form.

Modification is required only if a customer-specific special solution for
the set-up plan is to be used.
EngravingFeed
The feed for the engraving tool.
EpZeitAusgabeFormat
FreifahrwegDrehBiegeWzg
FunktionBSSEnabled
ReportToPsAptV2.html: (standard)
- : If no value is entered, the feed will be automatically calculated
on the basis of the material thickness.
The format in which the machine time should be output in the setup
plan.
1: Decimal
2: hh:mm:ss.
3: Decimal and hh:mm:ss.
The length of the retraction path which the MultiBend tool must cover
before the punching head reaches its overshoot height.
Machine supports FlyLine:
0: No
1: Yes
GanzeTafelDeltaAussenkontur
Distance to the outer contour after which the suction cup has to be
disabled (for removal of the entire sheet).
GanzeTafelSaugerDeakKonturZwGruppe
The suction cup group is automatically deactivated for the removal of

the whole sheet if the group goes via the contour.
GanzeTafelSaugerDeakNachSaugkraft
Suction cups are automatically deactivated for removal of the whole

sheet after suction cup capacity.
HOCHDRUCK_AUSGABE_ART
Only for TC 240 L and TC 260 L.

The output of the high-pressure cutting.
HPKennung
0: M52S<step><Gas type> is output.
1: M52S<step>4 is outputted.
2: M521 is output.
This is the ID in the NC text. This ID is put before the alphanumeric

program number.
Note: The maximum length of the value is limited to 25 characters for
alphanumeric program number output.
HQSurfaceJobAndTaf
The processing type when loading a sheet or a job.
2-118
-1: Material-dependent
0: Normal
1: Low scratch
2: Scratch-free
3: Both
2012-04-13
S778EN
Variable
Value, Description
HQSurfaceModal
The preset for the processing type when loading a sheet.
-1: Material-dependent
0: Normal
1: Low scratch
2: Scratch-free
3: Both
LabelUnitOffsetX
The position of the labelling unit relative to the punching head in X.
LabelUnitOffsetY
The position of the labelling unit relative to the punching head in Y.
LasAutoProc_VorstTafDickeKorr
LaserFocalLength
To limit the automatically selected prepunching tools.
0: Do not consider the material thickness.
1: Consider the material thickness.
The lens focal lengths which are enabled by default. The technology
tables with lens focal lengths which have not been enabled, will not
be offered for selection when programming the machining.
LaserGas
5,7,9,6.7
Example: The lens focal lengths 5, 7.5, 9 and 6.7 inches have
been enabled.
Gas types enabled by default. The technology tables with gas types
which have not been enabled, will not be offered for selection when
programming the machining.
Explanation of digits:
1 = Oxygen.
2 = Nitrogen.
3 = Customer-specific gas.
4 = Air.
1,2,3,4:
Example: All types of gas are enabled.
LasMatrizEnts_MaxRadAbfallteil
The maximum radius or round scrap parts, which should be sucked

out by the laser die.
LasMatrizEnts_MaxRadGutteil
The maximum radius or round good parts, which should be sucked

out by the laser die.
LasPosLaserDie
The value by which the laser cutting support (option) is lifted before
laser machining starts.
LasShowPunchWorkingArea
LiftRemovalModeIfSuccerDiffer
S778EN
2012-04-13
Display of working areas:
0: Display combined working area.
1: Display punch working area.
2: Display no working area.
Defines how TruTops reacts if *.gmt/*.tmt files are loaded for which
other suction data has been defined compared to that which is currently set.
0: All lift unloadings with suction cup data that does not correspond to the current settings are deleted.
1: TruTops asks whether all lift unloadings with suction cup data
that does not correspond to the current settings should be deleted.
2: The suction cup data of the loaded *.gmt/*.tmt file is applied.

These settings are also retained for a new sheet with the current
machine. If the suction cup data is to be reactivated from the database, the machine must be reloaded.
2-119
Variable
Value, Description
LiftImmerGanzeTafelEntnehmen
Should the lift always remove the whole sheet (parts have to be connected)?
1: Yes
0: No
LoadYDeadRangeForActiveSlide
Y-loading position for lift loading with active gap.
LST_PfadModal
The path under which all NC programs are saved. This path can also
be set via the NC options screen.
MachineExchangeDir
Path under which the machine can be found in the network. It must
be specified in UNC (Universal Naming Convention) format.
Example: If the machine in the network is named "TC5000R1", the
correct path would be: '\\TC5000R1\topsmanu.dir'.
If the path is set and the machine is integrated into the network, data
can be requested directly from the machine.
MachineExchangeDirUser
The user name for the automatic comparison of machine versions.

Note: Only necessary if the user name was modified during commissioning.
MachineExchangeDirUserPwd
The password for automatic machine updates.

Note: Only necessary if the password was modified during commissioning.
MaschCtrlVersion
Current control version of the machine. See machine control system.

Empty field = independent of version
MaschDiasVersion
Current DIAS version of the machine. See machine control system.

Empty field = independent of version
MaschLasVersion
Current laser control version of machine. See machine control system.
MaschMmcVersion
Current MMC version of the machine. See machine control system.
MaschNcVersion
Current NC version of the machine. See machine control system.
MaschPlcVersion
Current PLC version of the machine. See machine control system.
MasReg_ZeitausgabeErp
MinGewichtFuerBeladehilfe
The control for the output in the "machine time" line in the setup plan.
0: TRUMPF times will be output. (standard)
1: Times are customer's responsibility - The time is output in the

set-up plan.
2: No TRUMPF times are available - The time is not outputted in

the set-up plan.
The sheet weight from which the load assist is activated. The load
assist consists of cylinders built in to the machine table, which can
extend so far that the sheet slides above the brushes on ball bearings.
Note: This variable must be created for machines with the "Loading
aid" option.
NC_AusgabeArtPalettierung
NC_NrDigitsForNamePostfix
30: (standard)
Mode of deposit position output for palletization.
1: Output in absolute mode (TC 500,T 260).
2: Incremental output, relative to the pallet (TC 600 L, TruPunch 5000 / TC 5000 R)
The number of characters from the end of the name of the *.tmt file
which are automatically attached to the name of the *.lst file.
This prevents the name of the *.lst file from not being unique, if the
originally specified name was too long and was thus abbreviated.
2-120
2012-04-13
S778EN
Variable
Value, Description
NC_Titel
Defines that the name of the previous NC program is always used as

the default.
NcMitGrafik
Output single-part graphic with the NC text:
0: No output
1: Output graphic in *.GEO format
2: Output graphic in *.SVG format
Note: Set variable to 1 if the machine has an automation system. In

this way, the single-part data can be used for the technology correction.
NestDefaultStartingCorner
Default starting corner in the "Nest" application.
PalletizingShowPosLines
0: No default starting corner.
1: Bottom left.
2: Top left.
3: Bellow right.
4. Top right.
In the palletizing view, the unloading area beneath the machine table
is separated from the unloading area next to the machine by red,
dashed lines. The lines can be hidden and shown via the "PalletizingShowPosLines" variable in the machine's rules.
PositioningBypassOffset
0: Line will be hidden.
1: Line will be shown. (standard)
The distance at which formed sections will be bypassed.

If the "Bypass formings" function is active, this variable will be evaluated under >Extras >Presettings >Process options.
PunchDefaultOverlapping
Overlap during feed of a particular type of tool.

During automatic machining, the nibbling paths will be created with
the overlap value defined here. If none is entered, the value from the
"Presettings" menu will be used. If no value is defined for a type of
tool, the value from >Extras >Modify data... >Machine >Data, Basic
machine, Data 5 will be used.
PunchModeInPTT
ReduzierteBeschleunigung
Example:
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;0;;: Should the overlap for tool type 27 be the
value 0, then the value must be entered before the 27th semicolon.
-1: The default setting from TruTops will be used.
0: The punching mode "delayed" or "with presser foot" is activated

via the voiced word PRESSERFOOT_ON or PDELAY_ON.
1: The punching mode "delayed" or "with presser foot" is activated

by the PTT if the PTT for the tool is issued - otherwise via the
voiced word.
2: Combination of the values 0 and 1.
Percentage of residual amount of acceleration that is outputted when

using the free cycle "Reduce accel.".
Value range: 0 - 100%
RemovalMinPushOutLength
Minimum length to which the push-out path can be shortened in the

clamp dead range and the working range.
RemovalMinPushOutManual
Creates manual removal if the minimum push-out path is not sufficient

when shortening.
S778EN
2012-04-13
0: No
1: Yes
2-121
Variable
Value, Description
RemovalMinPushOutUpperMostHead
Move the punching head to its highest position, if the minimum pushout path is not sufficient when shortening.
Sc_BAHNK_ONOF
Sc_EINS_ONOF
Sc_LAS_UMLAUF_AK
Sc_LAS_UMLAUF_IK
Sc_TAFCUT_ANFA_LEN
Sc_TAFCUT_GEOKATEGORIE
0: No
1: Yes
Default setting for laser tool: "Cutting with path correction" parameters. Calculation of the laser tool path at the control system.
0: No
1: Yes
Default setting of the laser tool with reference to beam start.
-1: Use current.
0: Prepunching.
1: Piercing.
2: Beam on.
3. Beam on with measurement and changeover point.
The direction in which the outside or inside contours are to be

machined.
CCLW: counter-clockwise
CLW: clockwise
The length of the approach path to the edge of the sheet for laser
cuts to part a sheet.
How to handle laser cuts which part a sheet.
0: As an open contour.
1: As a small contour.
2: As a medium contour.
3: As a large contour.
Sc_TAFCUT_MESSABST_KANTE
The distance from the edge of the sheet to the measurement point
inside the sheet for parting laser cuts.
Sc_TAFCUT_SCHN_LEN_OHNE_HR
If a sheet-parting laser cut with a DIAS III active distance control is

carried out, this is the length of the path to be cut without active distance control.
Sc_TAFCUT_WEGF_LEN
The withdrawal path from the edge of the sheet for laser cuts to part
a sheet.
Sc_VRSTNZ_MAX_DURCHMESSER
Abbreviations:
Sc_VRSTNZ_MIN_DURCHMESSER
Sc_VRSTNZ_MAX_DURCHMESSER is the maximum diameter of

the enveloping circle around the prepunching tool (Dmax).
Sc_VRSTNZ_MIN_DURCHMESSER is the minimum diameter of

the enveloping circle around the prepunching tool (Dmax).
Evaluation:
2-122
During the automatic prepunching tool search, the search goes

from Dmin to Dmax. Only round and square tools will be considered.
The selected prepunching tool is checked for this value. If it fails

this test, the tool is rejected as a prepunching tool.
Example: Dmin = 2.0 mm; Dmax = 8.0 mm. (for a material thickness of s = 4.0 mm will be corrected to Dmin = 4.0 mm and Dmax
= 8.0 mm).
If a default prepunching diameter is to be defined, the search time

can be shortened if this is entered under Dmin.
If a concrete prepunching tool is to be specified, the same value

can be entered for Dmin and Dmax.
2012-04-13
S778EN
Variable
Value, Description
Sc_VRSTNZ_MIN_LEN_RED_SCHN
The minimum path for "reduced cutting" when approaching from the
pre-punching hole
Sc_ZUENDPKT_KANTE
For pre-punching, the default is not for the laser beam to be ignited in
the middle of the pre-punching hole but rather 0.2 mm from the edge
of the hole. The value can only be adapted with the
"Sc_ZUENDPKT_KANTE" variable in the machine rules.
SchmierstaerkeProWerkzeugtyp
The lubricating strength for every type of tool.

Exception: for tool type 5 (thread tapping tool), the value = 0. The
lubricating strength for tapping tools is specified directly during the
machining.
ScrapChipCountConstant
;;1;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; :
Example: If the lubricating strength should have the value of 1 for
tool type 3, the value must be entered before the 3rd semicolon.
This variable is a constant of the formula that determines the frequency of the punching slug console being emptied. If you increase
the default value, the frequency of console emptying is reduced. If
you decrease the value, the console is emptied more frequently.
ScratchFreeDieConstantFactor
ScratchFreeDieMaterialFactor
0: The console is not emptied between tool changes or removals.
800000: (standard)
See the description of the "ActiveDieHighQualityDistanceFactor" variable
ScratchFreeDieThicknessFactor
ScratchFreeDieLevelHQ
ScratchFreeDieLevelNormal
SegmentTischUnterstuetzungYMass
SHEET_TECH_Satzweise
S778EN
To change the values set by default for the low-scratch processing of

the bottom side of the sheet when defining the sheet data::
ScratchFreeDieLevelHQ: for material with a high surface quality.
ScratchFreeDieLevelNormal: for material without a high surface

quality.
0: Inactive
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
3: Level 3
4: Level 4
Only for TC 600 L.

The length of the retraction path at the end of the NC program with
full segment table support. The NC program outputs this both for
removal of the waste grid manually as as well as using GripMaster/
Grip.
480: 3/5 Segments for Y 1300/1600 (Default value for machines up

to March 2000).
390: 5/7 Segments for Y 1300/1600 (Default value for machines

starting from April 2000).
In case of the machines TC 2000 R and TC 600 L, the NC text is not

interpreted on re-entry to the machine. This has the consequence that
an erroneous working position for the tool could occur when reentering. For this reason, a SHEET_TECH table can be outputted before
each tool change, which would make sure that the correct working
position is set.
2012-04-13
0: SHEET_TECH table will be output before each tool change.
1: SHEET_TECH table will not be output before each tool change.
2-123
Variable
Value, Description
SheetCollisionDetectionLeftX
Distance of the punching head from the collision object (e.g. hall wall,
light barrier, ) (see "Fig. 51785", pg. 2-112).
By default, the distance to the light barrier is entered:
SheetCollisionDetectionRightX
0: Distances are not checked.
SheetThicknessForSheetTensionRelease
Definition of the material thickness up to which the sheet should automatically be pressure relieved during loading.
Sicherheit_Lift_TragkraftPruefung
Safety factor during the carrying capacity check for lift unloading.
Steuerungstyp_BoschMicro5_TC_or_T
Only TC 180 N, TC 180 L, TC 300, TC 300 L and TC 300 P

Note: The NC program is generated according to the control system
variant. In case of an erroneously set value, the NC program is not
operable on the machine.
SuctionInPTT
1: Bosch Micro 5TC: NC output with DFS identification for data

transfer.
2: Bosch Micro 5T: NC output without DFS identification for

punched tape operation.
The way that exhaust system is output:
T3MrGuiC_AptNachbearbeitungPrg
T3MrGuiL_AutoTransferAktiv
T3MrGuiL_AutoTransferPrpAktiv
2-124
-1: (standard)
0: Only command.
1: Only PTT.
2. Command and PTT.
The value corresponds to the APT post-processing program used. It

is identical with the entry for the post-processing program in the data
management system under >User >Programs, "Designation".
To initiate the transfer of *.lst files.
To initiate the transfer of production plans.
2012-04-13
S778EN
Variable
Value, Description
T3MrMaL_LiftUndefDelV0
Delete SheetMaster unloading modes for:
T3MrMaL_LiftUndefDelV1
The loading of old *.tmt files in ToPs 200 and ToPs 250 (variable
T3MrMaL_LiftUndefDelV0).
The loading of old *.tmt files in TruTops Punch, version 3.00 (variable T3MrMaL_LiftUndefDelV1).
The value is made up of eight digits. Each digit can take the following
values:
0 = Do not delete unloading mode.
1 = Delete unloading mode.
The digits stand for:
1st digit: good part.
2nd digit: good part pushed out.
3rd digit: good part out clamps.
4th digit: waste grid with lifting grip.
5th digit: waste.
6th digit: waste pushed out.
7th digit: waste out clamps.
8th digit: waste grid with suction cup.
Example: 00110011
T3MrNcD_KorrZeitWzgWechselEben
Additive excess work allowance for each tool change when the type
of tool change = "Plane".
T3MrNcD_KorrZeitWzgWechselFormblech
of tool change type = "Bent".
T3MrNcD_KorrZeitWzgWechselUneben
of tool change = "Uneven".
T3MrNcL_Ausgabe_UP_NR_in_ERP
The output of program numbers in the setup plan.
T3MrNcL_NC_AusgabeTyp
0: No
1: Yes
Makes sense for control systems which do not have subroutine
links (e.g. SINUMERIK 3N, SINUMERIK 8N, BOSCH Micro 5T,
SINUMERIK 880).
Output mode
Note: The machines can be programmed only in the preset output
mode.
TC_BEAD_ON_mit_Offsetwinkel
TCPARTEND_Ausgabe
S778EN
1: NC output.
2: TCAPT output. (The NC output takes place through the

TRUMPF postprocessor).
3. TC260+SC with parameter blocks.
Offset angle for quick forming.
0: Not possible
1: Possible.
Output TC_PART_END for part registration for machines with PPS

coupling.
2012-04-13
0: No
1. Output with the consecutive part number after each finished part
removal.
2-125
Variable
Value, Description
ToolLubeInPTT
Output of tool lubrication only in PTT.
TransferKennung
-1: (standard)
0: Only command.
1: Only PTT.
2. Command and PTT.
TC transfer and PC transfer are programs that transfer the NC text

from TruTops to the machine.
P: For all machines which operate with TC transfer or PC transfer.
-: For all new control systems which are integrated into the network (TC 600 L, TC 2000 R, TruPunch 5000/TC 5000 R).
UPKennung
This is the ID in the NC text. This identification is put before the

alphanumeric program number. The maximum length of the value is
limited to 25 characters for an alphanumeric program number output.
WARTEZEIT_NACH_ERSTER_M14
Only for TC 240 L, TC 260 L and TC L2000.

If the quality of the cut upon approach does not correspond to the
quality at the time of further processing, the laser beam can be stabilized after each ignition in laser mode by an additional dwell time in
seconds.
WzgTypenMitGespeichertemOTUT
Tool types for which the last used upper part/lower part value is
reused for the next sheet of the same material. The value consists of
several digits, where each stands for a tool type.
Digit 0: default value.
Digit 1: the last value will be reused (type 1 right).
Example 1:
-: If no value is specified, then the default value applies for every
type of tool.
Example 2:
0100010: For tool types 2 and 6 the upper part/lower part value
will be reused; for all others, the default value applies.
Tab. 2-48
12.8 Description of the variables in the

system rules
Value, Description
Variable
AutoSaveBaseFileName
Defines the basic file name of the *.tmt file which is automatically
saved.
AutoSaveShowMessage
AutoSaveTimeInterval
2-126
autosave.tmt: TruTops uses the basic file name for automatically

saved TMT files. This name is extended by TruTops to include the
application, the process ID and the PC name. Example: autosave_PUNCH_5432_PC0123456.TMT.
Display a message when automatically saving sheets (*.tmt) which

have been edited.
1: Yes
0: No
Enter the time interval in minutes for the automatic saving of edited sheets (*.tmt).
0: no automatic saving.
Description of the variables in the system rules
2012-04-13
S778EN
Value, Description
Variable
BarcodeCommon
0: TruTops does not output a bar code for the program name in
the setup plan (*.html, *.pdf).
(standard)
1: TruTops outputs a bar code for the program name in the setup
plan (*.html, *.pdf).
BarcodeEncoding
The coding of the barcode.
BarcodeFont
The font of the barcode.
BarcodeSinglePart
0: TruTops does not output bar codes for single parts in the setup
plan (*.html, *.pdf). (standard)
1: TruTops outputs the part ID of each single part as bar code in

the setup plan (*.html, *.pdf).
2: TruTops outputs the drawing notes of each single part as barcode in the set-up plan (*.html, *.pdf).
BarcodeSize
The font size of the barcode.
BlankAutoID
The part number for remainder sheets.
CadCheckContourIntersectionOnSave
1: When saving in TruTops CAD, a check for overlapping contours is

done.
CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_FsMode 8
When loading *.geo files, a check is made whether there are matching *.gmt files. If there are matching *.gmt files, these will be suggested when loading.
CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_PdmMode
9
In doing so, TruTops uses the following (non-changeable) test criteria:
ID number (parts area)
File type.
File name.
Only those files are offered that completely meet the test criteria. The
selection of files found can also be influenced by the "CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_Option" variable.
0: The system will look for *.gmt files which are in the same directory - without subdirectories.
1: The system will look for *.gmt files which are in the same directory - including all subdirectories.
2: *.gmt files will be suggested which depend on a *.geo file.

Not relevant in the file system, because there are no dependencies
there. In the PDM system, this value is the quickest way to a
result.
3: There will be no search for matching *.gmt files.
-X: Only for the file system: The search will take in all directories
and subdirectories which are X levels higher, looking for matching
*.gmt files.
Relates to variables "CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_FsMode" and

"CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_PdmMode".
CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_Option
If *.gmt files are also to be suggested which were produced for other
machines, remove machineName=ST_MaschinenName from the
value.
S778EN
2012-04-13
When working with TruTops in the file system.
When working with TruTops in the PDM system.
2-127
Value, Description
Variable
CheckMaschChange
Check machining operations during a machine change.

Threads and disposal via the flap are retained. Tool types which are
not supported will be deleted.
ClampColor
0: No
1: Yes
The color of the clamps.
3: Yellow, (standard)
Other colors: (see "To assign the values to colors and line types", pg.
2-111)
ClampDeadRangeColor
The color of the clamp's dead range.
2: Red, (standard)
2-111)
ClickZoomFactor
Factor for zoom when clicking with center or right mouse click.
CollisionRangeColor
The display of the collision range.
-1: Do not display.
1: Show red.
2-111)
CompanyLogo
The path where the company logo is stored, which will be shown in
the setup plan.
Note: The file name of the company logo must begin with "System".
Example: 'C:\trumpf\kundendaten\system_mylogo.gif'
ContourCreateCompulsorySequence
ContourOnlySuitableElements
Set processing for tool type automatically to compulsory sequence.

(code777.bat)
Is used for "At contour" punching. Default for forming, quick forming,
marking and engraving tools.
Function "At contour" only processes elements that are long enough.
0: No
1: Yes
DATA_ROOT
Path where TruTops files are saved by default.
DeburringChamferAngle
Angle of the roll knife tool for the chamfered laser edge.
A tool with this angle will automatically be activated.
DeburringChamferOffset
LDP offset adjustment value for the chamfered laser edge.
DeburringGrafikDistance
Distance of the graphics elements when deburring.
DeburringGrafikLength
Length of the graphics elements when deburring.
DeburringMinDistance
Only for roller deburring tools.

Minimum distance of deburring processing end pieces to the corresponding nibbling path.
2-128
2012-04-13
S778EN
Value, Description
Variable
DeleteWarningMessages
The value of the variables is a 9-digit number with the digits 0 and 1.
The meaning of the digits:
0: When machining is deleted, no message will be issued.
1: When machining is deleted, a message about undeleted,

dependent machining will be issued.
The digits stand for:
Digit 1: FinalCut.
Digit 2: Compulsory sequence.
Digit 3: Repositioning.
Digit 4: Loading.
Digit 5: Inactive processing area.
Digit 6: Continuous line.
Digit 7: Thread pre-punches.
Digit 8: Laser pre-punches.
Digit 9: unused.
100000010 (example): When deleting, messages will only be issued

for FinalCut and Laser prepunching.
DbComprSplitSizeInKb
Split archive size in [KB] in the case of D backup or e-mail dispatch.
DrawPartCount
Prevents flickering of the GEO at the mouse pointer (for multiple use).
The entered value specifies how many parts there can be before only
the outer contour will be displayed.
DrawPartCount and DrawInContourCount are linked with OR; that is,
if one of the two settings applies, then only the outer contours will be
displayed.
DrawInContourCount
Prevents flickering of the GEO at the mouse pointer (for larger and
complex GEOs).
How many inner contours of all parts there can be before only the
outer contours will be displayed.
DimensioningColor
Color of the dimensioning
3: Yellow, (standard)
2-111)
DxfIgnoreInvisibleElements
Loading of DXF files with/without invisible elements
DxfReplaceColor
0: Dxf files are loaded with invisible elements.
1: Dxf files are loaded without invisible elements.
Replacement color for unknown colors in a *.dxf file.
0: Automatic
1: white
2-111)
DynMultiToolPrefix
Prefix for the dyn. Multitools ID number.
EasyJoinIdentNumber
ID No. of the Multitool for creating the EasyJoints.
EnableFilledDrawMode
Filled drawing mode.
S778EN
2012-04-13
0: Deactivated
1: Activated
2-129
Value, Description
EnableRedrawAcceleration
Variable
Accelerated redraw.
0: Deactivated
1: Activated
FactorElectircPowerPiercing
Part of cutting performance for the piercing power output (negative:

standard).
FinalCutLaengeMax
max. final cut length.
FinalCutLaengeMin
min. final cut length.
GEOLoadIgnoreControl
Check of the control system name and type when loading a *.geo file
onto a sheet.
GEOLoadIgnoreProperty
GewindeDurchzug_...
2-130
0: Additional loading is rejected if the control name or type is not

the same as that of the current machine.
1: Additional loading is rejected if the control type is not the same

as that of the current machine.
2: Additional loading is rejected if the control name is not the same

3: Additional loading is never rejected.
Checking the specific weight, tensile strength, the material thickness

and the magnetizability when loading a *.geo file onto a sheet. This
variable is bit-coded. This means: Value 3 is a combination of values
1 and 2, value 5 is a combination of values 1 and 4, value 6 is a
combinations of values 2 and 4, and value 7 is a combination of values 1, 2 and 4.
0: Additional loading is rejected if there are differences in the tensile strength, the specified weight or the material thickness.
(standard)
1: Differences in the material thickness are tolerated.
2: Differences in the tensile strength and the specified weight are

tolerated.
3: Differences in the material thickness, tensile strength and the

specified weight are tolerated.
4: Differences in the magnetizability of the material are tolerated.
5: Differences in the material thickness and magnetizability are tolerated
6: Differences in the magnetizability of the material, the tensile

strength and the specified weight are tolerated.
7: Differences in the material thickness, magnetizability of the

material, the tensile strength and the specified weight are tolerated.
Identity number of the extrusion tool. When loading an extrusion sample, an extrusion with the tool for the specified ID no. will automatically be produced.
13027027 (example): When loading the extrusion sample, an extrusion with the tool for ID no. "13027027" will automatically be produced.
-: When loading the extrusion sample, no extrusion will be produced.
2012-04-13
S778EN
Value, Description
Variable
GewindeformdatenCheck
The extent of the test as to whether tools are available with the ID
number which were specified for the variables "Thread former..."
and "ThreadExtrusion...".
The extent of the test whether all prepunching tools have been
created for the thread tapping.
This requires that the "Tapping" option is activated.
0: No check.
1: Check with messages.
2: Check without messages.
4: Check for prepunching tools only.
8: Check for extrusion tools only.
16: Check for thread tapping tools only.
32: Check for extrusion and thread tapping tools only.
Gewindeformer_...
The identity number of the tapping tool for a type of thread.

13027027 (example): When loading the thread sample, a thread with
the tool for ID no. "13027027" will automatically be produced.
GMTLoadIgnoreControl
Check of the control system name and type when loading a *.gmt file
onto a sheet.
GMTLoadIgnoreLiftSuccer
0: Additional loading is rejected if the control name or type is not

the same as that of the current machine.
1: Additional loading is rejected if the control type is not the same

2: Additional loading is rejected if the control name is not the same

3: Additional loading is never rejected.
Checking the list settings when loading a *.gmt file.
GMTLoadIgnoreLiftType
0: Check and, for differences between the GMT suction cup data
and the data in the database, ask whether the lift removal should
be deleted.
1: Do not check suction cup attributes.
Check the lift version and type when loading a *.gmt file.
GMTLoadIgnoreMachine
S778EN
0: Check both.
1: Check lift type only.
2: Check none.
Check of the machine name and type when loading a *.gmt file onto
a sheet.
2012-04-13
0: Loading will be rejected if the machine name or type differ from

the current machine.
1: Loading will be rejected if the machine type differs from the current machine.
2: Loading will be rejected if the machine name differ from the current machine.
3: Loading will never be rejected.
2-131
Value, Description
Variable
GMTLoadIgnoreProperty
Checking the specific weight, tensile strength, the material thickness

and the magnetizability when loading a *.gmt file onto a sheet. This
variable is bit-coded. This means: Value 3 is a combination of values
1 and 2, value 5 is a combination of values 1 and 4, value 6 is a
combinations of values 2 and 4, and value 7 is a combination of values 1, 2 and 4.
ImportClampPosFromTAF
JobLoadingWithDot
0: Additional loading is rejected if there are differences in the tensile strength, the specified weight or the material thickness.
(standard)
1: Differences in the material thickness are tolerated.
2: Differences in the tensile strength and the specified weight are

tolerated.
3: Differences in the material thickness, tensile strength and the

specified weight are tolerated.
4: Differences in the magnetizability of the material are tolerated.
5: Differences in the material thickness and magnetizability are tolerated
6: Differences in the magnetizability of the material, the tensile

strength and the specified weight are tolerated.
7: Differences in the material thickness, magnetizability of the

material, the tensile strength and the specified weight are tolerated.
Use of the clamp positions when loading nested sheets.
0: Query whether the clamp positions should be used.
1: Use the clamp positions from the file.
2: Retain the clamp positions.
JOB/TAF/TMT files with a dot in the file name can be loaded.
0: No
1: Yes
LabelIdentNumber
Identity number for the labeling tool
LabelPrinterLayoutFile
Path to the layout file to print a label.
LabelPrinterModeCommon
Producing labels. The "LabelPrinterModeCommon" variable relates to

the NC program, the "LabelPrinterModePart" variable to the part.
LabelPrinterModePart
LaserAutoRuleSelect
LaserFormatString
0: No labels are produced.
1: Labels are produced.
If only one matching technology table or a matching set of rules is

found, this will automatically be activated.
0: Yes
1: No
This defines which information is shown for the active laser.
$N: Text "Laser".
$L: LTT.
$G: Gas type.
$M: Material.
$R: Laser rules.
$I: Process rule remark.
Example $N $L $R ($I): "Laser T2D-5532 T2D-5532-1 (round off)" will

be displayed.
LaserMicrojointIsRemovalProcessing
2-132
Microjoints will be treated as a removal.
0: No
1: Yes
2012-04-13
S778EN
Value, Description
Variable
LaserShowAllRulesDefault
Only show suitable rules for the technology table
LastUsedNcName
0: No
1: Yes
The default name for the *.lst files of all machines.
-: If no value is entered, no default name will be specified.
NC file: Example: All *.lst files are called "NC-File" by default.
LetzterHubStegRund
Web width for last stroke with a round tool.
LetzterHubUeberlappung
Overlapping value for last stroke.
LicenceServerPeekTimeSpanInSeconds
Time span in seconds in which the TruTops network license server is

to be queried.
-: If no value is entered, then the server will not be queried.
LOG_PATH
The path where log files of the backup are placed.
MatAliasConsiderStockSizeForGmtMapping
Stock ID and sheet size from *.GMT files are considered for the
material aliases.
MatAliasUseRemainderIdLikeStockId
0:No
1: Yes
Remainder sheet positions from *.TAF and *.TMT files are treated like
stock IDs.
0:No
1: Yes
Note: If the function is active, then a stock ID must be entered for

each remainder sheet.
MatAutoCreateSheetsDefault
MaterialIdAllowOnlyUnique
Automatically create sheets
-1: Create standard sheet.
>=0: Create remainder sheet with N quantity.
Only unique material IDs with stock IDs can be created.
MaterialInchMetricSelection
MaterialRawInchMetricSelection
MaterialRawSortOrder
0: No
1: Yes
0: Only display materials in the active system of dimensions.
1: Show all material.
0: Only display materials in the active system of dimensions.
1: Show all material.
Sorting for the display of unprocessed materials.
MFN_MaxSearchTime
Maximum time in seconds for determining multi-copy machining
MFN_PickEinzigenMfn
What does TruTops do, if an action relates to multi-copying and only

one is available.
0: Multi-copying will automatically be selected and must not be

separately clicked on. (standard)
1: Multi-copying must still be clicked on.
MultiShearTrennUeberlappung
Overlap when cutting off nibbling paths using MultiShear.
MultiShearAbstandInnenecke
Bend allowance at the end of the element for inside corners
NC_LinkLiteParameter
Call-up parameter for NcLink in LiteModus.
NC_MaintainParameter
Self-holding of the NC parameter user and job no.
S778EN
2012-04-13
0: Depending on the user, the user and job numbers are self-holding.
1: Depending on the machine, the user and job numbers are selfholding.
2-133
Value, Description
NcLinkLogType
Variable
File format of the production package.
0: If Internet Explorer version 5.0 is installed, the production package is outputted in the *.xml file format, otherwise in the *.txt file
format.
1: The production package is outputted in the *.txt file format.
2: The production package is outputted in the *.html file format.

MSXML must be installed for this.
(standard)
3: The production package is outputted in the *.xml file format. The

browser used must support XML (e.g. Internet Explorer version
5.0).
NcNameActNumber
The last serial no. when automatically forming the NC program name
according to a rule string.
NcNameActNumberFormat
The rule to form the NC program name.

Using the following wildcards, which can be used anywhere, the program name can be automatically generated:
NcNameUseFileContent
NcParaFromPPS
NcSetupPlanOptionsFromTMT
Nest_CheckPartAngles
YYYY - will be replaced by the current year.
MM - will be replaced by the current month.
DD - will be replaced by the current day.
##### - will be replaced by a consecutive number.
YYYYMMDD_##### = standard entry (produces e.g.,

20120101_00123).
Use NC program name from TMT.
0: No
1: Yes
Preset the NC program name to a value from the PPS.
0: No
1: Yes
Use setup plan output type from TMT?
0: No
1: Yes
Rotatability test for interactive placement of parts
0: Do not check.
1: Only check on rotatable GMTs.
2: Consider all rotatability settings.
Nest_NewJobNameSchema
The pattern for the names of new jobs, e.g. J<YYYY><MM><DD>n<n:

4>
Nest_NewJobPathSchema
Pattern for paths for new jobs, e.g. /TRUMPF.NET/Workfiles/<YYYY><MM>/
Nest_RotationAnglePresets
Additional list entries for the rotatability selection field, separated by

'/'. For example: 0;45;90/45.../0-90
Nest_ToolOverlapPercent
Overlap between machinings when machining with skeleton-free processing (0%-100%). Default: 50%
NestAutosaveJobfile
Automatically save job file when nesting.
2-134
0: No
1: Yes
2012-04-13
S778EN
Value, Description
Variable
NestContourFilter_OnlyWhiteSolid
Only solid white elements are given to the free geometry nesters.
0: No
1: Yes
NestDefaultProfile
Name of the default nesting profile.
NestEnableMirrorHalf
The "Mirror half" function is allowed.
NestEnableRotationOfPartWithRemoval
NestIgnorePunches
0: No
1: Yes
Release rotation of GMTs with removal.
0: Deactivated
1: Activated
The nester should note the following tool contours:
NestOrderMgmt_Create1
0: All contours.
1: Only cyan colored contours.
2: No contours.
Parameters
NestOrderMgmt_Create2
0: Query as to whether job is to be created.
1: Always create.
Enter
NestProfilePath
0: Query as to whether job is to be created.
1: Always create and go to parameters.
2: Create and do not go to parameters.
Path and mask for nesting profile files.
NestResultLogText
Write .erg files.
NestResultShowText
0: No
1: Yes
Show .erg files as result of nesting.
NestShowParametersAfterCreatingJob
NestShowParametersBeforeCreatingJob
0: No
1: Yes
Display parameter dialog after assembling the job.
0: No
1: For free geometry nester
2: For rectangle nester.
Display parameter dialog before assembling the job.
NestStoreInternalLogfiles
1: For free geometry nester
2: For rectangle nester.
Write internal log files when nesting.
NestTextInFeedback
0: No
1: Yes
Show texts in the feedback.
NestWriteTafFileCopies
S778EN
0: No
2012-04-13
0: No
1: Yes
0: Do not write copies of sheets.
1: Write each individual sheet in taf files when saving.
2-135
Value, Description
Nibbeln_GrafikErzeugung
Variable
Display of the nibbling paths.
0: Simple calculation of the nibbling track. Display as lines or

curves.
(standard)
1: Exact calculation of the nibbling track. Display of the contour

around the actual single strokes (enveloping).
NrOfFilesInCadRingBuf
Size of the ring buffer in the CAD part
NumPartsWarningDeleteSeqOfParts
Quantity of parts to be deleted after which there will be a warning

(part sequence).
OverlappingNotch
Configuration of the overlap on the prepunched hole for notches.

Piercing for cut to separate sheet out.
0: In the kerf.
1: Between two parts.
pa_def_klin_a
Measuring from margin.
pa_def_klin_c
Approach path to the sheet.
pa_def_klin_d
Withdrawal path from the sheet.
pa_def_klin_lu
Distance switch over point for distance regulation from edge.
pa_def_umlaufsinn_in
Sense of rotation around inner contour.
pa_def_umlaufsinn_out
Sense of rotation around outer contour
pa_ents_marker_typ2
Marker for unloading channel 2 (rear side, i.e. parts container 2 on

the opposite side to the operator).
pa_ents_marker_typ3
Marker for unloading channel 3 (conveyor belt/scrap container).
pa_ents_marker_typ4
Marker for unloading channel 4 (small part container).
pa_flag_deleteSheetCutParts
Flag, if all sheet cuts are to be deleted during reprocessing (0=No/

1=Yes)
pa_flag_multipeSheetCutParts
Flag, whether each sheet cut is to be generated in its own part

(0=No/1=Yes)
pa_flag_pruefe_aussenkont
Check outer contour on (parts without outer contours will be excluded

from machining).
pa_nc_zeit_pkt_abda
Operating time of the laser in seconds for point-shaped vaporizing.
Palettierung_GrafikEinheitAusgabe
Palettierung_KonfigTextAusgabe
Palettierung_StapelTextInfoAusgabe
Output of standard frame in palletizing graphics.
0: No
1: Yes
Display the name of the unloading area configuration in the diagram

showing the pallets in the setup plan.
0: No
1: Yes
Output of stack text information in palletizing graphics.
0: No
1: Yes
PalletizingDefaultMaxTotalInTheStack
Default value for max. no. of parts in the stack
PalletizingDefaultStackShiftOffsetX
Default value for offset in the X direction when shifting parts within a
stack.
PalletizingDefaultStackShiftOffsetY
Default value for offset in the Y direction when shifting parts within a
stack.
PalletizingShowAllStackItems
2-136
Show stack items in all angular positions in the stack item data mask.
0: No
1: Yes
2012-04-13
S778EN
Value, Description
Variable
PalletizingShowPalletRemarkSetupPlan
PalletizingShowUnloadingAreaLimits
PalletizingStackDefaultParts
PalletizingStackDefaultScrap
Output pallet comment text in the setup plan.
0: No
1: Yes
Output of the border lines for the valid stacking area in the diagram
showing the pallets.
0: No
1: Yes
Preset stacking specifications for good parts.
1: Depositing mandatory
2: Depositing optional
3: Soft dropping
4: Regular dropping
5: Dynamic dropping
Preset stacking specifications for waste parts.
PalletizingStackDefaultSkeleton
PalletizingStackingModeContainer
PartTimeCalculationMethod
PathfinderCollColor
3: Soft dropping
4: Regular dropping
5: Dynamic dropping
Preset stacking specifications for scrap skeleton.
3: Soft dropping
4: Regular dropping
5: Dynamic dropping
Permissible stacking types for containers.
1: all
2: Soft drop + normal drop
3: Normal drop
0: Single-part times are not issued.
1: Single-part times are calculated without sheet times.
-1 and 2: Sheet times are divided into single parts and included in
the single-part times.
If no bypass can be created for individual formings via >Optimize

>Sequence >Bypass formings, the positioning paths concerned will be
shown in the set color.
7: Magenta
(standard)
2-111)
PathfinderTimeOut
Maximum time for pathfinder calculation within a part in seconds.
PDM_minimalDatabaseSpace
Minimum required database memory (MB)
PDM_minimalDiscSpace
Minimum required space on hard disk for file storage (MB).
PDMWarningMode
Specification when PDM warnings are to be issued.
S778EN
2012-04-13
0: No warnings if files are used which are no longer up to date, or

if files are overwritten which have lots of dependencies.
2-137
Value, Description
Variable
1: Warn if files that are based on files that have been modified in
the meanwhile are to be loaded. The name of the relevant file is
specified.
Example:
A 'sample.dxf' file is used to generate a 'sample.geo' file.
The 'sample.geo' file is nested with other files on a sheet.
The 'sample.dxf' file is modified.
If the sheet is re-loaded, a message saying that the 'sample.dxf' file has been modified is displayed.
2: Warn if, when saving a file, another file is affected by the modifications. The name of the relevant file is specified.
Example:
A 'sample.geo' file is generated and saved.
The 'sample.geo' file is nested on a 'sample.taf' sheet.
The 'sample.geo' file is modified and saved again. A message

saying that the 'sample.taf' file is also affected by the modifications is displayed.
5: Warn if files that are based on modified files that have been
intermediately modified are to be loaded. The names of all the relevant files are listed.
Example:
A 'sample.dxf' file is used to generate a 'sample.geo' file.
The 'sample.geo' file is nested with other files on a sheet.
The 'sample.dxf' file is modified.
If the sheet is re-loaded, a message saying that the 'sample.dxf' file has been modified and the 'sample.geo' file is no
longer applicable is displayed.
6: Warn if, when saving a file, other files are affected by the modifications. The names of all the relevant files are listed.
Example:
A 'sample.geo' file is generated and saved.
The 'sample.geo' file is saved a 'sample.mtl' mini nest and

nested on a 'sample.taf' sheet.
The 'sample.geo' file is modified and saved again. A message

saying that the 'sample.mtl' and 'sample.taf' files are affected
by the modifications is displayed.
7: Warn if files that are based on files that have been modified in
the meanwhile are to be loaded and warn if when saving a file,
other files are also affected by the modifications. The names of all
the relevant files are listed.
For examples, see value = 5 and value = 6.
PPJ_DeleteAllPartsMode
PPJ_DeleteNotGmtIfGeoNewer
2-138
To delete the working *.gmt files of an order which has been processed, if this is deleted or reset. This applies for other jobs, if they
access exactly the same working *.gmt files.
0: No, (standard)
1: Yes
The procedure with working *.gmt files if the geometry is newer than
the working .gmt file.
0: The working *.gmt files will not be used.
1: The working *.gmt files will be used if the geometry is newer

than the working .gmt file.
2012-04-13
S778EN
Value, Description
Variable
PPJ_NcNameShortVersion
Suggestion for the name of the *.lst file.
PPJ_PartSelectMode
0: With machine designation (long form).
1: Only the job name (short form)
The control of the automatic selection of a working *.gmt file.
PrinterDialog
1: Only use your own working *.gmt file.
2: Use the last current *.gmt file.
Printing for setup plans.
ProduktionsplanFormular
1: The screen to select the printer will be displayed.
3: The setup plan will be printed on the default printer with no further interaction.
Style sheet for production package (machines without tabular display).
PRP_UseMachTransPath
Punch_CheckEngraveColor
The color of the machining steps which are to be engraved.
0: Drawing Color
3: Yellow
4: Green
5: Cyan
2-111)
Punch_CheckEngraveLine
Line type of the geometries to be engraved.
0: Solid
(standard)
2-111)
Punch_CheckPunchColor
The color of the contours to be considered during automatic machining.
-1: All.
1: Only those in the drawing color.
2-111)
Punch_CheckPunchLine
Line type of the geometries to be punched.
0: Solid
(standard)
2-111)
Punch_CheckSample
Processing sample should only take into account contours in color

that is to be punched (Punch_CheckPunchColor)
0: No
1: Yes
Punch_DistancePunchDie
Distance between punch and die. Required for the ejecting tool.
Punch_OpenFlapYMovement
Movements in the Y direction for flexible optimization with the flap

open.
PunchMicrojointIsRemovalProcessing
S778EN
2012-04-13
0: Permitted.
1: Not permitted.
Microjoints will be treated as a removal.
0: No
1: Yes
2-139
Value, Description
RawMaterialMultplNamesForSameAllowed
RemovalToolPartWise
Variable
IDs for identical unprocessed materials.
0: Only one ID allowed.
1: Any number of IDs allowed.
Only applies to TruPunch 3000 (S11).

For those parts whose inner breakouts/single strokes are done by the
same tool as is doing the machining/removal, the machining operations should be done immediately before the removal of the part.
0: Processing operations are not done immediately before the

removal.
1: Processing operations are done immediately before the removal.
ReplacePartMaxContourCount
max. number of part contours for searching for an equal part on the
sheet.
Sc_KennzNotBearbGeo
Evaluation of the settings for contours which cannot be processed.

The settings can be modified under General 2 in the parameters for
the laser rules. Modify settings: (see "Parameters for the rules", pg.
2-98).
Sc_Krit_Geo
0: The settings are evaluated.
1: The settings are evaluated.

(standard)
Evaluation of the color information during laser cutting. Cyan colored

points will be point marked. Yellow lines will be marked.
ScrollcustomerNameDefaultOf
ScrollmaterialIDDefaultOf
ScrolltruMachineNameDefaultOf
ScrolluserDefaultOf
0: Color information will be evaluated.
1: Color information will not be evaluated.

(standard)
The value corresponds to the number of files which are searched to

the following criteria:
ScrollcustomerNameDefaultOf: customer name.
ScrollmaterialIDDefaultOf: material.
ScrolltruMachineNameDefaultOf: machine.
ScrolluserDefaultOf: user.
The most frequent entry will be set as the default.

ScrollCustomerNameMaxNumber
The maximum number of entries in the field "Customer/order no." in

the "Generate NC program" screen .
ScrollCustomerNameSortOrder
The sorting of the entries in the field "Customer/order no." in the

"Generate NC program"screen .
ScrollDrawingNoteMaxNumber
ScrollDrawingNoteSortOrder
ScrollOrderNumberMaxNumber
2-140
AZ: Alphabetical sort, from A upwards.
ZA: Alphabetical sort, from Z downwards.
TIME: Sort from the last entry used, downwards.
The max. number of entries in the selection list box for drawing comments
The sort order for the selection list box with drawing comments.
The max. number of entries in the selection list box for order numbers
2012-04-13
S778EN
Value, Description
Variable
ScrollOrderNumberSortOrder
ScrollPartIdNumberMaxNumber
ScrollPartIdNumberSortOrder
The sort order for the selection list box with order numbers.
The max. number of entries in the selection list box for part identity
numbers
The sort order for the selection list box with part identity numbers.
ScrolltruMachineNameDefaultOf
Number of files that are to be examined for the default suggestion.
ScrolluserDefaultOf
Number of files that are to be examined for the default suggestion.
ScrollUserMaxNumber
The maximum number of entries in the "User" field in the "Generate

NC program" screen .
ScrollUserSortOrder
The sort order of the entries in the "User" field in "Generate NC program screen" screen.
SetupPlanBlankThicknessFromLTT
SetupPlanDimFactor
Determine the thickness of the pre-cut blank material.
0: From the sheet material.
1: From the LTT material.
Scaling factor for the dimensions in the setup plan (0 = no dimensions)
SetupPlanFitPartId
Optimization of the position of part IDs in the setup plan.
SetupPlanTimeformatGeneralData
0: No
1: Yes
Format for total time in the setup plan.
SetupPlanTimeformatSinglePart
Sheet_WasteType
%#H : %M : %S [h:min:s]: Example, (standard)
Format for the single part time in the setup plan.

%q2 min: Example, (standard)
Type of waste calculation.
0: Effective parts area.

(standard)
1: Outer contours.
2: Circumscribing rectangle.
SimuPunchDefaultPathWidthOfRollerTool
Default width of the roller tools in the simulation.
SimuPunchMaxRadiusOfIgnoredScrap
Maximum outer circle radius to ignore unintentionally released small

parts for the 2-dimentional simulation. Parts up to the specified size
will be ignored in the nibbling simulation.
SinglePartDrawMode
Views in single part draw mode.
SRW_T1Sr_APPROACHING_WITH_ANGLE
S778EN
0: The complete sheet and the machine is displayed.
1: Only the machining of the parts is shown, but not the edge of
the sheet or the clamps.
Flag, whether the approach flag should be produced with angle correction for rectangles (for APS).
2012-04-13
0: No
1: Yes
2-141
Value, Description
Variable
ST_AktiviereBiegeMenue
Attaches bending line menu into the CAD part.
StartWithFirstToolEachPartGroup
For execution of a sheet with part groups, it can be specified whether

a tool change should be done from one part group to the other.
0: Tool change to the first tool of the list is carried out.
1: No tool change; continue working with the active tool.
ST_BendTypeAutoCorrect
1: Bending method and technology (pre/final bend) are automatically

corrected.
ST_BmpPath
If set, this path is always fixed.
ST_BmpPathModal
The file type will memorize its own 'LastUsedDirectory'.
ST_BmtPath
For *.bmt files:

Path to the folder which is displayed by default when opening or saving the file type.
ST_BmtPathModal
ST_CadCoordinateColor
ST_CheckKeepOffZones
ST_DwgfPathModal
For *.bmt files: The last selected folder will be displayed again when
opening or closing.
0: No
1: Yes
Determines the color of the coordinate system in the drawing part

(red, green, blue, yellow, cyan, magenta, white).
Activate the dead area check.
c_ask: Query whether the dead area check should be done.
c_yes; conduct dead area test.
c_no; do not conduct dead area test.
For *.dwgf files:

ST_DwgPath
For *.dwgf files:

The last selected folder will be displayed again when opening or closing.
ST_DxfPath
0: No
1: Yes
For *.dxf files:

ST_DxfPathModal
For *.dxf files:

0: No
1: Yes
ST_FsLoaderMask
To activate the command line file selector: set the value to M_LoaderKommandoZeile.
ST_GeoGmtPath
For *.geogmt files (only in the Nest application): Path to the folder
which is displayed by default when opening or saving the file type.
ST_GeoGmtPathModal
For *.geogmt files: The last selected folder will be displayed again
when opening or closing.
0: No
1: Yes
ST_GifPath
ST_GifPathModal
2-142
2012-04-13
S778EN
Value, Description
Variable
ST_GraPath
For *.gra files (only in the Nest application):

ST_GraPathModal
For *.gra files:

ST_IgsPath
0: No
1: Yes
For *.igs files (only in the Nest application):

ST_IgsPathModal
For *.igs files:

ST_IgsSaveExt
0: No
1: Yes
For *.igs files:

File ending when saving.
ST_IgsSelect
IGS: (standard)
For *.igs files:

Reg. expr. for the file display
ST_JpgPath
ST_JpgPathModal
ST_LAS_LttRingBufAnz
Number of LTT ring buffer entries in the Tube application.
ST_LAS_NcEinrPlanMaxAnzLines
Maximum number of lines in the text setup plan.
ST_LAS_NcEinrPlanUnterProgBin
Output subprogram information in the old set-up schedule (*.EIN):

yes=4, no=0.
ST_LAS_NcProgrNrFilterByRegExpression
Generate numerical program names from the name of the NC file

(c_no = no, c_yes = yes).
ST_LAS_NcProgNrLikeFileName
Preallocate alphanumeric program names with the names of the NC

file (c_no = no, c_yes = yes).
Actual value = c_no: "Program name" and "Name of the NC file"

are independent from one another.
Actual value = c_yes: "Program name" and "Name of the NC file"

are matched to one another.
ST_LAS_NcZeitausgabe
NC time output (0-none, 1-times after each block, 2-timer, 3-all).
ST_LAS_NoSprintlasWarning
No warning message for machines without SprintLine.
ST_MiPath
For *.mi files (only in the Nest application):

ST_MiPathModal
For *.mi files:

S778EN
2012-04-13
0: No
1: Yes
2-143
Value, Description
Variable
ST_MiSaveExt
For *.mi files:

File ending when saving.
ST_MiSelect
IGS: (standard)
For *.mi files:

Reg. expr. for the file display
ST_NcMakeRemarkPersistent
Set comment texts to be self-holding when generating *.lst files for

future sessions.
0: No
1: Yes
ST_NoHilfsGeoOnInit
Prevents the generation of auxiliary lines for 0/0 when loading the
files in CAD.
ST_NumInputWithMouse
A calculator will be displayed for input fields where a numerical value

can be entered.
0: Deactivated
1: Activated
ST_PngPath
ST_PngPathModal
ST_ReplaceArcWithLineError
Replace arcs with a single line when loading a drawing if the maximum chordal error is smaller than the given tolerance value.
ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonDistance
ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonMinLength
ST_TAF_MatSelectMaschine
10000: (standard)
Presetting for sheet grain.
ST_SelRingBufAnz
4.0: (standard)
Replace arcs with a line during loading of a drawing if the radius of

the arc is larger than the given radius. The fewest possible lines are
always generated. If the replacement fails, the arc remains unaffected.
ST_SchachtelAuftragTafelWalzRichtung
00.001: (standard)
This value indicates the minimum length of a line when replacing an

arc that is too large with a line (see ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonRadius).
ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonRadius
00.001: (standard)
Indicates the maximum permissible error for the replacement of a

banana with a large radius (see ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonRadius).
If this value is reduced, then more lines are generated.
1: X direction.
2: Y direction.
3: Arbitrary.
Ring buffer size

Material selection in sheet part with machine filter
0: No
1: Yes
ST_TifPath
ST_TifPathModal
ST_TtfPath
For *.ttf files:

2-144
2012-04-13
S778EN
Value, Description
Variable
ST_TtfPathModal
For *.ttf files:

0: No
1: Yes
ST_VlgSelRingBufAnz
Ring buffer size for templates
ST_WindowPanFaktor
Factor and direction of the movement arrows for the graphics window
T1Sr_APPROACHING_LINE_MIDDLE
Flag=1: Linear part of the approach path is centrally positioned, relative to the line element (for APS).
T1Sr_IGNORE_FORM_PREFERRED
Flag=1: Preferred element will be ignored when approaching (line/

curve) (for APS).
T2SrMasL_PRAT_COLOR
The color of the clamps.
3: Yellow
(standard)
2-111)
T2SrNcL_CELL_INTERFACE
TcPartBitmapCreateAlways
Generate a file which contains data for TC-CELL.
0: File will not be generated.
1: File will be generated. It will have the same name as the *.lst
file, but with the extension *.cel.
To generate *.bmp files for parts when producing production packages.
TcPartBitmapGraphicFormat
0: Deactivated
1: Activated
Format for image files for parts in the setup plan.
BMP: *.bmp file (quick generation, large file).
GIF: *.gif file.
JPG: *.jpg file (slow generation, small file).
PNG: *.png file.
SVG: *.svg file.
TcPartBitmapHeight
The size of the single part image in the html setup plan in the Y
direction, in pixels.
TcPartBitmapMonochrome
The mode of the single part images in the *.html setup plan.
0: Colored
1: Black & white
TcPartBitmapWidth
The size of the single part image in the html setup plan in the X
direction, in pixels.
TcSheetBitmapCreateAlways
To generate *.bmp files for sheets when producing production packages.
TcSheetBitmapGraphicFormat
S778EN
2012-04-13
0: Deactivated
1: Activated
Format for image files for sheets in the setup plan.
BMP: *.bmp file (quick generation, large file).
GIF: *.gif file.
JPG: *.jpg file (slow generation, small file).
PNG: *.png file.
SVG: *.svg file.
2-145
Value, Description
TcSheetBitmapHeight
Variable
The height of the sheet image in the *.html setup plan in pixels.
TcSheetBitmapMonochrome
TcSheetBitmapWidth
440: (standard)
The mode of the sheet image file in the *.html setup plan.
0: Colored
1: Black & white, (standard)
The width of the sheet image in the *.html setup plan in pixels.
580: (standard)
TeileAutoID
Part ID no. that is automatically allocated to parts without a part ID.
TeileAutoIDAusGeoFilename
automatic part ID is generated from the geo file name and not from
the TeileAutoID variable.
TestCollisionPierceAndSupportWebPoint
TextFarbeTeileNummer
0: Deactivated
1: Activated
See and check piercing points as collisions via points of support (=1
Check/ =0 Do not check)
Text color for sheet information
1: White, (standard)
2-111)
TextPosition_TafelInfo_Y
Text position for sheet information
TextSize_Ueberfahrbereiche
Text size for designation of overtravel area for combination machines.
TimeOutputPlusAxis
1: Time for plus machine is outputted in the setup plan 0: time for
plus machine is not outputted
TolForCollisionPierceSupportWebPoint
Tolerance for collision test of carrier slat/piercing spot.
Tool_CollColor
Color of the collision contours of tools. The default color is red.

2-111)
Tool_CollisionType
The types of contour considered when displaying collisions (multiple

selections are possible by adding).
Tool_InfoColor
1: Cut contours
2: Collision contours
3: Cutting and collision contours (standard)
4: Information contours
The color of the tool information contours. The default color is yellow.
2-111)
Tool_PunchColor
Color of the cutting contours of tools. Default: cyan.

2-111)
ToolAutomaticImportDir
ToolMirrorSpecialTool
ToolMountingAngleAsDefault
2-146
The directory for the automatic import of tools into the integrated tool
management system.
Behavior during mirroring special tools.
0: Delete.
1: Mirroring position.
Insertion angle should be default angle for single stroke, not zero
degrees position.
2012-04-13
S778EN
Value, Description
Variable
ToolPersistenceLayerType
The source of the tool data.
0: From the local database.
1: From the integrated tool management system.
'TOPS_PWD'
Working directory for ToPs. Overwrites the INI environment entry

TOPS_PWD. (If empty, then the last working directory will be used)
ToPsEasyAutoStart
Simple programming should be started at the time of entering the

applications.
0: No
1: Yes
TwinLineMaxOverlapPercElementLength
The value by which a TwinLine machining process may protrude into

an adjacent edge (in percent of the element length)
TwinLineMaxOverlapPercToolLength
The value by which a TwinLine machining process may protrude over

an adjacent edge (in percent of the tool length)
TwinLineMinDistToCollision
TwinLineUseStandardProcessingsOverlap
TxSrTafC_WRITE_CRG_EXT
UndoDepth_Technology
To use the default overlap values for TwinLine machining:
0: No
1: Yes
To generate an event file for TC-CELL.
-: If no value is entered, no event file will be produced.
CEL: Example: An event file will be generated for TC-CELL with

the file ending '*.cel'.
Number of actions that can be reversed with "Undo".
UseAdvancedCalculator
To active the extended calculator.
View_ActivateInFunctionNavigator
0: No
1: Yes
When changing, switch over the view in the function browser: 0=no;
1=yes.
Description of variables in the system rules
S778EN
2012-04-13
Tab. 2-49
2-147
13.
Removal rules
The rules for automatic removal are managed in the set of

removal rules.
13.1 To change priority

2. Select >Rule >Part removal.
The "Rule data for removal" screen will be displayed.
3. Mark the rules.
4. Select
or .
The priority of the system rules will be changed.
13.2 Change data

3. Mark the rules.
4. "Parts for removal", "Parameters", select "Material" or "Lift
data".
5. Modify data.
6. Press Modify.
13.3 Create Rules

3. Mark the set of rules whose data is similar to the new set.
4. Select Create....
The "Copy rules" mask is displayed.
5. Change the data under "Parts for removal", "Parameters",
"Material" and "Lift data".
6. Press OK.
The new set of rules will be displayed in the list.
2-148
Removal rules
2012-04-13
S778EN
13.4 To reset a set of rules

The set of removal rules can be reset to it default settings.
3. Select Reset.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Removal rules
2-149
14.
When processing a sheet, a user can insert their own NC texts

at any positions.
These will be entered into the defined locations in the *.lst file
when the NC program is generated. They can either be entered
directly or can be generated via so-called "Free cycles". Free
cycles are created in the data management system.
14.1 Creating a free cycle

Note
Free cycles are always created for the active machine.
Opening Management

2. Select >NC output > Free cycles.
The "Random cycles" screen will be displayed.
Enter name
3. Press Create.
The "Create cycle" mask is displayed.
Note
The name of the free cycle may not contain any special
characters, umlauts or accents. These characters will not be
displayed when inserting free cycles.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Enter the name under "Cycle name".

Press Create.
Close the message with OK.
Select Previous.
Enter NC text
8. Mark a new free cycle.

9. Enter a comment in the first line.
Notes
The NC text of the free cycle must be entered in single
inverted commas.
When generating the NC program, all input will be interpreted. For example, so-called $ variables (= placeholder)
will automatically be converted into values.
The syntax of the NC text is not checked.

10. Enter the NC text of the free cycle into the input field.
11. Select operative range.
2-150
2012-04-13
S778EN
Note
"Properties" are not relevant for TruTops Laser.
If "Unloading" is activated and the NC text of the free cycle
belongs to an outside contour, its processing will be sorted at
the end, during optimization. The part then counts as unloaded.
12. Select "Properties".
13. Under "Total cycle time", enter the processing time for the
free cycle.
14. Press Modify.
The new free cycle will then be available under >Technology
>NC cycles >Insert cycle....
14.2 To copy any cycle

It makes sense to copy a cycle if it contains similar data or if the
same cycle is to produced for a different machine.
Opening Management

Copy
3. Mark the cycle.

4. Select Copy.
The "Copy cycle" mask is displayed.
Selecting the destination

machine
5. Open "Machine" with .

The "Select machine" mask is displayed.
6. Mark the machine.
7. Select Continue.
Note
Under "Selection of cycle" all of the available cycle names
will be displayed, whatever the source machine concerned.
8. Under "Selection of cycle" mark the name.
The name will be entered under "Cycle name".
9. Change the name.
10. Select Copy.
11. Close the message with OK.
The copied free cycle is allocated to the target machine.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-151
14.3 To change any cycle

Opening Management

Change
3. Mark the cycle.

The text for the cycle will be displayed.
4. Change the comment and the NC text.
5. Press Modify.
The modifications are saved.
14.4 To delete any cycle for the active

machine
Any cycle can be removed from the selection for the active
machine.
Opening Management

To delete for the active

machine
3. Mark the cycle.

4. Press Delete.
The "Delete cycle" mask is displayed. This shows the
machine for which the free cycle was created and the name
of the free cycle.
5. Press Delete.
The cycle will be deleted from the selection for the active
machine.
14.5 To print any cycle

Note
Free cycles cannot be printed off individually, they must be printed off all at once.
Opening Management

2-152
2012-04-13
S778EN
Print
3. Select Output.
The contents of all free cycles are displayed in an editor.
4. Select Print.
The cycles will be printed using the standard printer.
14.6 To use formulas to calculate the time

You can now access the formulas for time calculation with a
daily password. The daily password is available from TRUMPF
Software Support.
Opening Management
S778EN
2012-04-13
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select >NC output >Formulas.
Enter the password.
Select Continue.
2-153
15.
NC post-processing programs,
external programs
15.1 To enter programs

NC post-processing programs or external programs can be
entered and used in TruTops. The possible settings are
explained in the following example of an NC post-processing program.
Examples:
Opening Management
*.html setup plans can be edited, each time they are generated, by an NC program using Microsoft Word.
*.lst files can be edited, each time they are generated, by an
NC program using Word.

2. Select >User >Programs.
The "External Program Settings" mask is displayed.
Setting
3. Under "User", enter trumpf.

Note
Any designation can be entered here which is not already in
use.
4. Enter "Designation".
Note
As soon as an external program (in the example Microsoft
Word) is opened in self-holding (modal) mode from within
TruTops, or if a TruTops file is opened by an external program, it will no longer be possible to interact with TruTops.
The external program must first be closed.
5.
Either
If the program is to remain open or if the modified file is
to be re-imported into the PDM file management system
then, under "Modal", select YES.
or
If the program is not to remain open then, under "Modal",

select NO.
6. If the program (e.g. to do some editing) is to be opened in its
own window then, under "Window", selectYES.
7. If a logfile is to be created:
2-154
NC post-processing programs, external programs
2012-04-13
S778EN
Under "Show log", select YES.

Under "Parameters", enter the following:
-l (in words: minus lower-case L, space), followed by
the absolute path to the logfile.
Example: l C:\TRUMPF.NET\workfiles
\user1\logfile.log
If the 'C:\TRUMPF.NET\workfiles\user1\logfile.log' log file is

created by the external program (must be programmed in
this way), TruTops displays the log file automatically after the
external program has been ended.
TruTops with PDM, version 2
8. If the external program operates with UNC paths (Windows

default): under "Export" and "Re-import", select NO.
It is not necessary to export and then re-import.
Note
If files exported from the PDM system are to be re-imported,
the file names must not be changed.
9. If the external program does not operate with UNC paths
then, under "PDM settings", make the following settings:
Set "export" to Yes.
The files to be accessed in PDM will be exported to a
temporary directory in the file system.
If the exported files are to be modified and are then to be
available again in the PDM, then set "re-import" to Yes.
(Only possible if "Modal" is active.)
The modified files will be re-imported into PDM as soon
as the program is closed.
If the program needs the files which were used to create
the NC program (*.geo, *.mtl, *.gmt, ...),then set "export
help files" to Yes.
10. To notify Microsoft Word of the location of the *lst file, under
"Parameter" enter the variable $(U).
If for example, the NC program '/TRUMPF.NET/WORKFILES/
USER1/SAMPLE.LST' is created on the PC4711 computer
and TruTops with PDM, the contents of the variables reads "\
\PC4711\TRUMPF.PDM2\TRUMPF.NET\WORKFILES\USER1
\SAMPLE.LST".
$(D)Directory = absolute directory $(E) Extension = file extension

$(N)Name = file name (without
file extension)
$(P) Path = complete path to file

Fig. 42508
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-155
$(D)Directory = absolute directory $(P) Path = complete path to file

$(N)Name = file name (without
file extension)
$(U)Path of the file (not included

in the graphics)
$(E) Extension = file extension

Fig. 43230
The variable contains "\

\PC4711\TRUMPF.PDM2\TRUMPF.NET/WORKFILES/
USER1/SAMPLE.LST".
11. Under "Program", enter the path and the name of the program.
Tip
In the example with Microsoft Word, the path and the program name would be C:\Programme\Microsoft Office
\OFFICE11\Winword.exe.
12. At "Work directory", enter the directory where the program is
to be executed
Tip
As a rule, $(D) is correct.
13. Press Create.
The program will be added to the selection field.
15.2 To execute programs

(See chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program").
15.3 Creating a collection call up for

several NC post-processing programs
Several single NC post-processing programs can be consecutively called up in a defined sequence via the 'PostprocessorCollection.bat' NC post-processing program.
Any number of 'PostprocessorCollection.bat' files can be created.
However, only one per machine can be activated as a standard.
2-156
2012-04-13
S778EN
Copying template

2. Go to the '\TRUMPF.NET\UTILS\Macros' directory.
Notes
The copies must also be in the '\TRUMPF.NET\UTILS
\Macros' directory.
The name of the file must not contain more than 14 characters.
3. Copy and rename 'PostprocessorCollectionTemplate.bat' in
the required quantity (e.g. 'PostprocessorCollection_1.bat',
'PostprocessorCollection_2.bat').
4. Open the copy (e.g. 'PostprocessorCollection_1.bat') with an
editor (e.g. Notepad).
Modifying template
Note
The line notepad %A_LST_FILENAME_STRING% in the following example of a *.bat file must be in one line.
5. Enter the NC post-processing programs to be activated in the
desired order (see highlighting).
Example:
Execute the NC post-processing program 'customer.pl'.

Open NC program using an editor.
Print the NC program using the default printer.
Corresponding entries in the *.bat file (e.g. 'PostprocessorCollection_1.bat'):

rem ----------------------------------------set A_LST_FILENAME_STRING=%1
set A_TC_PERL_PATH=%2
set A_TC_TOOL_PATH=%3
rem ----------------------------------------rem ----------------------------------------rem Here comes the list of postprocessors
rem ----------------------------------------%A_TC_PERL_PATH%\bin\perl
%A_TC_TOOL_PATH%\customer.pl
%A_LST_FILENAME_STRING%
notepad %A_LST_FILENAME_STRING%
notepad /p %A_LST_FILENAME_STRING%
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-157
rem ----------------------------------------set A_LST_FILENAME_STRING=

set A_TC_PERL_PATH=
set A_TC_TOOL_PATH=
rem ----------------------------------------Tip
The NC post-processing programs entered can be deactivate
by commenting them out with "rem" at the beginning of the
line.
Entering a collection call up
as NC post-processing
program
6. Save changes.
7. Open the Data Management of the machine for which the
NC post-processing program is to be used.
9. Enter "User", trumpf.
10. Enter "Designation", PostprocessorCollection_1 (example!).
11. Select "NC converter", YES.
12. Select "Modal", YES.
13. Select "Window", YES.
14. Select "Show log", NO.
15. Select "export", "re-import" and "export help files", NO.
Note
The following list must be extended or shortened according
to the entered post-processing program.
16. Under "Parameters", enter
$(P) $(TOPS_PERL_PATH)$(TOPS_APP_UTILS_PATH)
eingeben.
These transfer parameters are adapted to the 'PostprocessorCollectionTemplate.bat' template and mean the following
in the above-mentioned example:
$(P): Name of the generated NC program.
$(TOPS_PERL_PATH): Path to PERL.
$(TOPS_APP_UTILS_PATH): Path to the product-specific

tools.
17. Under "Program": enter $(TOPS_MACROS_PATH)\PostprocessorCollection_1.bat.
Note
The NC post-processing program selected last is set as the
standard for the active machine. The standard holds for all
TruTops users.
2-158
2012-04-13
S778EN
18. Select Create.

TruTops adds the NC post-processing program in the selection field.
Tip
Activate the NC post-processing program: see chapter
"Machining parts, generating an NC program".
15.4 To modify programs

Opening Management

Modify parameter
3. Select the program.

The program data is entered in the mask header.
4. Modify parameters (see "To enter programs", pg. 2-154).
5. Press Modify.
15.5 To delete programs

Note
Programms which are delivered with TruTops may not be
deleted.
Opening Management

Delete

The program data is entered in the mask header.
4. Press Delete.
The program will be deleted from the selection field.
S778EN
2012-04-13
2-159
16.
Note
User-defined programs are managed centrally for all applications.
16.1 To enter programs

Opening Management

2. Select >User >TruTops functions.
The "User-defined TruTops functions" mask is displayed.
Create a program
3. Enter any name that you wish for the program under "Command name".
Note
The standard path for the user-defined programs is '
\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\UserFunctions'.
4. Enter the path and file name of the program which was supplied by TRUMPF under "Shell script".
5. Select the desired applications under "Modules with visible
command".
6. Press Create.
16.2 To change programs

Opening Management

2. Select >User >TruTops functions.
The "User-defined TruTops functions" mask is displayed.
Modifying data

4. Modify data.
5. Press Modify.
16.3 To run programs

1. Leave the data management via Exit.
2. Select >File >Execute...
3. Click on a user-defined program.
The program is running.
2-160
2012-04-13
S778EN
Chapter 3
Nesting parts
1
"Nest" application
3-4
1.1
3-5
1.2
Enable snapping
3-6
Nesting jobs
3-7
2.1
3-8
2.2
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-11
3-12
3-23
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-27
3-27
3-27
3-28
3-28
3-28
Nesting parts
3-1
2.3
3-2
Nesting parts
3-29
3-29
3-30
3-32

axis
3-34
3-34
3-34
3-36
Editing part grids
3-36

another
3-37
Placing parts at exact distance for common cuts (TwinLine
3-39
Deleting parts
3-40
Deleting sheets
3-41
3-41
3-41
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-47
3.1
Creating new sheet
3-47
3.2
Creating a nesting job from a single sheet
3-50
3.3
3-50

layout
3-50
3-51
Sectional sheet layout (multi-copy processing)
3-51

3-53
Remainder sheets
3-55
4.1
Defining remainder sheets with any geometry
3-55
4.2
3-55
4.3
3-56
MiniNest
3-57
5.1
Creating a MiniNest
3-57
5.2
3-57
2012-04-13
S778EN
5.3
5.4
S778EN
2012-04-13
Modifying MiniNests
3-58
Moving MiniNests
3-58
Rotating MiniNests
3-60

MiniNests
3-62
Distancing single parts of mini nests for common separating cuts (TwinLine
3-62
... by moving
3-62
... by rotating
3-63
3-64
6.1
3-64
6.2
Displaying sheets with machine environment
3-64
6.3
Displaying sheet with automation components
3-65
3-66
7.1

parts
3-66
7.2
Displaying the scrap of a sheet or the total

sheet waste
3-66
7.3

parts
3-67
7.4
3-68
3-69
8.1
Defining parameters
3-69
Nesting parts
3-3
1.
"Nest" application
The "Nest" application can be used to create and manage nesting jobs. The nesting processor can calculate the sheet layout
according to different strategies using identical or different single
parts. There is a selection of 2 different nesting processors. Both
processors work according to the "free geometry" (optional) or
"extended rectangle" principle.
Minimum number of pieces
Maximum number of pieces
File name
Act. number of pieces
Part drawing
Part dimensions
Nest application
3-4
"Nest" application
Fig. 50650en
2012-04-13
S778EN
Changing the parts display - all 4

parts are displayed either in the
maximum size or relative to
5
one another
Hanging the part on the mouse
Selecting a new part
Modifying the parts sorting - as

per the name or size
In case of single sheet view:
mark all identical parts on the
sheet
Opening the mask with part
parameters
Functions in nest
1.1
Fig. 51009
The permissible position of the parts can be checked when laying out a sheet and during free movement and copying of parts.
At the same time, the parts to be laid out are attached to the
mouse and colored green. When moving parts over one another,
when positioning them outside the sheet or in the case of an
excessively less sheet distance, TruTops displays the parts at
the mouse in red. These parts cannot be positioned.
1. Activate>Tools >Consider parts.
2. In order to define the distance that is to be maintained
between the parts: select>Tools >Consider parts parameters
and define the distance.
Tip
The distance can be modified through >Layout >Create
>Consider parts parameter.
3. Activate >Tools >Consider sheet edge.
The allowed position on the sheet is determined and the parts
are displayed in green. For critical positions, such as when there
is too little part distance or when parts are positioned outside the
sheet, the parts are displayed red.
S778EN
2012-04-13
"Nest" application
3-5
1.2
Enable snapping
Activate >Extras >Catching.

When picking using the mouse pointer, the pick point on a
nearby point is corrected (provided one exists).
3-6
"Nest" application
2012-04-13
S778EN
2.
Nesting processors
Two nesting processors are integrated into the "Nest" application,

which nest the part drawings (single part drawings or mini nests)
on the sheet according to various criteria:
Nesting job
Nesting jobs
The rectangle nesting processor uses the circumscribing rectangle of the parts as part limits.
The free geometry nesting processor takes into account the
actual geometry of the single part or mini nest drawing
(optional).
The parts to be nested and the quantities in which they are to be

nested are defined in the nesting job. In order to achieve optimum sheet usage, Nest takes into account all parts and their
possible combinations when nesting (which are always between
a minimal and a maximum number of pieces). The nesting job
can be created with Nest or can be read in by a higher-level
system (ASCII file).
Example 1: Nesting identical

parts
Fig. 19814
Example 2: Nesting different

parts
Fig. 19813
Defining nesting options
S778EN
2012-04-13
Various nesting options can be selected (e.g. enable internal surfaces for sheet layout, degree of optimization of the nesting proc-
Nesting jobs
3-7
ess, positioning direction of the parts... ). The optimal strategy

can be selected depending on the geometry of the different parts
to be nested. Either the part geometry or the circumscribing rectangle is the basis for the nesting.
Result log
Nesting remainder sheets
Creating sample parts
The sheets with the nesting result are shown in a graphic on the
screen. The results log (file) contains the following information:
the total number of parts nested, the number of sheets created
etc. Messages are also shown to explain why it may not have
been possible to nest certain parts.
If remainder sheets are left over after machining, these remainder sheets can be additionally used when nesting.
Sample parts can be nested using the free geometry nesting
processor (optional). The quality of the cut parts can be checked
with the sample part at the beginning of the production.
Sample parts can only be manufactured with the selected parts
of a nesting job.
Allocating nesting job to

customer
Influencing sheet layout

manually
When parts are entered in a nesting job, they can be allocated

to a customer. When the same part has to be produced for several customers within a nesting job, it can be allocated to several
customers.
The generated sheets can be arbitrarily modified:
Deleting individual parts on the sheet.

Adding parts to the sheet.
Changing the position of single parts.
...
2.1
Defining angle for possible
rotation
When nesting with the free geometry nesting processor, an

incremental angle by which the parts may be rotated when nesting, can be allocated to parts for which any rotation is possible.
In case of an incremental angle of 45, for example, Nest examines the absolute angles 0, 45, 90, 135, ..., 315. The more
precisely the incremental angle is selected, the greater the computational effort required by Nest.
If you only enter one value (e.g. 90), only this fixed angle of
rotation is used for nesting.
Tip
Select the angle of rotation increment on the basis of the geometry of the affected part: rotation makes no noticeable difference
3-8
2012-04-13
S778EN
in the nesting result with parts that are nearly round; an angle of
rotation increment of 90 often suffices for parts that are mainly
square or rectangular.
When nesting with a rectangle nester, the system only checks

whether the part is marked as rotatable. If it is, the single part is
rotated by 90 if this will produce a better nesting result. The
angle of rotation you have entered is not taken into account for
this rotation.
TwinLine Processing
With TwinLine processing (common cut), the part distance for

nesting is set to match the exact width of the tool being used.
This allows the system to process both adjacent parts in just one
processing movement. There is no web between the parts.
TwinLine processing can be used on individual parts within a
nesting job or on all the parts in the job.
A defined quantity of TwinLine parts can also be placed directly
on the sheet in an X or Y direction .
Web-free processing
Positioning parts in a frame
S778EN
2012-04-13
In contrast to TwinLine processing, for web-free processing an

additional distance is added to the tool width to get the distance
between two parts. The web on the second part that is left over
once the first part has been processed is removed when the
second part is subsequently processed.
If you select "Position in frame", the nest distributes the sheets
across a rectangular frame according to the size and shape of
the part, positioning them regularly. In case of different parts,
various frame divisions can appear within a sheet. "Position in
frame" is suitable for L-shaped, rectangular and C/V-shaped
parts. Parts with a circular outer contour are unsuitable. "Position
in frame" can be used to improve material usage and create
more homogenous nesting patterns.
3-9
Allocating priority
Parts not positioned in the frame
Fig. 43221
Parts positioned in the frame
Fig. 43220
When nesting using the free geometry nesting processor, a place

value can be allocated to each single part.
The lower the number, the higher the priority and thus the likelihood that Nest will nest that part first.
3-10
2012-04-13
S778EN
Examples:
A part with priority two is preferred over a part with priority

three during sheet layout.
Parts with the same priority are sorted according to their
area. (One starts with the part with the largest area.)

Note
There are "Tooltips" for the individual functions within the screen.
If you hover over a function with the cursor, the corresponding
tooltip is displayed with notes, descriptions or help.
Starting a job
Note
When a nesting job is created for the first time, a default
sheet with the dimensions 2000 x 1000 mm and the sheet
material St37-10 is displayed. This data can be modified
when the parameters are entered. When a new nesting job is
created, the material from the last job is used as the default.
1. Select >File >New >Job....
The "Parts" screen appears.
Selecting parts
Note
If "Properties from file" is activated in the Parts screen, the
information saved in the GEO file (e.g. angle of rotation) is
applied when a part is selected.
2. Select Add part... in the Parts screen.
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
Tip
Clicking on the preview window of the parts mask opens the
GEO-Viewer, which can be used to zoom in to sections of
parts.
3. Mark the part that should be adopted in the nesting job.
or
To adopt several parts in the job: press <Ctrl> or <Shift> and
left click.
4. Select OK.
The selected parts are applied in the parts screen.
Entering parts data
5. Highlight the desired part in the table.

The parts data is displayed in the "Part" tab.
6. Enter the desired parts data in the "Part" tab.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-11
or
Click directly on the desired table cell in the table in the parts
screen and enter the value.
Defining the number of parts
Note
If a minimum and a maximum quantity is specified, only the
minimal quantity (required quantity) is nested at first. Once all
required quantities of a nesting job have been fulfilled and
there is still sufficient space on the sheet, then this space will
be filled with the remaining parts until the maximum quantity
has been reached. These parts are called filling parts.
7. Enter the desired number of pieces under "Number of
pieces".
or
Select Min/Max and enter the desired minimum and maximum number of pieces.
Defining the angular position
8. Enter the desired angle of rotation under Angular position.

or
Enter the desired angular positions directly.
Defining distance mode
Use a semicolon to separate multiple entries.

Example: 0;30;55
9. Set the desired mode under Distance mode. The parts distances used in the different modes are defined in the nesting
parameters.
Grid machining
TwinLine
Web-free processing
10. Once all the values have been entered, select OK.
The "Nesting parameters" mask is displayed.
11. Defining nesting parameters (see "Defining nesting parameters", pg. 3-12).

Nesting parameters are dependent on the selected nesting processor and can be either compiled during the nesting job or can
be defined after it.
Defining sheet data

The three nesting modes "Multi-format", "Optimum sheet format"
and "Sequence" can be used to generate different nesting var-
3-12
2012-04-13
S778EN
iants. (This option is only available for the free geometry nesting
processor.)
Multi-format: With the Multi-format nesting mode, nesting jobs

can be nested on sheets of various sizes. One only needs to
select the different sheet formats and Nest determines the
best sheet combination.
Optimum sheet format: With the Optimum sheet format nesting mode, Nest selects the optimum sheet format for the
nesting job and lays out sheets only with this sheet size.
Sequence: With the Sequence nesting mode, Nest adheres
to a specified sequence of the sheets when nesting.
Condition
Opening sheet data
A nesting job, whose parameters are to be defined, is

present. (See section "Compiling a new nesting job".)
1. Select >Job >Parameters >Free geometry... or >Ext. Rectangle.

2. Select the "Sheet data" tab.
Sheets from the material selection, from the remainder sheet
management and the last entered sheets are listed in the
selection field.
3. Select "Unprocessed material ID" with .
The "Unprocessed material ID" screen appears.
Tip
Activating "Top10" causes only the ten most frequently used
raw material IDs to be displayed.
Selecting nesting mode
4. Mark the desired unprocessed material ID.

5. Open "Nesting mode" using .
6. To use different sheet formats when nesting nesting jobs:
select Multi-Format.
or
To use the optimum sheet format for the nesting job: select
Optimum sheet format.
or
To adhere to the specified sequence of the sheets when
nesting: select Sequence.
Adding new sheet
7. To add new sheets to the selection field: select Add.

The "Sheet" screen appears.
Manually entering sheet

dimensions
S778EN
2012-04-13
8. Checkmark "Rectangular sheet".

9. Enter dimensions and number of sheets.
3-13
10. Press OK.

The "Create remainder sheet/blank" screen is displayed.
11. Select "Remainder sheet" or "Standard sheet".
Remainder sheet: The sheet is saved in remainder sheet
management
Standard sheet: The sheet is saved in standard sheet
management.
12. Enter"Stock ID/Storage location" and "Number of remainder
sheets", if necessary.
13. Press OK.
or
Select Cancel.
Adding sheet with arbitrary

sheet geometry
The sheet can be used for the job, but will not be saved
in either remainder sheet management or standard sheet
management.
14. To select sheet geometries, e.g. remainder sheets in the
'TRG' format: open "Arbitrary sheet geometry" using
Modifying existing sheet
Modifying the sequence of

the sheets
Delete sheet
15. Select the desired file and Press OK..

16. To modify the sheet data of an existing sheet: mark the
desired sheet in the selection field.
17. Select Modify.
18. Modify desired data for the sheet.
19. Press OK.
20. Mark the sheet to be rearranged in the selection field.
21. With the arrows next to the selection field: move the sheet
up or down.
22. To delete a sheet from the selection field: mark the sheet in
the selection field.
23. Select Delete.
Defining options for a nesting job

Condition
Opening options
A nesting job, whose parameters are to be defined, is

present. (See section "Compiling a new nesting job".)
1. Select >Job >Parameters >Free geometry... or >Ext. Rectangle....

Entering the part distance
3-14
2. Select the "Options" tab.

3. In case of free geometry nesting processor: enter the minimum distance between the parts.
2012-04-13
S778EN
or
In case of ext. rectangle nesting processor: enter the distances in X and Y direction.
Defining sheet margins
Left margin
Right margin
Upper margin
Lower margin
Margins of a sheet
Fig. 21867
4. If all the sheet margins have a consistent distance: check

"Consistent" and enter distance.
or
If sheet margins have different distances: Enter the distances
for "Left", "Right", "Top" and "Bottom".
Filling the last sheet
5. To set the entered margin and part distances for this material
as standard: checkmark "Adopt sheet margins and webs as
default".
6. Check "Filler parts only until nesting height".
The last sheet is filled with more parts only in the occupied
section. A remainder sheet can, for example, be defined from
the empty section.
Fig. 50653
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-15
7. If the minimum number of parts is less than the maximum

number of parts: check "Fill last sheet".
Select Complete sheet: The last sheet is completely
occupied with the maximum possible number of parts.
Select until nesting height: the last sheet is only occupied
up to the defined nesting height (see "Fig. 50653", pg.
3-15).
Occupying internal surfaces
Internal surfaces
Fig. 4776
8. Check "internal surfaces".

The internal surfaces of a part are enabled for sheet layout
with parts. This strategy is available for parts with large internal surfaces.
Placing several parts in internal surfaces which become

continuously free
Fig. 9121
In such a case, the internal surfaces are automatically enabled for several planes.
3-16
2012-04-13
S778EN
Occupying external surfaces
Outer surface of parts

Fig. 4778
Note
This option is possible only with the rectangle nesting processor.
9. Under external surfaces, select how the external surfaces
should be occupied:
"Do not use" No external surfaces are occupied.
"Use partwise": The external surfaces of a part are enabled for the sheet layout with parts. This strategy is available for parts with large external surfaces.
"Use sheetwise": The external surfaces of several parts
are practically compiled into one residual surface and
occupied with parts. (This strategy is available when a
mixture of large and many small parts is to be nested.)
External surface, over the

entire sheet
Single parts
Fig. 29880
Determining the start part
Note
This option is possible only with the rectangle nesting processor.
10. Select the desired box:
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-17
"Area": The nest begins with the part with the largest
area.
"Dimension in X direction": The nest begins with the part
that has the largest dimension in the X direction.
"Dimension in Y direction": The nest begins with the part
that has the largest dimension in the Y direction.
"Dimension in X or Y direction": The nest begins with the
part with the longest edges.
"Part priority first": Nest takes into account the part priority set in the nesting job.
The nesting processor begins nesting with the part that has
been defined as the start part.
Generate identical sheets
Note
This option is possible only with the free geometry nesting
processor.
11. Select "Generate identical sheets".
When only identical sheets are generated, correspondingly
fewer NC programs must be manually modified / optimized.
The generated NC program can only be repeated n number
of times on the machine.
12. Enter minimum utilization.
The tolerated waste can be entered with the utilization rate.
Observing the direction of

rolling of the sheet
13. Under "Rolling direction", open the selection field with .

14. Select direction of rolling:
X direction: part is either not rotated or rotated by 180.
Y direction: part is either not rotated or rotated by 90 or
270.
Do not consider: Direction of rolling is not observed.
Sheetwise: The rolling direction is defined separately for
each sheet.
The selected direction of rolling is displayed as follows in the
sheet overview:
X direction: Y direction:
*: do not consider direction of the grain:
Defining positioning
direction
3-18
15. Select the positioning direction:

X direction: The sheet is laid out horizontally from the
start corner.
Y direction: The sheet is laid out vertically from the start
corner.
Automatic: The positioning direction is defined automatically.
2012-04-13
S778EN
Positioning direction vertical
Positioning direction horizontal

Tab. 3-1
Tip
If the positioning direction is selected automatically, it is
dependent on the selected nesting profile (see "Nesting with
nesting profiles").
All sheets apart from the last one are occupied in the direction that gives the most efficient sheet usage.
However, the last sheet may be occupied in the direction of
the narrowest sheet margin, so that the remainder sheet has
more useful proportions (= not long and thin).
Defining start corners
S778EN
2012-04-13
16. Click on "Start corner"
3-19
Start corner = corner of sheet at which the sheet layout is

started. The selected start corner remains unaffected when
the sheet formats are changed.
TruLaser Serie 3000 1

TruLaser Serie 5000
4
TruLaser 2525
TruLaser 2025
TruLaser 2030
Start corner in the example of some machines
Defining nesting accuracy
Fig. 50376
Note
processor. The greater the degree of nesting accuracy, the
greater the computation effort and memory required. A freely
defined nesting accuracy is particularly recommended in case
of filigree parts or small part distances. 1/5 to 1/10 of the
part distance can be used as the standard value. Material
utilization can vary up to 10% depending on the nesting
accuracy.
17. Under "Nesting accuracy", open the selection field with .
Low: The nesting accuracy is at its lowest, the computation goes the fastest.
...
High: Nesting accuracy is at its greatest, the computation
takes the longest.
or
Check "Freely defined" and enter the grid for the optimization.
Nesting with nesting profiles
Note
processor.
18. Under "Nesting profiles", open the selection field with .
The "Nesting profile selection" mask is displayed.
3-20
2012-04-13
S778EN
19. Select one or more nesting profiles from the list (descriptions
are shown in the right-hand text field).
When multiple nesting profiles are selected, the system starts
with the "quickest" nesting profile and works through the
other nesting profiles in sequence. The best nesting profile is
then adopted as the nesting result.
20. Press OK.
Nest nests the parts with the defined parameter settings of the
relevant nesting profile.
Defining part distances

Condition
The nesting job contains TwinLine-suitable parts.

2. Select the "Part distances" tab.
3. Under Tool size, define the tool size/diameter of the laser
beam for "X" and "Y".
or
Checkmark "X/Y consistent" if the X and Y dimensions are
the same.
4. Select LTT selection.
The "Machine selection" mask is displayed.
5. Mark the machine with which the nesting job is to be processed.
6. Press OK.
The "Selection of technology tables" mask is displayed.
7. Select technology table and rules.
The kerf width (and thus the part distance between the contours, which is to be cut using common cuts) is now established.
Note
The part distances must correspond to the kerf width from
the technology table with which the nesting job will be processed later. (Description of the technology tables(Description
of the technology tables (see chapter "Setting basic data"))
8. Press OK.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-21
9. Under "Grid processing", enter the minimum distance

between two opposite processing edges in "Minimum web
width" or "Web width X, Y".
10. Under the "Web-free processing" distance mode, open the
selection field with :
Punching: enter "Additional distance to tool width".
Laser: The "Web-free processing" distance mode is not
available for laser processing.
11. Under distance mode, enter "TwinLine" for "Minimum common edge length" (= minimum edge length that a part must
have to be place on the common cut).
12. When all settings have been defined: Press OK.
Defining technology (machine-oriented

nesting)
2. Select the "Technology" tab.
3. Under "Machine selection", select Selection and select the
desired machine.
4. Press OK.
Nest adopts the data for the machine and the control system.
5. If a laser cutting machine has been selected: under "Technological settings", select "Prevent tilting of parts".
Nest nests the parts in such a manner that they do not fall
through the slats or tip over.
6. In case of punching or multi-purpose machines, the selection
"Taking into account clamps" is selected.
Under "Technological settings", "Take into account
clamp", select "Do not take into account".
Select "Clamp dead areas" and select the loading position.
During sheet assignment, the machine-specific clamp
dead areas are taken into account.
or
Select "Clamp dead strips" and select the loading position.
During sheet assignment, the machine-specific clamp
dead strip is taken into account.
3-22
2012-04-13
S778EN

Condition
A nesting job is displayed.
1. Select >Job >Start >Ext. Rectangle.

When nesting, Nest orients itself to the part boundaries as a
circumscribing rectangle (rectangle nesting processor).
or
Select >Job >Start >Free geometry. Nest observes the actual
geometry of the single part or the MiniNest when nesting
(free geometry nesting processor).
2. To cancel the nesting process: press <Esc>.
The "Nesting result" mask is displayed.
3. Close the "Nesting result" mask.
The nested sheets of the nesting job are displayed as the sheet
overview. The geometries are displayed with their circumscribing
rectangles (each type of part in a different color).

1. Select >File >Save or <Ctrl> + <S>.
or
Select >File >Save as.
The "Job - File names" mask is displayed.
The last saved nesting job is displayed.
Note
The automatically suggested job name and save location can
be deactivated via "Suggest directory".
The file name can contain up to 35 characters. Digits, letters
or a combination of the two are permitted.
2. Enter the name of the new nesting job under "Job".
3. Open the "storage location" with .
4. Select the directory.
5. In order to create a subdirectory with the same job name:
checkmark "Create subdirectory for order".
6. If the individual sheet should have a name different from that
of the job or if the job path is not the same as the sheet
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-23
path: checkmark "Sheet name" and enter the name of the

new sheet.
7. Open "Sheet path" with .
9. Press OK.
If sheet formats are used in the job which are not in the
database, a warning message to this effect appears.

Nest always suggests the job name as the sheet name. If the
nesting job contains several sheets (irrespective of whether the
same or different), Nest counts up the sheet names as follows:
Example:
Name of the nesting job: Sheet.

Name of the first sheet: Tafel_1.TAF.
(...)
Name of the n-th sheet: Tafel_n.TAF.
1. Select >File >Save as.

Note
2. Check "Sheet name". Check <Kaestchen>Sheet name</
Kaestchen>.
3. Open "Sheet path" with .
The "Select directory" mask is displayed.
4. If required, change the directory.
5. Press OK.

Note
A sheet that is laid out only contains references to the single
parts which are nested on it. When a single part is modified after
a sheet has been laid out with it, the single part is modified automatically on the sheet.
3-24
2012-04-13
S778EN
Open the Parts screen
1. Select >Job >Manage parts....

Selecting a part
Note
If "Properties from file" is activated in the Parts screen, the
information saved in the GEO file (e.g. angle of rotation) is
applied when a part is selected.
2. To enter a new part in the nesting job: select Add part....
3. Mark the part that should be adopted in the nesting job.
or
To adopt several parts in the job: press <Ctrl> or <Shift> and
left click.
4. Press OK.
The selected parts are listed in the parts screen. If a part is
part of a MiniNest, the corresponding MiniNest is also listed.
Tip
Clicking on the preview window of the parts mask opens the
GEO-Viewer, which can be used to zoom in to sections of
parts.
Nesting MiniNests
5. Select "Import MiniNest".

6. Mark mini nest (*.MTL) or MiniNest (*.EMTL).
7. Press OK.
The selected mini nests/MiniNests are listed in the Parts
screen. If a part of a MiniNest is not yet loaded in the job,
the system asks whether the missing single part should be
loaded. If you select "Ignore", the mini nest/MiniNest is not
loaded.
Entering parts data
8. Highlight the desired part in the table.

The parts data is displayed in the "Part" tab.
9. Enter the desired parts data in the "Part" tab.
or
Click directly on the desired table cell in the table in the parts
screen and enter the value.
Defining the number of parts
Note
If a minimum and a maximum quantity is specified, only the
minimal quantity (required quantity) is nested at first. Once all
required quantities of a nesting job have been fulfilled and
there is still sufficient space on the sheet, then this space will
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-25
be filled with the remaining parts until the maximum quantity

has been reached. These parts are called filling parts.
10. Enter the desired number of pieces under "Number of
pieces".
or
Select Min/Max and enter the desired minimum and maximum number of pieces.
Defining the angular position
Note
For mini nests/MiniNests, the possible angular positions must
be set separately.
11. Enter the desired angle of rotation under Angular position.
or
Enter the desired angular positions directly.
Defining distance mode
Positioning in frame
Mirror part
Use a semicolon to separate multiple entries.

Example: 0;30;55
12. Set the desired mode under Distance mode. The parts distances associated with the different modes are defined in the
nesting parameters.
Grid machining
TwinLine
If necessary, enter the number of parts for a group in the
X and Y directions under "TwinLine Block X, Y".
Web-free processing
13. If you want to nest a part in the rectangular frame, check the
"Position in frame" box.
Note
If the part contains text for marking in the '*.FNT' format, the
text is not mirrored.
Allocating priority
Creating sample part
Entering customer/job
number
Allocating number of
machining cycle
3-26
14. If you wish to mirror a part when nesting: set "Mirroring".

No: Part cannot be mirrored.
If necessary: Part can be mirrored during nesting.
Half: Every second part (half of them) will be mirrored.
Always mirror: Part will always be mirrored, e.g. to prevent burr formation on the good side.
15. Select "Priority" using the slider control or enter a number
directly. The lower the number, the higher the priority.
16. If one or more sample parts are to be created, enter the
desired "number of sample parts" under Number of sample
parts.
17. Enter the customer and job number for a part under "Customer" and "Job number".
18. If necessary, enter the work cycle number ("Operation number").
19. Press OK.
2012-04-13
S778EN
The "Parts" screen closes.
or
Select Apply.
The "Parts" screen stays open.
All modifications are adopted.

The nesting process must be restarted (see "Starting automatic
nesting process", pg. 3-23).

2. In the selection field, highlight the part(s) to be deleted and
select the Delete button.
3. Press OK.

2. Mark the part to be modified in the selection field.
3. Modify the desired parameters.
4. Press OK.

Condition
In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed

(see "Modifying the sheet view", pg. 3-28).
Select >View >Color display.

All the parts on the sheet are displayed in color in accordance
with the parts overview.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-27

Conditions
A nesting job has been loaded.

Parts that are not nested yet are loaded.
1. In the "Parts" screen, highlight the parts to be re-nested and

select Re-nest.
The selected parts will be re-nested up to a maximum of
the target number of pieces.
or
Select >Job >Re-nest >Free geometry... or >Ext. rectangle....
The "Renesting of job parts that still need to be placed"
mask is displayed.
2. Activate the desired box.
3. Open selection fields with .
4. When everything is defined: Press OK.
The desired parts and/or sheets are added to the nesting job.

Condition
Showing all sheets
1. Select >Job >All sheets.

All sheets of a nesting job are displayed.
Showing single sheet
2.
Either
Mark the sheet.
Select >Job >Single sheet....
or
Double click on the sheet using the mouse.
The single sheet is displayed.
Browsing in the view
3. Select >Job >Next sheet or >Previous sheet.
2.2
The sheet layout of a single sheet or a sheet from a nesting job

can be modified.
3-28
2012-04-13
S778EN
This modifies the standard parameters (e.g. part distance) for the
job, except for the functions "Automatic sheet layout" and "Multicopy processing".

1. Select >File >Open....
2. Mark the desired *.TAF file and select OK.
The selected sheet layout is displayed.
Note
The current number of parts can be adopted as the min/max
number of pieces in order to modify the sheet layout without
modifying the number of parts on the sheet.
4. Highlight desired part and select =Actual.
The current "ACTUAL" number of pieces is adopted as the
"Min" and "Max".

Conditions
The sheet or the nesting job is loaded.

Mark the desired part in the "Parts" mask and select Manually position.
or
Double click on the desired part in the "Parts" mask.
or
Click on the part drawing in the parts overview.
The desired part is attached to the mouse pointer and can be
positioned on the sheet.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-29
When positioning parts manually, the allowed position on the

sheet is determined automatically. At the same time, the
parts to be nested are attached to the mouse and colored
green.
When moving parts over one another, when positioning them
outside the sheet or in case of an excessively less sheet distance, the parts at the mouse are displayed in red.
If multiple parts that are arranged in a frame are to be
moved, the frame is recognized when the parts are marked
and visualized by means of a cross.
Conditions
Switching multi-copy
processing detection on/off

1. Select >Parts >Multi-copy processing >Parameters.

The "Parameters for sheet layout" mask is displayed.
2. Select "Automatic multi-copy machining identification".
If the "Automatic multi-copy area detection" is activated,
this triggers actions such as separate rotation for detected multi-copies, instead of the whole block being rotated.
or
Deselect "Automatic multi-copy area detection".
Moving original part
If the "Automatic multi-copy area detection" isnot activated, the whole part block will be rotated instead of the
individual parts, for example.
3. To move the original: mark the part by double clicking.
The part hangs on the mouse and can be moved freely and
can be rotated using the wheel mouse.
or
Using the mouse, box in several parts and double click on a
marked part.
The selected parts hang on the mouse and can be moved
freely and can be rotated using the wheel mouse.
or
Mark part(s) on the sheet (to mark several parts, keep
<Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed).
Select >Parts >Move.
4.
Either
Select >Free.
3-30
2012-04-13
S778EN
The marked part hangs at the mouse and can be moved

freely on the sheet. Press the <Ctrl> key to restrict the
part to horizontal or vertical movement.
or
Select >Move horizontally.
only horizontally.
or
Select >Move vertically.
only vertically.
Copying and moving parts
5. To copy a part and move it on the sheet: mark the part on

the sheet (to mark several parts, keep <Strg> or <Ctrl>
pressed).
6. Select >Parts >Copy.
7.
Either
Select >Copy freely or <Ctrl> + <F>.
freely on the sheet.
or
Select >Copy horizontally.
only horizontally.
or
Select >Copy vertically.
only vertically.
Moving all identical parts
8. To mark all identical parts on the sheet: click on the number

of parts in the preview.
9. Select >Parts >Move >Free.
The parts hang at the mouse and can be moved freely on
the sheet.
Rotating parts
Note
When rotating, parts should not overlap with other parts
(allowed position is displayed in green).
10.
Either
To rotate an original or a copy: mark the part by double
clicking and rotate using the wheel mouse (to mark several parts, keep <Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed).
or
Select >Parts >Move >Rotate to the left or >Rotate to the
right >More....
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-31
Enter the desired angle of rotation.

The angle of rotation is automatically adapted if the part
distance is too little..
The reference point is used as point of center of rotation.
During alignment, the marked parts are moved as close as

possible to the sheet margin or, as the case may be, to
neighboring, non-marked parts. When this is done, the original distances between the marked parts are maintained.
During centering, the marked parts are either horizontally or
vertically centered in the currently free section between sheet
margins, clamps and non-marked parts.
During distribution, the marked parts are repositioned in such
a way that the distances between the marked parts and the
distances to non-marked parts or clamps are as close to
being equal as possible. The outer parts are moved as close
to the sheet margin as possible.
Conditions
Aligning parts

1. Mark the desired parts on the sheet.

2. Select >Parts >Aligning
3. Select the menu item with the desired direction.
The parts are displaced by the maximum possible distance in
the respective direction.
Centering parts
Parts distances
Centering parts (marked parts have bold borders)
Fig. 63238
3-32
2012-04-13
S778EN

6. Select >Center horizontally or >Center vertically.
The parts are horizontally or vertically centered.
Distributing parts
a, b Parts distances
Distributing parts (marked parts have bold borders)
Fig. 63239

9. Select >Free, >Free to horizontally and vertically distribute
the parts with the same parts distance in the free area
around the part group.
or
Select >Horizontal, >Horizontal to horizontally distribute the
parts with the same parts distance in the free area around
the part group.
or
Select >Vertical, >Vertical to vertically distribute the parts
with the same parts distance in the free area around the part
group.
Distributing parts in the area
a, b Parts distances
Distributing parts (marked parts have bold borders)
Fig. 63240
Note
The parts are redistributed in the area of the surrounding
rectangle around the marked part.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-33

12. Select >Free, >Free in section to horizontally and vertically
distribute the parts with the same parts distance in the
marked section.
or
Select >Horizontal, >Horizontal in section to horizontally distribute the parts with the same parts distance in the marked
section.
or
Select >Vertical, >Vertical in section to vertically distribute the
parts with the same parts distance in the marked section.

axis
1. Double-click a part or a part group to mark it
2. Select >Parts >Move >Mirror.
or
Press <Strg> or <Ctrl> + <M>.

Note
When you hang one or more parts on the mouse pointer, the
mouse cursor is always oriented to the last pick point.
1. To change the reference point: select >Parts >Move
>Change reference point.
2. Click on the new position of the reference point.

If several parts in a block are hanging to the mouse, the block
increases or decreases by entire rows or columns. In doing so,
Nest identifies identical parts which are arranged uniformly on
the sheet as one part.
3-34
2012-04-13
S778EN
Conditions

The part/parts are now hanging on the mouse.
The number of parts and/or the number of rows and columns

with parts which hang from the mouse can be increased or
decreased in stages in either X or Y direction. The absolute part
distance is used as the distance between the parts (see section
"Sheet layout through the number of parts").
Increasing the number of parts stepwise in the +X and +Y direction
Fig. 51006
Increasing the number of parts stepwise in the +Y and +X direction
Fig. 51007
Note
Only the number of copies of a part that are hanging on the
mouse can be increased or decreased.
1. Select >Parts >Multi-copy processing.
2. To increase the number of parts:
Select >+X Add column.
or
Select >+Y Add row.
3. To reduce the number of parts:
Select >-X remove column.
or
Select >-Y remove row.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-35

Conditions

1. Select >Parts >Multi-copy processing.

2. Select the desired modification for the part distance:
-dx Reduce column spacing.
+dx Increase column spacing.
-dy Reduce row spacing.
+dy Increase row spacing.
Parts hanging on the mouse can be modified stepwise by a
specified distance. This distance is always added to the
absolute part distance (= incremental distance).
3. Select more... and enter the incremental distance in mm.
4. Press OK.
Editing part grids

When the same parts in a block comprising of several rows and
columns are hanging on the mouse, Nest recognizes them as a
parts grid. Different toolbars are arranged around the grid area in
order to be able to edit it.
Conditions

Different values are displayed in the message bar during editing.

Distance
Distance between the respective part rows

or columns.
Cell size
Size of a cell (part width or height plus distance).
Grid dimension
Total width or height of the part grid.
Edge distance
Distance to the respective sheet margin.
Number of parts
Number of parts in the current grid (number

of columns x number of rows) total number
of parts on the sheet/minimum number
according to job
Example: 8(4x2) 15/10
Tab. 3-2
3-36
2012-04-13
S778EN
Modifying the number of

parts in the grid
1. Draw a frame around all parts belonging the grid with the
mouse.
2. To increase the number of parts by row or column:
Click on
and enlarge the grid frames outwards.
3. Press the left hand mouse button when the desired number
of parts has been achieved.
The frame around the grid disappears.
4. To reduce the number of parts by row or column:
Click on
and reduce the grid frames inwards.
5. Press the left hand mouse button when the desired number
of parts has been achieved.
Modifying the part distance
in the grid
6. Draw a frame around all parts belonging the grid with the
mouse.
7. To enlarge the part distance horizontally:
Click on
and enlarge the grid frames outwards.
8. Press the left hand mouse button when the desired part distance has been achieved.
9. To reduce the part distance horizontally:
Click on
and reduce the grid frames inwards.
Note
A query is issued if the set part distance is smaller than the
minimum distance.
10. Press the left hand mouse button when the desired part distance has been achieved.

another
A part or a group of parts can be copied or cut and can be pasted on sheets in the same or another nesting job.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-37
Conditions
Copying parts
1.

Either
Click on a part on the sheet.
or
To mark several parts: keep <Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed
and left click on the parts.
or
Box in the part or the part group using the mouse.
The marked parts are displayed in magenta.
2. Select >Edit >Copy.

or
Press <Ctrl>+<C>.
3. Switch to the sheet onto which the copied parts are to be
placed.
4. Select >Edit >Paste.
or
Press <Ctrl>+<V> or <Ctrl>+<V>.
The copy of the part/parts is attached to the mouse.
Note
If Consider parts and Consider sheet margin are switched
on, the allowed position on the sheet is determined and the
copied parts are displayed in green. For critical positions,
such as when there is too little space between the parts or
when parts are positioned outside the sheet, the copied parts
are displayed in red. These parts cannot be positioned.
Cutting parts
5. Store part/s using the mouse.

6. To finish, click on End.
7. To cut parts: select >Edit >Cut.
or
Press <Strg>+<X> or <Ctrl>+<X>.
8. Switch to the sheet onto which the cut parts are to be
placed.
9. Select >Edit >Paste.
or
Press <Ctrl>+<V> or <Ctrl>+<V>.
3-38
2012-04-13
S778EN
Note
If Consider parts and Consider sheet margin are switched
on, the allowed position on the sheet is determined and the
cut parts are displayed in green. For critical positions, such
as when there is too little space between the parts or when
parts are positioned outside the sheet, the copied parts are
displayed in red. These parts cannot be positioned.
10. Store part/s using the mouse.
or
Rotate the part with the wheel mouse and store it.
Placing parts at exact distance for common

cuts (TwinLine
In case of common cuts (TwinLine), the contours of contiguous
parts are cut at the same time. A sheet skeleton is not formed. If
you want to cut parts using common cuts, the distance between
the parts (web width in X and Y directions) must correspond to
the kerf width in the technology table. ("Technology table and
TwinLine preparation", see chapter "Machining parts and generating an NC program".)
Conditions
Adjusting distance between

parts to kerf width via two
points

The sheet contains parts which are suitable for common
cuts.
1. Select >Parts >Distance >Distance of 2 points.
Fig. 5990
Note
It is not sufficient just to click on the sides of those parts you
wish to move to the exact distance for common cuts.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-39
2. Click precisely on the first point (P1) or enter the coordinates

for (P1).
3. Click precisely on the second point (P2) or enter the coordinates for (P2).
4. Enter kerf width in mm.
The parts are adjusted to kerf width by moving them.
Adjusting part distance to
kerf width by rotating
5. Select >Parts >Distance >Distance rotate.
Before rotating ...
...and afterwards
Fig. 50982
6. Click on the first geometry element (1.).

7. Click on the second geometry element (2.).
Note
It is not sufficient just to click on the sides of those parts you
wish to move to the exact distance for common cuts.
8. Click precisely on the first point (P1) or enter the coordinates
for (P1).
9. Click precisely on the second point (P2) or enter the coordinates for (P2).
10. Enter kerf width in mm.
The parts are adjusted to kerf width by rotating them.
Deleting parts
Conditions

1. Click on the part(s) to be deleted (to mark several parts,

keep <Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed).
2. To cancel the marking: select >Edit >Cancel marking.
or
Press <Esc>.
3-40
2012-04-13
S778EN
3. Select >Parts >Delete marked parts.
Deleting sheets
Conditions

Select >Sheet >Delete sheet.

The sheet format can be modified only if its dimensions have
been manually entered during creation. If the sheet has been
created using a storage item, the sheet format cannot be modified. (The dimensions of the sheet are included in the storage
item. They cannot be modified.)
1. Select >Sheet >Format....
The "Redefine Sheet Format" mask is displayed.
The sheet dimensions suggested in the mask represent the
maximum expansion of the parts on the sheet (surrounding
rectangle, zero point at 0.0 ...), including sheet margins and
a "safety allowance". These are the smallest dimensions that
can be selected for the new sheet format.
2. Enter the new sheet dimensions.
3. Press OK.
The new sheet format is entered in the sheet overview with 0 as
the number of pieces. This means that the "new" sheet can no
longer be used for other nesting jobs.
2.3

To store job data in another directory or to save it in a storage
medium, the nesting job can be exported. A file is created with
the '*.ZIP' format here. The export of the nesting job is particularly useful for job data that does not need to be updated on a
daily basis and is to be archived.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-41
Example: the nesting job Zahnrder (toothed gears) will

become 'Zahnrder.job.tpdm.zip'. This job file can be managed in
Explorer.
The ZIP file for an entire nesting job is made up of the following
files:
'*.JOB'
'*.TAF'
'*.GEO'
'*.GMT'
'*.MTL'
'*.ERG' (if present).
1. Select >File >Export....

The "Data export" mask is displayed.
2. Open "Job or sheet" using .
3. If required, search for the nesting job that is to be exported.
4. Mark nesting job.
5. Press OK.
The "Data export" mask is displayed.
6. Open "Target directory" using .
7. Mark the target directory.
8. Press OK.
A message list with all exported files is displayed.

Foreign jobs (e.g. from higher-level systems) or already created
ZIP files of nesting jobs can be imported and modified.
To import old nesting jobs ('*.DAT' format) into the new '*.JOB'
format, you need to perform a data import.
1. Select >File >Import....
The "Data import" mask is displayed.
2. Open "File to be imported" using .
3. Mark the file to be imported and press Press OK.
4. Open "Target directory" using .
5. Mark the target directory for the imported file.
3-42
2012-04-13
S778EN
6. In order to create a subdirectory for the job: checkmark "Create subdirectory for order".
During the import, a directory is created below the selected
target directory, and the files are imported into this subdirectory. The subdirectory has the same name as the job file (or
sheet file, if an exported sheet is being imported).
7. If the existing local GEO/GMT files are to be used, then:
under "Options", check "Use GEO/GMT files from original
folder".
8. If you want to load the file straight away: Under "Options",
checkmark "Load imported files immediately".
9. Press OK.
A message list with all imported files is displayed
10. If a defective file has been imported, a line message list is
outputted.
In TruTops, a material is defined as unknown if one or more
of the following information points are unknown or entirely
missing: blank designation, material thickness, unit ([mm],
[inch]).
11. If you wish to import a nesting job with an unknown material:
Create the material under >Extras >Modify data... >Material
>Blank (see "Material data", pg. 2-71).

File format
The job file that TruTops is to read in needs to be structured in

accordance with a fixed diagram. Job files that were created with
previous TruTops versions, can continue to be read in.
The job file is divided into the following blocks.:
Block
Designation
Definition
Block 1
#~11
General information
Block 2
#~25
Order data
Block 3
#~40
Sheet data and data concerning

remainder sheets
Block 4
#~35
Parts designation
Tab. 3-3
S778EN
2012-04-13
Beginning of the block: #~n (n = block designation).

End of block: #~END.
End of file: #~EOF.
The job file must always begin with #~11 (Block 1).
No empty lines are permitted within individual blocks.
3-43
Example
3-44
#~11
Begin Block 1
PCNN
PC name
C:\TRUMPF
Directory root
2.3
Version no. of the DAT file, (ToPs

100 V5.00 or higher)
11-2000-3
Stock ID (version no. 2.0 or higher)
TruLaser 3030/TCL 3030
Machine name (version no. 2.1 or

higher)
Machine type (version no. 2.1 or

higher)
Sin 840D
Control system (version no. 2.1 or

higher)
Control system type (version no.

2.1 or higher)
Codepage
Codepage for character sets (version no. 2.3 or higher)
#~END
End Block 1
#~25
Begin Block 2
teil1
Job name
teil1
Sheet name
St37-20
Material ID no.
2000.000000
Sheet length
1000.000000
Sheet width
10.000000
Web in X
10.000000
Web in Y
20.000000
Top edge
20.000000
Bottom edge
20.000000
Left edge
20.000000
Right edge
Internal surfaces (1/0=Y/N)
External surfaces (0=No, 1=Part,

2=sheet)
Start corner (1=LU, 2=LO, 3=RU,

4=RO)
5.000000
TwinLine distance X
5.000000
TwinLine distance Y
TwinLine number of parts in the

block in X
TwinLine number of parts in the

block in Y
Lay out remainder sheets (1/0=Y/

N)
TwinLine layout (1/0=Y/N)
Resolution (1=small, 2=medium,

3=large)
Sorting criterion (1=surface area,

2=extent)
Fill last sheet (1/0=Y/N)
Start part (1=surface 2=X 3=Y 4=X/

Y)
2012-04-13
S778EN
2.000000
Material thickness
Sheet geometry name
C:\TRUMPF\PARTS
Sheet path name
Rolling direction (1=X, 2=Y,

3=Unknown)
Positioning direction (1=Y, 2=X)
MasterPlate (1/0=Y/N)
Exact distances (1/0=Y/N)
Sheet is not rectangular (1/0=Y/N)
Number of MasterPlates (1=one,

2=more than one)
Eliminate last sheet (1/0 or 52/2=Y/

N)
65.000000
Min. % layout MasterPlate
5.000000
Min. % improvement of mini nests
70.000000
Max. %-limit of new computation of

last sheet
0.000000
Min. element length for TwinLine
0.000000
Min. distances for securing corners

with TwinLine
PCNN
PC name for sheets
#~END
End Block 2
#~40
Begin Block 3
St37-20
Material of the remainder sheets
Sheet thickness (Z)
500
Sheet length (X)
500
Sheet width (Y)
taf1.geo
Sheet name
C:\TRUMPF ...USER_JO2
Sheet path
Number of remainder sheets
Residual number of remainder

sheets

3=Unknown)
Positioning direction (1=X, 2=Y)
Priority of sheet
rest1
Name of the remainder sheet/storage place (see Stock ID)
Sheet is not rectangular (1/0=Y/N)
Start corner (1=LU, 2=LO, 3=RU,

4=RO)
Part 1
Job name of the remainder sheet
20.000000
Top edge
20.000000
Bottom edge
20.000000
Left edge
20.000000
Right edge
PCNN
PC name for sheets
|~
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-45
:
:
|~
#~END
End Block 3
#~35
Begin Block 4
C:\TRUMP ...USER_JO2\GEO_
Part name with path specification
MTL\SZ600PLA.GEO
30
Minimum number
100
Maximum number
Rotate (0=No, 1=arbitrary, 2=rolling

direction)
Mini nest (0=No, 1=Horizontal,

2=Vertical, 3=Auto, 4=MTL, currently only 0 and 4 are supported)
TwinLine-suitable (1/0=Y/N)
C:\TRUMPF\TEILE\USER_JO2\
GEO_MTL\SZ600PLA.GEO
Parts path name
Priority
90.000000
Angle of rotation increment (0)

3=Unknown)
Nesting fit type (1=FirstFit, 2=center of gravity)
Part in the MiniNest (1/0=Y/N)
MiniNest
Name of the MiniNest
Place part in coil
Number of rows in the coil
Number of columns in the coil
PCNN
PC name for parts
None
Customer for the part (not an

empty line!)
Work cycle no.
Work cycle designation (version

No. 2.0 or higher)
Number of sample parts (version

no. 2.2 or higher)
|~
#~END
End Block 4
#~EOF
End of the file

Tab. 3-4
3-46
2012-04-13
S778EN
3.
Creating sheets and laying out with

parts
3.1
Creating new sheet
By entering filter criteria, the number of displayed entries can be

limited. When clicking on a search field, only the entry between
the already available filter variables will be marked. A new filter
value can be directly entered.
Filter field
Note
General filter field
Filter variable + value

Filter variables:
"%" stands for any character, single or multiple.
"_" stands for one random character.
Z (material thickness)
Mathematical sign + material thickness

Mathematical sign: <, <=, =, >, >=
Important: separate decimal numbers with a
point (e.g., 2.5).
X/Y (table measurements)
Mathematical sign + edge length

Mathematical sign: <, <=, =, >, >=
"Top 10"
Only the ten most often used entries will be

shown.
"All"
All available entries will be shown, including

those that are marked as invisible at >Extras
>Modify data... >Material.
Notice: unsuitable entries will also be shown!
Filter possibilities
Create new sheet
Tab. 3-5
1. Select >File >New >Sheet ....

The "Sheet selection" mask is displayed. This is filled with
the values of the last used sheet.
Selecting the material and

dimensions of the sheet via
unprocessed material ID.
2. Select "Unprocessed material ID" with .

The "Unprocessed material ID" screen appears.
Tip
By activating "Available remainder sheets", only unprocessed
materials are shown for which remainder sheets are available.
3. Select the desired unprocessed material.
The "Selection" screen is displayed with the possible sheet
dimensions.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-47
Tip
By activating "No machine limitations", all available sheet
sizes of the respective raw material ID will be shown.
4. Select the desired sheet dimensions.
The sheet dimensions are adopted in the "Sheet selection"
screen.
5. For portrait machines (e.g. TruLaser 7040) or if you want to
process small sheets in portrait format: select "Rotate 90".
The X and Y dimensions are swapped over.
6. Press OK.
The selected sheet is displayed.
Selecting the material and
dimensions of the sheet via
stock ID.
Note
The stock ID must be entered under >Tools >Modify data,
Material, Blank so that the stock is available.
7. Open "Stock ID" with .
The "Select material" mask is displayed.
8. Select the desired sheet.
The sheet dimensions are adopted in the "Sheet selection"
screen.
10. Press OK.
Entering the material and

dimensions manually
11. Select the existing sheet the same way as when using the
unprocessed material ID.
12. Enter sheet dimensions.
If there is no sheet with the entered dimensions saved in the
database, the corresponding dimensions are shown in red.
13. If a new sheet size is entered, it can be accepted into the
database with "Automatically create".
14. Press OK.
The "Create remainder sheet/blank" screen is displayed.
Note
If a sheet is created as a remainder sheet, then an "R" is
automatically placed before the storage position designation
for differentiation.
15. Create the sheet as a standard sheet or remainder sheet
with the corresponding values and Press OK..
The sheet is displayed.
3-48
2012-04-13
S778EN
or
Select Cancel.
Using a remainder sheet
The sheet is displayed, but not saved in Material Management.

16. To use a remainder sheet, activate "Remainder sheet with
any sheet geometry".
Tip
Remainder sheets with arbitrary geometry can be laid out in
"Nest" '*.TRG', '*.GEO'). The remainder sheet need not be
saved in the remainder sheet management. Thus, for example, remainder sheets can be used directly from other storage media.
17. Open the file name with .
18. Mark the remainder sheet to be laid out and Press OK.
The "Sheet selection" mask is displayed again.
20. Press OK.

Selecting a part
22. Defining nesting parameters (see "Defining nesting parameters", pg. 3-12).
23. Select >Parts >New....
The "Parts" screen and the file browser are opened.
How to continue (see "Adding parts to the nesting job", pg.
3-24).
Nesting sheets
Saving a new sheer
24. Starting the nesting process (see "Starting automatic nesting

process", pg. 3-23).
or
Select >File >Save as...The file browser opens.
26. If required, change the directory.
27. Enter the name of the new sheet under "File name".
28. Press OK.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-49
3.2
Creating a nesting job from a single

sheet
If a single sheet has been created and laid out with parts, a
nesting job can be created from this.
1. Regenerate or reload sheet.
2. Select >Sheet >Generate job....
3. Select the desired nesting parameters and start the nesting
process.
or
Select >File >Save as.
The sheet name is displayed.
Note
5. Enter the name of the new nesting job under "Job".
6. Open "Storage location" with .
8. In order to create a subdirectory with the same job name:
checkmark "Create subdirectory for order".
9. If the individual sheet should have a name different from that
of the job or if the job path is not the same as the sheet
path: checkmark "Sheet name" and enter the name of the
new sheet.
10. Press OK.
The sheet is saved in the 'JOB' format.
3.3
Automatically laying out individual

sheets

layout
Note
The "Automatic sheet layout" function uses all the general sheet
parameters except for part distance.
3-50
2012-04-13
S778EN
1. Select >Parts >Automatic sheet layout >Parameters....

2. Enter the desired "part distance".
3. Press OK.

Conditions
Automatically laying out an

area

The free geometry nesting processor is present.
1. Mark or, using the mouse, box in the part with which the
section on the sheet should be laid out.
The part is displayed in magenta.
2. Select >Parts >Automatic sheet layout >Area >Other....
3. Enter the desire number of the parts and Press OK.
4. Using the mouse, box in the section to be laid out with the
part.
The section is automatically laid out with the selected number of pieces.
Sheet layout

6. Double click to mark the part with which the sheet is to be
laid out.
The part hangs on the mouse.
7. Select >Parts >Automatic sheet layout >Sheet >Other....
8. Enter the desire number of the parts and Press OK.
The entire sheet is automatically laid out with the selected
number of pieces.
Sectional sheet layout (multi-copy

processing)
Multi-copy machining means that at least one single part is
placed in a section on the sheet several times. When nesting,
Nest determines whether multi-copy machining can be automatically allocated.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-51
Conditions

1. Select >Parts >Multi-copy processing >Parameters....

2. Enter the desired "part distance" in the X and Y directions.
3. Press OK.
4. Mark or, using the mouse, box in part(s) with which the sheet
should be laid out sectionally.
5. Select >Parts >Multi-copy processing >Fill section....
The "Data for sectional placing of parts on the sheet " mask
is displayed.
6. Enter the minimum distance of the parts in X and Y direction.
7. Select the strategy with which the section is to be laid out
with the part:
"Exact distances between parts": The entered distances
between the parts are observed. There may be unused
strips left over at the sheet margin.
"Filling the rectangle": If required, the distances between
the parts are increased so that the entire section is filled.
8. Press OK.
9. Using the mouse, box in the section to be filled with the part.
The section filled with the part "hangs" on the mouse pointer.
10. Using the wheel mouse, turn the section by an incremental
angle of rotation.
11. To change the strategy/part distances before depositing the
parts: select >Parts >Multi-copy machining >Fill section...
again.
The "Data for sectional placing of parts on sheet" mask is
displayed again. The Last box button is now active.
12. Modify minimal distances of the parts and/or change the
strategy.
13. Select Last box.
14. The section with the modified part distances and/or strategies
hangs on the mouse pointer again.
15. Enter destination for the section.
or
Position section with the mouse.
or
Enter the angular position of the section.
3-52
2012-04-13
S778EN
Enter the destination for the section or position the section

with the mouse.
The selected section is filled with the part.

Conditions

1. Select >Parts >Multi-copy processing >Parameters....

2. Enter the desired "part distance" in the X and Y directions.
3. Press OK.
4. Mark or, using the mouse, box in part(s) with which the sheet
should be laid out sectionally.
5. Select >Parts >Multi-copy processing >Place number of
pieces....
The "Data for piecewise placing of parts on sheet" mask is
displayed.
6. Enter the number of parts in X and Y direction.
7. Press OK.
The parts hang on the mouse.
Note
Only the number of copies of a part that are hanging on the
mouse can be increased or decreased.
8. To modify the number of parts hanging on the mouse: select
>Parts > Multi-copy machining.
9. To increase the number of parts:
Select >+X Add column.
or
Select >+Y Add row.
10. To reduce the number of parts:
Select >-X remove column.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-53
or
Select >-Y remove row.
11. Enter the destination for the parts that are hanging on the
mouse.
or
Position parts with the mouse.
or
Enter the angular position of the parts.
Enter the destination for the parts or position parts with the
mouse.
3-54
2012-04-13
S778EN
4.
Remainder sheets
If there are leftover sheets that are not completely occupied following processing, these cutoffs can be defines as remainder
sheets and be assigned to a new job via the remainder sheet
management system, e.g. for nesting.
4.1
Defining remainder sheets with any

geometry
Note
Remainder sheets can only be nested using the free geometry nesting processor (optional).
1. Load nesting job after whose processing remainder sheets
are left over.
2. Display single sheet view of the remainder sheet.
3. Select >Sheet >Generate remainder sheet...
The "Enter remainder sheet" mask is displayed.
4. If required, modify the name of the remainder sheet under
"File name". (The nest automatically suggests the name of
the sheet used in the nesting job with the file format '*.TRG').
5. Enter storage location and number of remainder sheets (the
number can only be reduced).
6. Press OK.
The new remainder sheet is defined. This can be used later
in another nesting job.
4.2
When remainder sheets are created, these sheets can be modified, deleted, added with more sheets afterwards.
1. Select >Tools >Manage remaining sheets....
The "Remainder sheet management" mask is displayed.
2. Open "Unprocessed material" with .
3. Mark the unprocessed material in the selection.
4. Enter the sheet dimensions of the new remaining sheet
under "Dimension X,Y".
5. If existing remainder sheets are to be transferred to management, put a check mark at "Arbitrary sheet geometries".
S778EN
2012-04-13
Remainder sheets
3-55
6. Open the "file name" with .

7. Select desired remainder sheet.
8. Enter the storage location and number of remainder sheets.
9. Select Enter.
The new remainder sheets are defined and can be used in
another nesting job later.
10. To modify a remainder sheet: mark the remainder sheet to
be modified in the selection field.
11. If required, modify the file name or the storage location or
the number of remainder sheets.
12. Select Modify.
13. To delete an existing remainder sheet: mark the remainder
sheet in the selection field.
14. Select Delete.
15. To sort out remainder sheets that are no longer in use:
select the Clear... button.
Unused remainder sheets will be sorted out.
16. To exit remainder sheet management: select Exit.
4.3
If parts of a nesting job are nested on remainder sheets, these

remainder sheets must be actively taken off from the remainder
sheet management.
Condition
A nesting job whose parts have been nested on remainder

sheets is loaded.
1. Select >Job >Take off remainder sheets.

A message list with the remainder sheets that have been
taken off from the management is displayed.
2. Press OK.
3-56
Remainder sheets
2012-04-13
S778EN
5.
MiniNest
MiniNests are single parts that are nested with themselves. The
nesting processor can calculate better sheet usage with some
parts that can be logically linked to form a MiniNest. (The nesting processor always nests based on a part drawing. A part
drawing can be either a single part or a MiniNest).
All single parts are suitable for mini nests whose exterior geometries can be fitted inside one another, such as with L-shaped
geometries. Mini nests are not practical with rectangular single
parts.
MiniNests can be made up of multiple different single parts.
In contrast to the mini nests used up until now (*.MTL), MiniNests are saved directly in the job. A MiniNest can be exported
(as an *.EMTL file) and thus used in another job. The changes
to the single parts of the MiniNest are shown, but only adopted
for the current MiniNest if prompted.
The old mini nests can still be loaded as before.
5.1
Creating a MiniNest
Condition
A nesting job is created.
1. Add the desired parts for the MiniNest to the job in the
"Parts" screen by selecting Add part....
2. Place the parts on the sheet manually in the desired MiniNest shape. If necessary, use the mouse wheel to rotate the
sheets into the desired position.
3. Once all the parts have been placed, box in the parts using
the mouse.
4. Select >Parts >Create MiniNest....
A MiniNest is created and displayed in the "Parts" screen.
5.2
1. Mark the desired MiniNest in the "Parts" screen.

2. Select Export MiniNest....
3. Select a file name and path.
4. Press OK.
The MiniNest (*.ETML) will be exported.
S778EN
2012-04-13
MiniNest
3-57
The file path is shown in the "Parts" screen under "MTL file".
5.3
Modifying MiniNests
Mini nests can be modified as follows:
Moving mini nests horizontally or vertically through 2 points

(see following section).
Rotate mini nests around a center or two points.
Distance positioning of single parts in mini nests for common
separating cuts (TwinLine).
Moving MiniNests
When you move the mini nests, the original and the copy of the
mini nest are "torn apart".
Note
A mini nest consists of the original (magenta) and a copy of the
single part (white). Only the copy can be modified. The original
cannot be modified.
Moving mini nests through 2

points
P2
P1
Copy
Original
Move the copy by 2 points
Fig. 29863
1. Load mini nest.

2. Select >Modify >Move 2 points.
3. Click on a reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates for
P1.
4. Click on the target point (P2) or enter the coordinates for
(P2).
3-58
Modifying MiniNests
2012-04-13
S778EN
5. Click on the element in the copy.

or
Box in the entire geometry using the mouse.
Move mini nests horizontally
Copy
Original
Moving the copy horizontally
Fig. 29784
6. Select >Modify >Move horizontally.

7.
Either
Enter distance for horizontal movement.
or
Click on a reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates

for P1.
Click on the target point (P2) or enter the coordinates for
(P2).
or
S778EN
2012-04-13
Modifying MiniNests
3-59
Move mini nests vertically
Copy
Original
Moving the copy vertically
Fig. 29862
9. Select >Modify >Move vertically.

10.
Either
Enter distance for vertical movement.
or
Click on a reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates

for P1.
Click on the target point (P2) or enter the coordinates for
(P2).
or
Save changes
Rotating MiniNests
Note
cannot be modified.
3-60
Modifying MiniNests
2012-04-13
S778EN
Rotate mini nest round a

midpoint
Fig. 29864
1. Load mini nest.

2. Select >Modify >Rotate center.
3. Click on a center point of rotation (P1) or enter the coordinates for (P1).
4. Enter angle of rotation, e.g.: -90.
or
Enter 1st and 2nd point for the angle of rotation.
5. Click on any geometry element in the copy.
or
Box in the entire geometry with the mouse (P3, P4).
Rotating mini nests around
2 points
Fig. 29867
6. Select >Modify >Rotate 2 points.

7. Click on a reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates for
P1.
8. Click on the target point (P2) or enter the coordinates for
(P2).
S778EN
2012-04-13
Modifying MiniNests
3-61
9. Enter angle of rotation, e.g.: -90.

or
Enter 1st and 2nd point for the angle of rotation.
10. Click on any geometry element in the copy.
or
Box in the entire geometry with the mouse (P3, P4).

MiniNests
Manually modified mini nests can be recreated automatically.
1. Load manually modified mini nests.
2. Select >Modify >Start....
The "Data for creating a mini nest" mask is displayed.
Note
With this distance, it is not possible to nest to the cut width
for processing with common cut (TwinLine).
3. Enter distance separating the single parts.
4. Press OK.
5.4
Distancing single parts of mini nests

for common separating cuts
(TwinLine
... by moving
If you wish to process single parts of mini nests with common
cuts, then you must bring the parts together in clearance width
to one another.
Note
cannot be modified.
3-62
Distancing single parts of mini nests for common

separating cuts (TwinLine
2012-04-13
S778EN
Fig. 5990
1. Load mini nest.

2. Select >Modify >Distance 2 points.
3. Click on the point (P1) in the copy or enter the coordinates
for (P1).
4. Click on point (P2) in the original (magenta) or enter the
coordinates for (P2).
5. Enter distance (e.g. 0.15).
... by rotating
If you wish to process single parts of mini nests with common
cuts, then you must bring the parts together in clearance width
to one another.
Note
cannot be modified.
Place the mini nest on the clearance width before rotating
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Fig. 30339
Load mini nest.

Select >Modify >Distance Rotate.
Click on copy (1st, white).
Click on original (2nd, magenta).
Click on point (P1) in the copy.
Click on point (P2) in the original.
Enter distance (e.g. 0.15).
Distancing single parts of mini nests for common

separating cuts (TwinLine
3-63
6.
6.1
In order to provide a better overview, the single parts can be displayed on a sheet in the colors assigned to the parts in the parts
overview.
Conditions
A single sheet or a nesting job with at least two single parts

has been recreated or is opened.
Select >View >Color display.

The single parts are shown in 2D and color on the sheet.
6.2
Displaying sheets with machine

environment
To be able to position the sheet in a true to life manner on the

machine, the sheet can be displayed with the machine environment for the laser cutting machines.
Conditions
A single sheet or a nesting job has been recreated or is

opened.
1. Open the machine selection in the menu bar with .

The "Machine selection" mask is displayed.
2. Mark the desired machine (Machine environment is only possible in case of laser cutting machines).
3. Press OK.
4. To display the machine environment: select >View >Machine
layout >Display.
5. To display the slats: select >View >Machine layout >Display
slats.
The sheet is displayed with the machine environment, the
slats and the support points.
3-64
2012-04-13
S778EN
6.3
Displaying sheet with automation

components
When working with automation components, nesting sheets such

that the parts can be removed properly and automatically is
advantageous. When doing so, LiftMaster and SortMaster can be
displayed as optical support.
Conditions
Displaying LiftMaster
Automation components are assigned to the machine and

configured ("Allocating automation components to the
machines and configuring them," (see chapter "Setting basic
data")).
Note
The LiftMaster is used only for optical support, the settings
cannot be saved and cannot be considered in the nesting
processors.
1. If a single sheet or a nesting job containing large parts for

unloading is created for a machine with LiftMaster Sort, the
LiftMaster Sort can be displayed. It is thus possible to manually ensure that the large parts are under at least three
fixed-position suction cups.
Check >View >Machine layout >Show LiftMaster.
Displaying SortMaster
Note
The SortMaster is used only for optical support, the settings
cannot be saved and cannot be considered in the nesting
processors.
2. Check >View >Machine layout >Show SortMaster.
The SortMaster is displayed.
3. To move the SortMaster on the sheet: select >View
>Machine layout >Move SortMaster.
The SortMaster hangs on the mouse.
4. Rotate SortMaster with the wheel mouse gradually.
5. Position SortMaster above a part and click.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-65
7.
Information about sheet layout and

nesting jobs
7.1
Displaying and hiding geometries of

single parts
The circumscribing rectangles of the nested single parts or the

geometries of the single parts can be displayed in the sheet
overview. Each group of identical single parts is displayed in a
different color.
Condition
The sheet overview is displayed with the nesting job.
1. To display the geometry of the single parts: select >View

>Single part >Display....
2. Use the mouse to click on or box in the circumscribing rectangle of the single parts one after the other.
3. To display all identical parts: click on a single part and select
All.
4. To hide the geometry of the single parts: select >View >Single part >Hide....
5. Use the mouse to click on or box in single parts one after
the other.
7.2
Displaying the scrap of a sheet or the

total sheet waste
Condition
The scrap for a sheet includes all the waste areas, i.e. not just
the sheet skeleton but also all waste parts that have been cut
off. The material usage can be determined from the difference of
the sheet minus the scrap. There are three different ways of calculating the material usage:
3-66
2012-04-13
S778EN
Arithmetically exact (all internal

contours are subtracted in the
calculation)
Outer contour (internal contours

are added to it in the calculation)
Circumscribing rectangle (calculation of the circumscribing rectangle)
Types of calculation for the material utilization
Fig. 50556
Displaying waste of a sheet: select >Sheet >Display waste.

or
Displaying total scrap for a job: select >Job >Show scrap.
A message with the waste and the material utilization of the
sheet or the nesting job is displayed.
7.3
Displaying and hiding geometries of

single parts
The circumscribing rectangles of the nested single parts or the

geometries of the single parts can be displayed in the sheet
overview. Each group of identical single parts is displayed in a
different color.
Condition
The sheet overview is displayed with the nesting job.
1. To display the geometry of the single parts: select >View

>Single part >Display....
2. Use the mouse to click on or box in the circumscribing rectangle of the single parts one after the other.
3. To display all identical parts: click on a single part and select
All.
4. To hide the geometry of the single parts: select >View >Single part >Hide....
5. Use the mouse to click on or box in single parts one after
the other.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-67
7.4
The single part information contains the following details:
Geo file name.

Geo file path.
Parts ID.
Remark on the drawing.
Customer name from the drawing.
Dimensions of the part.
Area of the part.
Condition
A sheet has been loaded.
1. Select >View >Information >Parts information.

2. Click on the contour.
The "Part info" mask is displayed.
3. Press OK.
3-68
2012-04-13
S778EN
8.
The tile nesting processor is especially suitable for nesting a

large number of parts. It can especially be used in the area of
rapid prototyping production. The nesting processor places the
parts in a defined sequence and in regular tiles on the sheet.
When nesting, Nest orients itself towards the part borders as circumscribing tiles.
Part in tile
8.1
Fig. 36533
Defining parameters
Condition
1. Select >Job >Parameters >Tiles....

Tip
As a rule, a large number of parts are nested. It is therefore
practical to store the parts in a directory.
2. Select tab "Sheet data" and determine the desired sheet
data.
Note
The part name may differ only in its number and it must end
with a number. The number is separated from the part name
with an underscore _.
3. Enter consistent part names: part name, underscore, number.
Example: PartA_101.geo, PartA_102.geo, PartA_103.geo, ...
4. In the "Options" tab, check "Grid", "Use".
Note
The distance of the parts can never be less than the distance of the specified webs.
S778EN
2012-04-13
3-69
5. Enter the size of the grid under "Distances X, Y".

Note
If all parts are of the same size, then the selection of the tile
size has no effect.
6. The tile size depends on the tile surface area and orients
itself according to the largest part. Select the desired area
under "Determination of tile size":
"Per job": the tile size orients itself according to the largest part of the job.
"Per sheet": the tile size orients itself according to the
largest part of a sheet.
"Per row/column": the tile size orients itself according to
the largest part of a row or column.
Different part surfaces with identical tile size
Fig. 36531
7. Press OK.
8. Select >Job >Start >Tiles.
3-70
2012-04-13
S778EN
Chapter 4

1
Order interface
4-3
User interfaces
4-4
2.1
4-4
2.2
4-4
Toolbars
4-5
Symbols
4-5
4-7
3.1
Importing an order in the order interface
4-7
3.2
4-7
3.3
4-8
3.4
Confirming the completion of a production

order
4-9
3.5
Settings
4-9
4-9
Language change
4-9
S778EN
2012-04-13
4-10
4-1

3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
4-10
Input fields
4-11
Buttons
4-11
4-11
Sorting overviews
4-11
4-12
4-13
Filter functions
4-14
4-14
4-15
4-15
4-16
Documentation
4-16
Tool tips
4-16
PPC orders
4-17
4.1
Overview
4-17
4.2
4-17
4-17
4-18
4-18
Cancel PPC orders
4-19
Enter PPC orders
4-19
Remove PPS orders
4-19
Order data
4-20
4.3
4.4
4-2
Dialogs
4-10
4-21
4-21
Importing data
4-23
Job management
4-23
4-24
Delete job
4-24
2012-04-13
S778EN
1.
Order interface
Production orders can be imported either through an Excel

import or from external PPC systems through an XML interface
in the order interface. These production orders can then directly
be installed in the corresponding nesting jobs using Nest.
If the nesting jobs have been completely programmed, the completion of the production orders is sent back to the order interface via TruTops Punch or TruTops Laser.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Order interface
4-3
2.
User interfaces
2.1
The production orders mask shows all active order parts, for
which NC programs are to be generated.
Filter settings
Display area
Detailed information
Fig. 58013
Filter settings
The number of visible production orders can be adjusted via the

filter settings (see "Filter for production orders", pg. 4-14).
Display range
All active production orders are listed in the display area and can
be selected in Nest for further processing.
Detailed information
The detailed information also clearly shows all information of the

chosen production order in list form next to a graphic component.
2.2
All orders are shown here, which were imported through the
XML interface or through the Excel import (see "PPC orders",
pg. 4-17).
4-4
User interfaces
2012-04-13
S778EN
Toolbars
Menu bar
Function bar
Quick function bar
Status bar
Toolbars in the order interface
Fig. 58014
Menu bar
General functions and settings of the order interface can be activated using the menu bar.
Quick function bar
The functions of the quick function bar also depend on the selected function area. They are displayed as symbols (see "Symbols", pg. 4-5).
Function bar
The softkey bar includes buttons that are activated or deactivated depending on the selected object. The functions of the buttons are different for every function area. In some function areas,
additional functions can be called up using the symbol on the
right-side of the softkey bar.
Status bar
Current messages, date and time are displayed on the status

bar.
Symbols
In the order interface, symbols are either used to display information (e.g. status) or symbolize certain functions in dialog
boxes or on toolbars.
S778EN
2012-04-13
4-5
Symbol
Description
Create new data record.
Edit marked data record.
You can alternatively double-click on the data
record.
Delete marked data record.
You can alternatively select <DEL>.
Actualize view.
You can alternatively select <F5>.
Output display. The output mode can be determined in a dialog box (see "Overviews in the
order interface", pg. 4-11).
Filter active (green)/not active. The filter functions are displayed/suppressed by pressing this
symbol.
An initial filter is saved for the displayed list
(see "Overviews in the order interface", pg.
4-11).
Select from available data records. The value in
the input field is automatically set as filter. If the
input field is empty, then all data records will be
displayed. A message appears if the number of
data records to be displayed exceeds a defined
maximum number (this can be modified in the
settings).
You can alternatively press <F3>.
Select from available data records. All available
data records are always displayed. This symbol
is also used for selecting files in the file system.
General symbols in the order interface
4-6
2012-04-13
Tab. 4-1
S778EN
3.
3.1
Importing an order in the order

interface
A new order can be imported in the order interface via 4 different methods.
Importing an order automatically via the XML interface from a
PPC system (see document "Interface description of the
order interface").
or
Importing an order automatically via the XML interface from a
PPC system and subsequently adjusting it manually (see
"Processing PPC orders", pg. 4-18).
or
Importing an order via the Excel import function (see "Importing PPC orders manually", pg. 4-21).
or
Creating an order manually (see "Creating a PPC order", pg.
4-18).
Tip
The "PPC orders" mask of the order interface can be opened
directly from the "Nest" application via >Extras >Show order
entry.
3.2
Condition
Order is entered in the order interface (see "Enter PPC

orders", pg. 4-19).
Note
If production jobs are imported with the same machine/same
material, the machine/material is set automatically for the nesting
job. If the machine/material differs from the data previously configured in the nesting job, the system will issue a prompt asking
whether the machine or the material should be changed.
1. Switch to the "Nest" application.
S778EN
2012-04-13
4-7
3. In the "Parts" mask, press Load production job....

The "production orders" mask is opened.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select desired production order.

Press OK.
Select job name and storage location.
Create nesting job in "Nest" application.
The selected production orders are applied in the "Nest" application. The used number can be subsequently adjusted in the nesting job. The actual used parts and partial quantities are reported
back to the order interface and shown under "Target quantity
job" in the "Job management" mask.
3.3
Condition
Order is imported in the order interface (see "Importing an

order in the order interface", pg. 4-7).

3. In the "Parts" mask, press Load production job....
The "production orders" mask is opened.
4. Press Show order entry.
The "PPC orders" mask of the order interface is opened.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Selecting an order.
Entering an order (see "Enter PPC orders", pg. 4-19).
Close order interface.
In the "Production orders" mask, press Update.
Select desired production order.
Press OK.
Select job name and storage location.
Create nesting job in "Nest" application.
The selected production orders are applied in the "Nest" application. The used number can be subsequently adjusted in the nesting job. The actual used parts and partial quantities are reported
back to the order interface and shown under "Target quantity
job" in the "Job management" mask.
4-8
2012-04-13
S778EN
3.4
Confirming the completion of a

production order
If a production order is a component of a nesting job, the used

quantity in the nesting job is automatically reported back to the
PPC order. The completion of the production order after the creation of the NC program must be reported manually from the
TruTops Laser or TruTops Punch.
Conditions
Production order is a component of a nesting job with nesting result.

NC program of the nesting job is created in TruTops Laser or
TruTops Punch.
1. Switch to the "Laser"/"Punch" application.

2. Select >NC program >NC program >Finish processing.
The completion of the used production orders is reported back to
the relevant PPC orders and shown under "Quantity in job" in
the "Job management" mask.
3.5
Settings

1. Select >Administration >Settings.
2. Modify the desired settings and then select OK.
or
Select Cancel (Modifications will not be saved).
Tip
Detailed descriptions of the settings are available as a tool tip
(see "Tool tips", pg. 4-16).
Language change
1. Select >View >Language change.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Settings
4-9
The following mask appears:
Language change
Fig. 41072en
2. Select a language and select Apply.

The language is changed. The computer does not have to be
restarted.

1. Select >View >Units of measurement.
2. Select unit of measurement and then press OK.
The measuring system is changed. The computer does not have
to be restarted.

The interface is optimized to a resolution of 1280 x 1024 pixels.
If the window has been zoomed in and out, the optimal size can
be reset.
Resetting to standard size
Select >View >Reset to standard size.

The application window is reset to the optimal size.
3.6
Dialogs
In the following, you will find general basic notes for the operation of dialog boxes within the "PPC orders" and "Job management" mask.
4-10
Dialogs
2012-04-13
S778EN
Input fields
There are three types of input fields:
Mandatory fields:
Mandatory fields are displayed on a yellow background.
These fields must be filled out in order to save a data
record. An error message appears if a mandatory field has
not been filled when a dialog box is being closed.
Can fields
Can fields are displayed on a white background. These
fields can be filled out or left empty.
Disabled fields
Disabled fields are displayed on a gray background. These
fields cannot be edited.
Buttons
OK
All entries in the dialog box are saved and the

dialog box is closed.
Adopt
The current data record is saved. The dialog

box remains open.
New...
An empty data record is generated.
Copy
The field for the name of the data record is

reset. All other entries are retained. In the case
of data records with similar features, you can
use this function to avoid reentering of the
entire data.
Close
The dialog box is closed. If the data record has

been modified, a prompt to save or discard the
modifications appears.
Buttons
3.7
Tab. 4-2
Overviews are displayed in tabular form as lists (e.g. PPC

orders, relevant jobs, etc.). Different auxiliary tools are available
so that you can find the desired information quickly in these lists
(see "Filter for PPC orders", pg. 4-15).
Sorting overviews
The overviews can be sorted in ascending or descending order
according to each column displayed.
S778EN
2012-04-13
4-11
1. Click on the heading of the column according to which the

list is to be sorted.
The list is sorted. An arrow next to the heading of the column shows the sorting direction.
Tip
You can sort according to multiple columns by keeping the
<SHIFT> key pressed.
2. Click on the heading of the column again to change the sorting order.
The printing functions allow a manifold output of all overviews
and tables. The overviews can, for instance, be directly exported
as PDF or XLS files or can also be sent directly via E-mail as
PDF files.
1.
Select print symbol
The following dialog box will appear:
Fig. 53419en
Print dialog box
2. Select the desired output mode from "Print on..." . Various

export formats are available (e.g. printing, XLS, XML, HTML,
PDF, etc.).
Tip
The output can be generated directly as a preview, Excel or
.
PDF file with the symbols
3. Make further settings if needed.
4-12
2012-04-13
S778EN
4. Select Start.
The current list is output in the desired output mode.
Sending a print-out as an Email
Note
The print-out can also be sent directly via e-mail using the
printing selection dialog box.
5. Print the desired document from TruTops.
The printing selection dialog box appears.
6. In the field "Output to..." select the output type "Preview" and
select Start.
The preview is displayed.
7. Select the letter symbol
in the menu bar.
The following dialog box will appear:
Fig. 58412de
Mail dispatch
8. Select "PDF document" (or other format) from the list and
select OK.
The printout is converted into the specified format and is
automatically inserted into a new E-mail of your standard
mail program.

The number of displayed data records can be displayed or deactivated in the quick function bar.
1. Click in the list with the right mouse button.
The context menu opens.
2. Select Number of records.
The number of data records is displayed in the quick function
bar.
Number of data records (29 here)
S778EN
2012-04-13
Fig. 44241
4-13
3.8
Filter functions

The filter functions can be used to filter the displayed production
orders with different criteria. Here, the filter functions are displayed in a line above the data.
Activating filter criteria
Note
The filtering can be both positive ("all orders which contain
the following value") and negative ("all orders which do not
contain the following value"). The filter criteria are preceded
by a "-" in case of a negative search.
1. Select filter criterion from the list of filter criteria and enter the
corresponding filter value.
Enter filter criterion directly in the filter line, end with ":" and
enter the corresponding filter value.
or
Right-click the desired filter value (e. g. Customer "XYZ") and
select filter according to the value.
2. Select the next filter criterion, if needed.
The list is updated with the filters.
Deactivating filter criterion
3. Delete filter line.

The entire list is displayed.
Standard filter
4. Select the desired filter under >Filter criteria >Standard filter.

Tip
Using >Save filter, the current filter settings are saved as
User-defined.
Sort columns
5. Select Reset to activate the selected standard filter.

6. Click on the heading of the column according to which the
list is to be sorted.
The list is sorted. An arrow next to the heading of the column shows the sorting direction.
Displaying and hiding

columns
4-14
Filter functions
7. Click on the heading of the column again to change the sorting order.
8. Right-click on any column.
9. Activate or deactivate the desired columns in the contextsensitive menu.
2012-04-13
S778EN

The filter functions can be used to filter the displayed data with
different criteria. Here, the filter functions are displayed above
the data.
Displaying and suppressing
filter functions
Applying filters
1. Select the filter symbol
The filter function bar is displayed or deactivated.

2. Enter filters in the respective fields. Use "%" as dummy.
3.
Select the
symbol (or press <F5> ).
The list is updated with the filters.
Deactivate filter
4. Enter "%" in all fields.

The entire list is displayed and the filter symbol changes to
"No filter active"

For every list displayed, the currently set filter can be saved as
the so-called "Initial filter". The list is then automatically filtered
with the initial filter each time it is opened.
Note
The initial filter is saved with reference to terminals; i.e. it is
applicable for all users of the terminal.
Setting initial filters
1. Enter filter criteria in filter functions.

2. Click in the list field with the right mouse button.
3. Select Save initial filter.
The initial filter is set and the filter symbol changes to "Initial
filter"
Deleting initial filters
4. Click in the list field with the right mouse button.

5. Select Delete initial filter.
The initial filter is deleted.
S778EN
2012-04-13
Filter functions
4-15
3.9
Documentation
The documentation of the order interface is part of the TruTops
software manual and is available as PDF file directly in TruTops.
Opening the manual
Select >Help >Help in TruTops.

The manual is opened.
Tool tips
The so-called "tool tips" provide additional information, descriptions or help on individual elements of the user interface (e.g.
symbols, list elements).
Displaying a tool tip
Point to the desired element with the mouse.

The tool tip appears in a yellow box next to the mouse
pointer after a short time.
Fig. 41080
Tooltip
4-16
2012-04-13
S778EN
4.
PPC orders
4.1
Overview
Orders are automatically transferred through the PPC interface

and are displayed in the "PPC orders" function area (see document "Interface description of the order interface"). Orders that
were imported through the Excel import interface are also displayed.
The Status column shows the 2 possible statues for the individual orders:
Released ( ): Order is fully imported and associated production orders are listed in the Production orders mask.
Incomplete ( ): Order is not complete. The order must be

completed and entered manually (see "Working with PPC
orders", pg. 4-17).
Note
Only successfully imported orders are shown. If errors arise during import, the files are given the ending ".error" in the Import
directory and an all the errors are written to a log file which is
also saved to the Import directory.
4.2

2. Select >Tools >Show incoming orders....
or
Select >File >New >Job....
In the part selection mask, press "Import".
The production orders mask is opened.
Press Show order entry.
The "PPC orders" mask of the order interface is opened.
S778EN
2012-04-13
PPC orders
4-17

1.
Select the symbol

tion bar.
for new PPC order in the quick func-
The input dialog box appears.

2. Enter the "order number".
3. Enter "Part No."
Select an existing part:
Enter the filter value in the "Part no." field and select the
.
"Select part" symbol
Select a part from the list and select OK.

If the raw material for this part already exists, a prompt
will appear asking you if you want to accept the raw
material.
or
Create a new part:
Enter part no. manually.
The part data is applied in the mask.
4. Enter "Raw material ext.".
5. Enter the "target quantity".
6. Enter additional specifications as needed.
Tip
As long as the order is not entered, the status of the order
remains "Incomplete". The order can still be saved and you
can complete it at a later time.
7. Select OK or Apply.

1. Mark the job.
2.
Select the symbol
for Edit order.
The input dialog box is displayed.

3. Modify data.
4. Select OK.
4-18
2012-04-13
S778EN
Cancel PPC orders

When canceling, the PPC order is deleted from the order interface and a cancellation message is sent to the PPC system.
Condition
The order is not contained in any nesting job and is not

being processed.
1. Mark the job.

2. Select Cancel order.
or
Select the deletion symbol
in the softkey bar.
3. Confirm the cancellation message.

If the PPC order has been directly transferred from the PPC
system, a dialog box appears in which you can enter a deletion note.
Enter PPC orders

If the PPS orders are not automatically entered by the PPC system (setting in the XML file, see document "Interface description
of the order interface"), they must be manually entered in the
order interface, in order to be able to generate a production
order from them.
1. Mark the job.
2. Select Enter order.
The status of the PPC orders changes to "Released". The
relevant production order can now be added to a nesting job
in the nest application.
Remove PPS orders

Condition
The production order is not included in any nesting job.
1. Mark the job.
S778EN
2012-04-13
4-19
2. Select Output order.

The status of the PPC orders changes to "Incomplete" . The
relevant production order can now no longer be used in the
nest application.
Order data
Following fields are included:
Field title
Description
Order No.
The unique name of the order.
Part no
The unique name of the part to be produced.
Part no. ext
An extended name of the part to be produced.
Filler part order
Indicates that the production order is only used for

filling sheets. Even when the number of units for
the order is not achieved, no new sheet will be
assigned with the parts that are still not accounted
for.
Job status
The current status of the order.
Module
This can be used as a filter/grouping option.
Customer order.
If the production order was generated from a customer order, the customer order is displayed.
Customer
Customer for whom the production order is produced.
Customer order
no.
If available, a customer order no. can be specified.
Identification
This can be used as a filter/grouping option.
Target finish date
The deadline for finishing the order.
Priority
1 = lowest priority, 10 = highest priority
Req. quantity
Number of parts to be produced
Remark
Any text or active contents can be entered here.
Target processing
time
You can enter the maximum time for machining the

part here in minutes.
Monitoring
Marking whether the operation is a critical one that

needs to be monitored by an employee. The identification can be used as a filter criterion when creating a job. As soon as an operation with monitoring
is included in the job, the entire job receives the
"Monitored" identification.
Part rotatable
Part rotatableIf this function is active, parts can be

rotated for this operation during nesting. Only for
programming with TruTops.
Rolling direction
Information about the rolling direction of the sheet.
Order data fields
4-20
Tab. 4-3
2012-04-13
S778EN
4.3
Note
Excel Import can only import files with the standard Excel format
*.xls. The Office 2007 *.xlsx format is not currently supported.
The "Excel import" function can be used to import orders as
PPC orders in Microsoft Excel format.
The assignment of the columns from the Excel file to the corresponding columns in the order interface is done using an import
scheme which must be defined earlier.

Selecting the Excel file
1. Select Excel import.

The "Import orders" mask is opened.
2. Use the file selection symbol to open the Excel file in the file
system.
Because no import scheme has yet been created, a corresponding message will appear.
Configuring a scheme
3. Select Configure....
The following mask appears:
Fig. 43937en
All table sheets of the selected "Excel file" are displayed in

the "Excel table" field as selection list.
4. Select the table sheet from which the data is to be taken.
5. Activate "Read out area".
The fields used to enter the table area are activated.
S778EN
2012-04-13
4-21
Assigning columns
6. Enter the table area from which the data is to be read out in
the "Table area" fields (e.g. "A1:F10").
7. Enter further options:
Header exists: Indicates whether a line should be used
as column headings.
Header position: Indicates which line is to recognized as
header.
Remove blank lines: All empty lines in the table are not
imported.
8. Select the "Mapping" tab.
Mapping
Fig. 43938en
In mapping, each column from the Excel table is assigned

with the corresponding field name in the order interface.
9. In the right list field, mark the column name from the Excel
table.
10. Mark the field name in which the values from the marked
table column should appear from the left list field.
.
11. Select the transfer symbol
The column name is transferred from the right list field into
the left list field. To correct, select the opposite transfer symbol
.
12. In this way, assign all columns of the table to the fields in
the order interface.
13. Make additional entries:
Decimal separator: Specifies whether the decimal values
from the Excel table are separated by a comma or a dot.
Generate Order No.: An order number is automatically
generated for each data record from the Excel table if
this option is activated. Deactivate this option if a field
with the order number is already defined in the table.
14. 16.To save the configuration, select Save as.
A dialog box for entry of the name for the configuration
appears.
4-22
2012-04-13
S778EN
15. Enter a name for the configuration and select OK.

The configuration is saved.
16. Adapt further tables from the Excel file as required.
17. Close the configuration dialog box.
The data from the Excel file is now displayed in the import
dialog box.
Finished configuration
Fig. 43942en
The saved configuration can be selected under "Import

scheme".
Importing data
Condition
At least one import scheme has been created.
1. Select Excel import.

The import dialog box appears (see "Fig. 43942en", pg.
4-23).
2. Select the import scheme from the list.
3. Use the file selection symbol to open the Excel file.
4. Select Import .
All of the data from the selected Excel file will be imported
into the order interface with the selected import scheme.
4.4
Definition "Job"
S778EN
2012-04-13
Job management
A job consists of one or several PPC order parts for which a

nesting job has already been created. Normally all part orders
have similar unprocessed material.
Job management
4-23

If the PPC order is already included in nesting jobs, these jobs
can be displayed.
1. Mark the PPC order.
2. Select Respective jobs.
The order interface changes to job management and applies
the display filter to all jobs with the order number of the
selected PPC order.
3. Select Back to return to the PPC overview.
Delete job
If a nesting job is manually deleted via the file browser in TruTops, no feedback is sent to the order interface. The order interface checks the completed jobs automatically after three days
and deletes them.
The relevant job can also be manually deleted in the Job management.
1. Select the job that is to be deleted.
2.
Select the deletion symbol
in the softkey bar.
The job is deleted.
4-24
Job management
2012-04-13
S778EN
Index
"Nest" application
Overview ................................................3-4
B
A
Backup & restore ......................................2-6

Blank ........................................................2-71
Add other details to list field of the files 1-32

Any cycle
Copy ..................................................2-151
Print ...................................................2-152
Any cycles .............................................2-150
Delete for active machine .................2-152
Applications in TruTops ............................1-9
Closing and reopening individually .......1-9
Closing permanently ...........................1-10
Opening several times ........................1-10
Renaming ............................................1-10
Switching language .............................1-11
Automation
Adjust automation components ..........2-34
Auxiliary circle, drawing ..........................1-76
Center and diameter ...........................1-77
Center and radius ...............................1-76
Diameter ..............................................1-76
Tangential to an element ....................1-79
Tangential to an element and two points ..
1-78
Tangential to three elements ..............1-79
Tangential to two elements ................1-78
Three points ........................................1-76
Auxiliary circles, drawing
Auxiliary circles, concentric .................1-77
Auxiliary geometry
Deleting ................................................1-80
Auxiliary line
Dividing an element ............................1-75
Auxiliary line, drawing
2 points ................................................1-72
Auxiliary line at right angles to an element
..............................................................1-73
Auxiliary line parallel to the existing one . .
1-72
Horizontal or vertical ...........................1-72
Point and angle of inclination .............1-74
Point and angle to the base line ........1-74
Tangent at 2 arc elements .................1-75
Auxiliary line, drawing
Tangent at the arc element and point 1-73
S778EN
2012-04-13
C
Calculator .................................................1-66
Deactivating, permanently ...................1-66
Enter coordinates of points .................1-67
Enter numerical values in input fields 1-67
Characteristics .........................................1-49
Characteristic fixed, switching on or off ....
1-49
Characteristics, highlighting ................1-50
Characteristics, removing ....................1-50
Notches - advanced options ...............1-51
TruTops behavior ................................1-49
Check file dependencies (PDM) .............1-45
Clamps .....................................................2-36
Adjust clamp data ...............................2-36
Configure .............................................2-36
Color scheme, modifying ........................1-52
Command line and input line .................1-16
Confirmation masks
Hidden masks, reactivating .................1-69
Coordinate system
Zero point, displacing ..........................1-81
Copy Paste, using ...............................1-65
D
Data backup ..............................................2-6
Data management .....................................2-9
Open ......................................................2-9
Database
Import data ............................................2-6
Modify ....................................................2-6
Send by email .......................................2-7
Dependencies between files (PDM)
Check dependencies ...........................1-45
Delete, export dependent files, display
properties .............................................1-46
Directories
Rename ...............................................1-29
Index
5-1
Display and hide button texts in the function

browser ....................................................1-17
Display and hide outline points ..............1-56
Display and hide quick navigation bar ...1-17
Display detail view ..................................1-54
Display drawing completely ....................1-54
Display of drawings .................................1-54
Display and hide outline points ..........1-56
Display detail view ..............................1-54
Display drawing completely ................1-54
Displaying sheet completely ...............1-54
Get last view .......................................1-56
Memorize and recall view ...................1-56
Move screen section ...........................1-55
Restructure drawing ............................1-54
Zoom drawing .....................................1-55
Displaying the Read me file .....................1-8
Drawing auxiliary lines ............................1-72
Drawing display
Displaying sheet completely ...............1-54
E
Enable snapping ........................................3-6
Enter coordinates of points .....................1-67
Enter numerical values in input fields ....1-67
Entries in the command line, repeating . 1-65
Exporting (PDM)
Using prompt/script .............................1-44
Via the TruTops file browser ..............1-43
External magazines for tools ..................2-40
External programs .................................2-154
Delete ................................................2-159
Enter ..................................................2-154
Execute ..............................................2-156
Modify ................................................2-159
Geo Viewer
Open files with it .................................1-33
Get last view ...........................................1-56
Grip ..........................................................2-68
Configure .............................................2-68
GripMaster .....................................2-34, 2-68
Configure .............................................2-68
Group .......................................................2-71
H
Hidden message and confirmation masks,
activating ..................................................1-69
File properties
Viewing ................................................1-39
Material, selecting ...............................1-39
Files
Delete and restore ..............................1-30
Open with the Geo Viewer .................1-33
Search .................................................1-31
Sending through e-mail .......................1-33
Zip ........................................................1-34
closing ..................................................1-11
Importing/exporting via Windows Explorer
(PDM) ..................................................1-41
Rename ...............................................1-29
5-2
Send from PDM to "My Documents" in the

file system ...........................................1-34
Files (PDM), importing
Using file browser ...............................1-41
Files, automatically checking updated status
when loading and saving in TruTops (PDM)
..................................................................1-48
Folders
Importing/exporting via Windows Explorer
(PDM) ..................................................1-41
Free cycles
Create ................................................2-150
Function browser .....................................1-15
Display and hide .................................1-16
Display and hide button texts in the function browser .........................................1-17
Display and hide quick navigation bar ....
1-17
Modify the size of the symbols ..........1-19
Index
Import data into the database ..................2-6

Importing files (PDM)
Via Windows Explorer .........................1-41
Importing several folders (PDM) .............1-42
Importing, files(PDM)
Using the prompt/script .......................1-44
Information, displaying
Job, total sheet scrap of .....................3-66
Sheet, scrap of ....................................3-66
Single parts, geometries, showing and hiding ........................................................3-66
Internet
2012-04-13
S778EN
TruTops, obtaining tips and tricks ........1-8
K
K address ................................................2-41
Key functions of TruTops, using ............1-64
Keyboard buffer of command line, using
(entries, repeating) ..................................1-65
Keyboard operation .................................1-63
Copy Paste, using ...........................1-65
Key functions of TruTops, using ........1-64
Keyboard buffer Command line, using
(entries, repeating) ..............................1-65
Numerical values and coordinates, entering ........................................................1-63
Texts, entering in input fields .............1-63
Windows keyboard commands and shortcuts, using ...........................................1-63
L
Language, switching ................................1-11
Laser rules
Assign rules to a technology table .....2-93
Change parameter ..............................2-98
Copy ....................................................2-96
Delete ..................................................2-97
Display and print .................................2-98
Name ...................................................2-94
Parameter description .........................2-99
Via technology table, searching .........2-95
LiftMaster
Displaying in nest ................................3-65
M
Machine
Adjust automation components ..........2-34
Adjust stop pin data ............................2-35
Automatically update machine ............2-10
Configure basic data .................2-12, 2-17
Configure the unloading area for palletizing ..............................................2-20, 2-56
Copy ....................................................2-38
Data .....................................................2-10
Delete ..................................................2-39
Manually update machine ...................2-11
Removal and sorting of small parts ...2-33
Select options ......................................2-32
Select repositioning devices ...............2-33
S778EN
2012-04-13
Set up the production package edition ....

2-37
Update machine ..................................2-10
Machine data ...........................................2-10
Machine rules ........................................2-107
Assignment of values to colors and line
types ..................................................2-111
Change the value of a variable ........2-107
Copy variable ....................................2-109
Delete variable ..................................2-110
Description of variables ....................2-112
Display details for a variable ............2-109
Main menus and submenus ...................1-14
Masks and messages, moving ...............1-53
Material ....................................................2-71
Material data ............................................2-71
Add ......................................................2-73
Define unprocessed material sheet margins ......................................................2-76
Delete ..................................................2-77
Modify ..................................................2-76
Measuring
Angle ....................................................1-81
Coordinates of a point ........................1-80
Coordinates, radius and diameter of a circle ........................................................1-80
Distance between 2 points .................1-80
Horizontal or vertical distance between 2
points ...................................................1-80
Length ..................................................1-81
Memorize and recall view .......................1-56
Message masks
Hidden masks, reactivating .................1-69
Mini nests
Single parts of mini nests, distancing for
common separating cuts (TwinLine ....3-62
MiniNest ...................................................3-57
Creating ...............................................3-57
Exporting ..............................................3-57
MiniNests
Modifying .............................................3-58
Moving .................................................3-58
Rejecting modifications .......................3-62
Rotating ...............................................3-60
Modifying the sheet layout ......................3-28
Mouse operation ......................................1-62
masks ..................................................1-62
Move screen section ...............................1-55
Multi-function buttons ..............................1-15
Index
5-3
N
NC-post-processing program
Delete ................................................2-159
Modify ................................................2-159
NC-post-processing programs
Execute ..............................................2-156
NC output ................................................2-17
NC output format for tool change ..........2-40
NC output parameters .............................2-17
NC post-processing program
Enter ..................................................2-154
NC post-processing programs ..............2-154
Nesting jobs
Adding parts ........................................3-24
Compiling ...............................................3-8
Customer/job number ..........................3-26
Defining options ..................................3-14
Defining parameters ............................3-12
Defining part distances .......................3-21
Defining sheet data .............................3-12
Defining technology .............................3-22
Deleting parts ......................................3-27
Determining the start part ...................3-17
Exporting ..............................................3-41
Filling the last sheet ............................3-15
Importing ..............................................3-42
Internal surfaces, occupying ...............3-16
Modifying parts ....................................3-27
Nesting accuracy, defining ..................3-20
Nesting job, creating from a single sheet
..............................................................3-50
Nesting MiniNests ...............................3-25
Nesting mode ......................................3-13
Nesting process, starting ....................3-23
Nesting processors ...............................3-7
Occupying external surfaces ..............3-17
Parts or sheet, re-nesting automatically ....
3-28
Positioning direction, defining .............3-18
Positioning parts in a frame .................3-9
Sample parts, creating ..........................3-8
Selecting nesting profiles ....................3-20
Sheet name, modifying .......................3-24
Sheet view, showing ...........................3-28
Single sheet, showing .........................3-28
Single sheets, browsing ......................3-28
Start corners, defining .........................3-19
Structure of a job file ('*.DAT') ...........3-43
Nesting processor
Tile nesting processor .........................3-69
Nesting processors ....................................3-7
5-4
Index
Notches
Advanced options through the "Characteristic" property .......................................1-51
Numerical values and coordinates, entering
..................................................................1-63
O
Open files, closing ...................................1-11
Operating TruTops with the mouse ........1-62
P
Palletizing .......................................2-20, 2-56
Palletizing terms ...................2-20, 2-21, 2-57
Parameters
Defining for automatic sheet layout ....3-50
Nesting jobs ........................................3-12
Options for a nesting job, defining .....3-14
Tile nesting processor .........................3-69
Part grids
Editing ..................................................3-36
Parts
Aligning ................................................3-32
Automatic area layout .........................3-51
Automatic layout ..................................3-51
Automatic sheet layout .......................3-51
Centering .............................................3-32
Changing the reference point .............3-34
Copying ................................................3-38
Copying or cutting from one sheet to
another .................................................3-37
Cutting .................................................3-38
Deleting (single sheet) ........................3-40
Distance for common cuts, placing at
exact distance (TwinLine) ...................3-39
Distributing ...........................................3-32
Manual layout ......................................3-29
Modifying distance ..............................3-36
Modifying number of ...........................3-34
Moving .................................................3-30
Rotating ...............................................3-30
Parts monitoring
Activating parts monitoring ...................3-5
Activating sheet edge monitoring .........3-5
PDM (Product Data Management) .........1-21
Advantages ..........................................1-21
Check dependencies between files ....1-45
Delete, export dependent files, display
properties .............................................1-46
2012-04-13
S778EN
Files, automatically checking updated status when loading and saving in TruTops
TruTops ...............................................1-48
Importing/exporting files and folders . .1-41
TruTops file browser ...........................1-27
TruTops with PDM, TruTops without PDM,
in comparison ......................................1-22
PDM functions
Calling up via prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)
..............................................................1-23
pdmCLI.exe
Carrying out PDM functions ...............1-23
Place holders (for search) ......................1-68
Place holders (wildcards), searching with the
help of ......................................................1-68
Print .........................................................1-70
Printing
Geos as HPGL ....................................1-70
Labels ..................................................1-71
Screen content ....................................1-70
Programs
User-defined programs .....................2-160
Prompt
Carrying out PDM functions ...............1-23
R
Recycle bin (PDM) ..................................1-30
Empty ...................................................1-30
Rename ...............................................1-31
Reference point, changing ......................3-34
Remainder sheets ...................................3-55
Defining ................................................3-55
Managing .............................................3-55
Taking off ............................................3-56
Removal and sorting of small parts .......2-33
Restructure display of drawings .............1-54
Rotate tool angle .....................................2-41
Rules ......................................................2-107
types ..................................................2-111
Copy variable ....................................2-109
Create variable ..................................2-108
Delete variable ..................................2-110
Description of variables in the machine
rules ...................................................2-112
Description of variables in the system
rules ...................................................2-126
Running scripts (pdmCLI.exe) ................1-23
S778EN
2012-04-13
S
Screen display .........................................1-52
Color scheme, modifying ....................1-52
Masks and messages, moving ...........1-53
Window size, adapting ........................1-52
Selecting nesting mode ..........................3-13
Set up production package edition .........2-37
Sheet
Creating ...............................................3-47
Displaying ............................................3-64
Saving ..................................................3-49
Sheet data ...............................................3-12
Sheet format, modifying ..........................3-41
Sheet layout
Load existing .......................................3-29
Sheet view, showing ...............................3-28
Sheet, displaying completely ..................1-54
SheetMaster ...................................2-34, 2-43
Change U parameters ........................2-51
Configure .............................................2-45
Defining suction cup data ...................2-43
Modify data for lifts with a Y offset ....2-54
SheetMaster with grippers: to define moving table ...............................................2-49
Sheets
Automatic layout ..................................3-50
Automation components, displaying with . .
3-65
layout ...................................................3-50
Deleting ................................................3-41
Displaying with machine environment 3-64
Laying out with the number of parts (multicopy machining ...................................3-53
Nesting job, creating from a single sheet
..............................................................3-50
Sectional layout (multi-copy processing) ...
3-51
Showing parts in color ........................3-64
Single folders (PDM), importing
Using file browser ...............................1-41
Single part information
Displaying ............................................3-68
Single sheet, showing .............................3-28
Software manual, displaying .....................1-8
Software version, showing ........................1-8
SortMaster ...............................................2-70
Displaying in Nest ...............................3-65
Status bar and message line .................1-16
Index
5-5
Subroutine parameters ............................2-17

Subroutines ..............................................2-17
Suction cup data .....................................2-43
Suction cup types ....................................2-43
System rules ..........................................2-107
types ..................................................2-111
Copy variable ....................................2-109
Delete variable ..................................2-110
Description of variables ....................2-126
T
T address ................................................2-41
Technology table
Modify header data .............................2-83
Technology tables ...................................2-78
Assign rules .........................................2-93
Change parameters ............................2-86
Delete ..................................................2-85
Description of the parameters ............2-87
Display and print .................................2-85
Filter .....................................................2-82
Naming ................................................2-79
Texts, entering in input fields .................1-63
To call up the online help .........................1-8
Tool angle ................................................2-41
Tool change .............................................2-40
Tool data .................................................2-40
Define tool system data ......................2-40
Set tool lubrication ..............................2-41
Tool lubrication ........................................2-41
Toolbars ...................................................1-16
Modify existing, create own ................1-18
Move or downsize ...............................1-18
Delete ..................................................1-19
Display and hide .................................1-17
Modify the size of the symbols ..........1-19
Rename ...............................................1-19
Reset to the original status ................1-19
ToolMaster ...............................................2-40
Tools in external magazines ...................2-40
TRUMALIFT .............................................2-43
Change U parameters ........................2-51
Configure .............................................2-45
Modify data for lifts with a Y offset ....2-54
SheetMaster with grippers: to define moving table ...............................................2-49
TRUMPF functions ....................................2-8
5-6
Index
TruTops database .....................................2-5

TruTops file browser ...............................1-27
Add other details to list field of the files ...
1-32
Create new folders ..............................1-29
Delete and restore files ......................1-30
Delete folders ......................................1-29
Open ....................................................1-28
Open files with Geo Viewer ................1-33
Recycle bin (PDM) ..............................1-30
Rename files or folders ......................1-29
Search for files ....................................1-31
Send files from PDM to "My Documents"
in the file system .................................1-34
Send files through e-mail ....................1-33
Zip files ................................................1-34
TruTops, exiting .........................................1-7
TruTops, operating using keyboard ........1-63
TruTops, operating with the mouse
Mouse pointer, automatically placing in
masks in TruTops ...............................1-62
TruTops, starting .......................................1-7
TruTops, tips and tricks from the Internet 1-8
U
U parameters ...........................................2-51
Unloading area for palletizing .......2-20, 2-56
Unprocessed material ....................2-71, 2-76
Unprocessed material sheet margins .....2-76
User's own NC texts (any cycles) ........2-150
User-defined programs ..........................2-160
Change ..............................................2-160
Enter ..................................................2-160
Run ....................................................2-160
User-defined settings ..............................1-12
Copy and transfer ...............................1-12
User interface
Modify the size of the symbols (toolbars,
function browsers) ...............................1-19
Command line and input line .............1-16
Delete toolbar ......................................1-19
Display and hide button texts in the function browser .........................................1-17
Display and hide function browser .....1-16
Display and hide quick navigation bar ....
1-17
Display and hide toolbars ...................1-17
Function browser .................................1-15
Main menus and submenus ...............1-14
Menus, function browsers and toolbars ....
1-14
2012-04-13
S778EN
Modify existing toolbars, create own toolbars ......................................................1-18

Move or downsize toolbars .................1-18
Multi-function buttons ..........................1-15
Rename toolbar ...................................1-19
Reset toolbars to original status .........1-19
Status bar and message line .............1-16
Toolbars ...............................................1-16
V
Version, showing .......................................1-8
W
Wildcards (for search) .............................1-68
Window size, adapting ............................1-52
Windows keyboard commands and shortcuts, using ...............................................1-63
Z
Zero point of the coordinate system, dispacing ............................................................1-81
Zoom drawing ..........................................1-55
S778EN
2012-04-13
Index
5-7
5-8
Index
2012-04-13
S778EN

TNest EN PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

TNest EN PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Software manual

Please specify when ordering this document:

Address for orders

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG

Starting and exiting TruToPs

Online help, software version, tips and

To call up the online help

Obtaining tips and tricks directly from the

Showing software version

Applications, closing and reopening individually

Applications, opening several times ("copy")

Application, closing permanently ("deleting")

Switching language for all applications

Closing open files

Copying and transferring user-defined settings

Menus, function browsers and toolbars

Displaying and hiding the function browser

Displaying and hiding button texts in the

Displaying and hiding quick navigation bar

Displaying and hiding toolbars

Moving or downsizing toolbars

Modifying existing toolbars, creating own toolbars

Resetting toolbars to their original status

Modifying the size of the symbols

Displaying overlapping contours

Reactivating disabled optional message

TruTops with PDM (Product Data Management)

TruTops with PDM, TruTops without PDM

PDM functions, calling up via prompt/

Calling up help for pdmCLI.exe

Examples of PDM functions which can be

TruTops file browser

Opening TruTops file browser

Creating a new folder

Renaming files or folders

Deleting and restoring files, emptying the

Searching for files

Adding other details to the list field of the

Opening files with the Geo Viewer

Sending files through e-mail

Sending files from PDM to "My Documents"

Creating and restoring file versions (PDM)

Displaying and hiding the version window

Creating a file version

Restoring a file version

Deleting a file version

Tips & Tricks

Archiving the copies of a file

Viewing file properties

Selecting the unprocessed material ID and

Files and folders, importing/exporting

Files, importing/exporting via Windows

Importing files and single folders using the

Folders, importing several folders in a single

Files, exporting via the TruTops file browser

Importing/exporting files using the prompt/

Dependencies Between Files

Checking dependencies between files (PDM)

Deleting, exporting dependent files, displaying properties

Updated status of the files

Characteristics: a property of elements